GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, WITH PRACTICAL EXERCISES, BY N. WANOST110CHT, LL. D. M THE SEVENTEENTH EDITION, REVISED AND CORRECTED 1&^-/U^ V > A.L.JOSSE, Author of a Grammaire Espagnole raisonnti ; of the Teioro &c. &c. LONDON: PRINTBB FOB BOOSEVAND SONS; J.NUNN'; J. " D GKEN; J827. -.>', : \^- : - v -*/- v- 1 C. Baldwin, Printer, L- - |Kew Bridge-street, Loudon.1 / CONTENTS. AN Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs ........ I! INTRODUCTION. Grammar ................. j The French Alphabet .................. \ fa Syllables, long or short ..................... j'b' & c . Accents ..................... The Diaeresis ...... The Cedilla ........... "..".". ..!".!!".'.'.'.'.".'.! [ ib. The different Kinds of Words. . ... '. '. '. '. '. '..'., *. ' ' ' ib. General Explanations . , ................. 4, CHAP. I. Substantives ................ Gender and Number .......... ib Substantives that are never used in the Plural . (j Substantives that are never used but in the Plural '. '. ib. General Rule for the Formation of the Plural Exceptions ..................... / Formation of the Plural of Compound Words 8 No Cases. Observation ............ 9 CHAP. II. The Article ....................... 9 Elision and Contraction of the Article, &c. ... ib Table of the Article in its Variations and Combinaiions with the Prepositions de and (1 .............. 10 &c. Rules for the proper Use of the Article, with Exer- .:. ....................... 11, &c. Article, though expressed in English, must be omitted in French. Rule 5. ............ 15 &c The Article before Proper Names of Countries, AVnoL . aoms, Provinces, Rivers, Winds, &c. 17 2125832 iv CONTEXTS. Page Exceptions 17, &c. The Way to translate two or more Substantives that immediately follow each other, the last having the Sign of the Possessive Case. Rule 8 19 Also, the Preposition to when used instead of the Sign of the Possessive Case. Rule 9 20 The Article and Preposition, before Substantives pre- ceded by the Adverb bien t signifying much, many, &c. Rule 10 21 The Article precedes all Nouns Substantive taken in a partitive Sense.- Rule 11 22 Exception. Rule 12 23 The Article omitted, and the Preposition to, rendered by en before Proper Names of Countries, Kingdoms, &c., that are preceded by one of these Verbs to go, to return, to send, io come, &c. Rule 13 24 Exception. The Proper Names of distant Countries, and of some few Places in Europe that always take the Article ib. &c. Other Rules for omitting the Article, with Exercises, 25, &c. Rules for rendering into French the English Article a or an, with Exercises 28, &c. CHAP. III. The Adjective 32 Formation of the Feminine of the French Adjectives, v , ib. &c. Formation of the Plural of the French Adjectires. . . . 35 Rules and Exercises ib. &c. The Place to be given to the Adjective 37 The Adjectives that precede their Substantives ib. The Adjectives that come after their Substantives. ... 38 Rules and Exercises 39, &c. Degrees of Signification in the Adjective 42 Rules and Exercises 43, &c. Adjectives and Nouns of Number 49* Cardinal Numbers 50, &c. Rules and Exercises 52, &c. Ordinal Numbers 54, &c. Substantives of Number 55 Rules and Exercises . ib, occ. CONTENTS. V Pag* Compound English inverted Nouns .58 Eules and Exercises 59, &c. Recapitulatory Exercise upon the preceding Rules, 61, &c. CHAP., IV. Pronouns 68 Pronouns Personal ib. &c. Pronouns Reflected 69, &c. Observations. 1, 2. Upon Pronouns Personal . . 70, &c. 3. Those that are always Subjects of the Verb, and those that may be either the Sub- jects or Objects of the Verb 71 4-. The Pronouns it and they always take in French the Gender, &c., of the Noun they represent ib* Exercise on the Personal Pronouns Subjects of the Verb 72 Observations. 1,2,3. The Pronouns we and they, used in a general, vague, or indefinite Sense, ren- dered by the indefinite Pronoun on ib. &c. Rules and Exercises on Personal Pronouns Subjects of the Verb 74-, &c. On the Pronouns je and moi, I ; lu and tot, thou ; il and lui, he ; Us and eux, they 77 Rules and Exercise ib. &c. Personal Pronouns Objects of the Verb 80 Their Place in a Sentence 81 Rules and Exercises ib. &c Table of Pronouns, Objects of the Verb 83, &c. The Order which the Pronouns, Objects of the Verbs, must keep with respect to each other 84 Rules and Exercises ib. The Pronouns y and en 85 Rules and Exercises 86, &c. The Pronouns le, la, les 88 Rules and Exercises ib. &c. The Pronouns, Objects of different Verbs, must be repeated before each Verb. Rule 13 90 The Pronouns Personal that can never be used after a Preposition. Rule 14< 91 Recapitulatory Exercise on the Personal Pronouns, ib. &c. Possessive Pronouns . 95 Ti CONTENTS. Pag Rules and Exercises 96, &c. Demonstrative Pronouns 103 Rules and Exercises 104, &c. Relative Pronouns 1 10 Rules and Exercises Ill, &c. Interrogative Pronouns 117 Rules and Exercises 118, &c. Indefinite Pronouns 1 20 Rules and Exercises 121, &c. Recapitulatory Exercises upon all the Pronouns, 140, &c. CHAP. V. Verbs 146 The different Sorts of Verbs 147 Conjugation of Verbs 148 Moods ib. &c. Tenses 151 Tenses of the Indicative Mood 1.52 Compound Tenses 157 Tenses of the Subjunctive or Conjunctive Mood. . . . 160 Numbers and Persons , 1 62 The Number of Conjugations 163 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb avoir, to have . . 164 Of ctre, to be 166 Observation. 1. Some or any translated by du t de la,&c 169 ' -2. The Place to be given to the Ne- gation ne-pas or ne-point ib. 3. Avoir, used negatively, requires the Preposition de or cf before the Substantive that follows it, &c ib. 4. Agreement of the Verb with its Subject ib. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs 170, &c. Avoir, with an Interrogation affirmative, and an In- terrogation negative 173 Rules and Exercises ib. &c. Observation. To be, preceding any Noun signifying Hunger, Thirsty Cold, &c., must be rendered by avoir, &c 177 Observations. I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. On the Peculiarities of certain Verbs ending in ger, cer, eler, eter, enir, endre, yer, eoir, &c 178, &c. CONTEXTS. Observations. 7. On do and did '. 179 8. Some Verbs do not admit the Pro- noun je after them 180 First Conjugatioa ib. &c To take and to carry, &c. The different Ways of ren- dering them 183 Observation. The auxiliary Verbs have,* am, do, &c., used to avoid the Repetition of a preceding Verb, . &c. 184 Exercises on the First Conjugation 185, &c Second Conjugation 188, &c Exercises on this Conjugation 191, &C Third Conjugation 193, &c. Exercises on this Conjugation 196, &C Observation. Should expressing duty or necessity, or when it can be turned into ought, &c 198 Fourth Conjugation , 200 Exercises on this Conjugation 203 Recapitulatory Exercises on the regular Verbs of the Four Conjugations 205, &C, Promiscuous Exercises on the Compound Tenses . . 208 Conjugation of Passive Verbs 209 Neuter Verbs. How to distinguish a neuter Verb from an active one 210 The general Rule to know which neuter Verbs take avoir, and which take etre for their Auxilfaries, 211, &C Reflected Verbs 215 Reflected Passive Verb 216 Reciprocal Verbs 217 All the Reflected and Reciprocal Verbs take tire for their Auxiliary ib. Conjugation of the Reflected Verbs 218, &c. Observation 1. To take a rid.?, an airing, &c 221 Exercises upon the Reflected Verbs 222, &C. Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs 225 First Conjugation , 226 Second Conjugation 228 Exercises on Verbs of this Conjugation and their Compounds 234-, &C. Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation 253, &C. Can, may, could, or might, expressing an absolute or permissive Power, &c. Rule 10. 1 259 May expressing a tw/* .... 2 ib* Vlll CONTENTS* Page Could and might Rule 10, 3. .7.... .7... 259 Coiild or might 4-, joined to the Verb to have, immediately followed by a Participle past i5i. Cannot, I cannot, je ne saurois 260 JVill or would, signifying ivill, choice, deliberation, &c. Rule 11. J, 2, 3 264-, &c. Exercises on the foregoing Verbs and their Com- pounds 265, &c. Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation .... 269, &e. Exercises on the foregoing Verbs and their Com- pounds 279, &c. Impersonal Verbs 313 Conjugation of the Impersonal Verbs ib. &c. There is, followed by no and a Participle active, ren- dered by on ne pent pas, on ne sauroit, ^.^Ob- servation 317 It is, it was, used to denote a Space of Time, it is so long since, &c. Rule 12. 1, &c 318, &c. Ago acting as a Substitute for there is,&c. Rule 13, 319 This or these placed before the Time soecified, &c. Rule U, &c 320, &c, It is, &c., followed by a Noun, Pronoun personal, pos- sessive, &c. rendered by c'est, &c. Rule 19, &c.. . "323 He, she, &c., taken in a general Sense, followed by who, &c. rendered impersonally. Ex. He is a fool ivho } &c. C'est etrefou que, &c. Rule 20 324- It is, &c., followed by a Noun Adjective, &c., ren- dered by il est. Ex. It is surprising, &c. ; il est ttonnarit, &c. Rule 21. 1 326 It is, &c., used to denote the state of the "weather, rendered by ilfait, &c. It isjlne -weather; ilfait beau temps. Rule 21 . 3. ., UK Must, rendered byjalloir, with Rules and Exercise?, 327, &CY The Indefinite Pronoun on 332 Recapitulatory Exercise on the Impersonal Verbs, 333, &c. Participles 336 Participle Active and Verbal Adjective ib- &c. The first indeclinable. Rule 26 *&. The other declinable. Observation &. The Participle Active, governed by Prepositions or the Article the, rendered in French by the present of the Infinitive, &c. Rule 28 338 CONTENTS. t Rules for ascertaining when the Participle Past is de- clinable and when indeclinable ............ 34-1, &c. Recapitulatory Exercise on the Participles Past. . . . 351 CHAP. VI. Adverbs ...... . ............................. 353 Tables of Adverbs, with Exercises ............ ib. &c. Observations. 1. How, &c., before an Admiration, rendered by que ............................ 357 2, 3, 4-, 5. How long, &c., rendered by combicn y a-t-il que, &c .................. ib. &c. Tables of Adverbs, with Exercises .......... 359, &c. Observation -on the Adverb oil .................. 367 Observations on the Adverbs nan, non pas, lie, nc- pas, ne-point, point, NO, NOT .............. 368, &c. Exercise upon these Adverbs ................ 372, &c. Tables of Adverbs, with Exercises .......... 375, &c. CHAP. VII. ' Prepositions .................................. 384- Prepositions that are followed by de, with Exercise, ib. &c. Prepositions that are followed by a, with Exercise. . 387 Simple Uncompound Prepositions, with Exercise, ib. &c* Observations on the Prepositions above, at, by, for, from, in, on or upon, over, with, without, with Exer- 'cise .................................. 391, &c. CHAP. VIII. Conjunctions ................................ 406 Conjunctions which govern the Verb in the Infinitive Mood, with Exercise ...... ................ ib. &c. Conjunctions which govern the Verb in the Indfcntivt Mood, with Exercise .................... 4-07, &c. Observations. 1. The Conjunctions that have this Mark *, with Exercise .................. '4-10, &c. --- 2. The Conjunction than, with Exer- cise .................................. 4-11, &c. Conjunctions which govern the Verb in the Subjunc- tive Mood, with Exercise ................ 4-12, &c. Observations. 1. If, instead of being repeated, &c. 116 A 5 X CONTENTS. Page Observations. 2. The Conjunction guv, as well as the Pronoun, must be repeated in the second Part of a Sentence, &c 416. Promiscuous Exercise on the Conjunctions ib. &c. Que, following any Verb denoting wish, will, com- mand, doubt, fear, &c., governs the Verb, &c. Rule 1, with Exercise 418, &c. After vouloir, to have, governing another Verb, not expressed, &c. Rule 2. 1 421 Shall, referring to the tvill, and meaning choose, &c. Rule 2. 2, with Exercise ib. &c. Qui, qne, or clont, preceded by a Superlative, require the following Verb in the Subjunctive, &.c. Rule 3, with Exercise , ., 423, &c. CHAP. IX. Interjections 424- The different Sorts, with Exercise ib- &c. Rules on the Prepositions de, d, and pour, with re- spect to Verbs that command or reject them, with Exercise 426, &c. Observations on the Prepositions en, dans, and a, IN or A r 433, &c. Idiomatical Expressions on the Verb avoir, to have, &c., with. Exercise 434, &c. 1 ctre, to be, with Exer- cise 437, &c. fairc, to make, or do, with Exercise 438, &c. different Verbs, to have rather; to take a great deal upon one's self; it is no "wonder ; I long to, &c , with Exercises . . 441, &c. General and promiscuous Exercises on different Sub- jects 445, &c. AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF IRREGULAR VERBS, WITH REFERENCES TO THE PLACES IN WHICH THEY, OR SIMILAR VERBS* ARE CONJUGATED IN THIS GRAMMAR J WITH REMARKS. English. French. Conjugated like Page To Acquire Acquerir 228 Avoid, 1 or Shun Fuir * 237 Abstain S'Abstenir. . . "| Attain to Parvenir a. . . >Tenir 245 Anticipate Prevenir. J Assault Assaillir .... Tressaillir.... 24-6 be Able. Pouvoir 3 258 Absolve Absoudre 269 Abale Rabattre Battre .... 271 Acknowledge^? Reconnokre> know again . . j Accrue Accroitre. . . Appear Paroitre. . . . Connoitre - 2 fall Asleep again Se Rendormir j U0} nr ...... 233 1 E viler, to avoid, and assister, to assist, are regular verbs of the first conjugation. a See Remarks on Pret. p. 237, and Imperfect of Subjunct. p. 238. 3 Seep. 259. 4 See Remark, p. 299, 5 See Note 1 above. Xll AN ALPHABETICAX^4.RRANGEMENT OF English. French. Conjugated like Page To Boil Bouillir ' i Boil again Rebouillir . . . . 1 Bouilhr ' 230 Belie Dementir. . . . Mentir 238 Belong Appartenir. . . * Become of .... Devenir *. . . . - Become fit, &c. Convenir .... STenir 245 Beat Battre 1 Beat again Rebattre .... Beatdown (abate) Rabattre ^Battre 271 273 283 Bake, or Boil,'} often English- >Cuire ed to do. j again ga l n :...} Recuire >Conduire.. .. 275 Build. 3 or Con- \ : Construire. . . Ecrire 286 be Born Naitre ^ be Born again. . Renaitre .J Naitre 298 To Conquer Conquerir . . . Acqucrir .... 228 Courir 231 Contradict, or 7 T' s 1 Belie.. :....j Dementir ' > Mentir. ..... 238 Consent Consentir. . . . ^ r Cover Couvrir 1 Cover again . . Recouvrir . . . J - Offrir 240 Contain Contenir . . . . H Come Venir 5 ] Come back .... Revenir ^Tenir 245 Clothe Vetir I Come to, Befall Survenir J Clear a table. . Desservir .... 244 Conclude Conclure .... 274 1 See p. 231. * See Observation, p. 248. 3 Buttr, to build, and Bannir, to banish, are regular verbs of the second conjugation. * See Note 4 above s See Remark, p. 248. THE IRREGULAR VERBS. xifl English. To Conduct, Lead.? or Carry . . . . } Construct,Build, Circumcise ____ Chance, or Fall? t ! J- Contradict... Curse ........ Constrain ., . ? Compel ....... j Complain ..... Come to life, as 7 from an egg, j Counterfeit ....... Compromise.. Commit .......... Chide ............ Conquer . . . Convince ......... French. ~ , . Conduire .. Construire. Circoncire ' Conjugated like Page ^ 1 Conduire _ . 2?5 J Confire ...... 276 T\' i aca Dechoir ..... 256 1 7^- aQ . Dire ........ 28 * Contredire* Maudire /-. i 1 Contramdre.. L Craindre _. 2 82 Se Plaindre. . J ,, 7 Lclore 4 Contrefaire . ............ 286 Faire ....... 288 Compromettre? , r .. on , Commettre... | Mettre ...... 291 Reprendre. .. Prendre ..... 301 Vaincre 5 . . . . ? -rr . or ^ Convaincre . . j Vajncre ..... 306 To Discourse Discourir. . . . Die Mourir be Dying Se Mourir . . . Detain '. . . Detenir Disagree Disconvenir. . Discover Decouvrir... . Depart Dcpartir Dissolve Dissoudre 6 . . Drink Boire 7 Debate Debattre Decay Dechoir Do an ill office, Desservir. . . . Deduct Dcduire. . . Destroy "^ Detruire. . . Do over, with >.-, , . ' f f Enduire. . . mortar, &c... J Decrease Decroitre. . Disappear Disparottre Describe Decrire . . . 1 Sc Participle P:ist, p. 274. a See Participle Active, p. 257- 3 See Note, p. 285. See p. 286. s See Notes *,f, p. 39( 6 See p. 270. ~ See Note, p. 273. Courir 231 - Mourir 239 - Tenir 245 Offrir 240 Mentir 238 Absoudre. . . . 269 272 Battre 271 256 Servir . .- 275 \ n i > Conduire. J \ r nnnr r t * f ) Connoitre 3' crire ...... 286 yUY AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF English. French. Conjugated like Page To Do .......... Faire . ...... "| Do again ...... Refaire ..... > Faire ....... 288 Defeat. ....... Defaire ..... j Dissemble ..... Feindre ..... "| Dye .......... Teindre ..... >Craindre .... 282 Draw, Design. . Peindre ..... J Defer, Put off, or ~ T> * ., ani Deliver up! . . } Reraettre Mettre ...... 291 Displease...., Deplaire.. . .. Plaire ....... 300 Distract ...... Distraire .... Traire ...... 305 To Entertain ...... Entretenir. . f Tenir ....... 245 Exclude ....... Exclure I . . . . Conclure . , . . 274 Exact ........ Surfaire ..... Faire ....... 288 Enjoin ........ Enjoindre. . . . ) Enclose ....... \ -. . , VCraindre .. .. 282 Encompass.... j Enceindre '--J Elect ......... Elire ........ Lire ........ 289 Extract ....... Extraire ..... Traire ...... 305 To Fetch ......... Querir 2 ..... Acquerir .... 228- Flee, or Fly ____ Fuirs ......... ......... 237 Feel ......... Sentir ...... *J Foresee, er have I ptir ^Mentir ...... 238 a foresight of, J J Foresee ....... Prevoir 4 .... Voir ....... . 262 Fit,5 or fit well.. Seoir 6 ...... Asseoir ...... 253 Fight ......... Cotnbattre. .. Battre ....... 271 Fear. . ........ Craindre . . . . "I Force ........ Contraindre. . > Craindre .... 282 Feign ........ Feindre ..... j Forbid ........ Interdire ....") n; _ 004. Foretell. . ...... Predire ..... | Dire 7 ....... 284? Fall out, or Hap- J ^^ ...... D , choir ..... ^Q Fry ____ * ..... Frire ................... 289 Feed, or Graze. . Paitre ...... Connoitre. . . . 277 Follow ........ Suivre Follqw from . . . S'Ensu Fine-draw. . Rentraire. . Traire . , . 305 rf ii f or- i Suivre . , . 303 r ollQw from ... o Lnsuivre. . . J 1 See p. 238. a See p. 229- 3 See p. 237, 238. 4 See p. 263. 5 See the verb To Become, &c. 6 See p. 2 54. ' See Note, p. 285. 8 See p. 257. THE IRREGULAR VERBS. XT English. Frffnch. Conjugated like Page To Go ........... Aller ....... \AHer 226 f~> o A 11 r XiULi . ...... _ U Go away ...... S'en Aller. . . J Gather ....... Cueillir ...... 1 x-i .1 .f T> !! r Gather together Kecueilhr. . . . J Go out ....... Sortir. ...... Mentir ...... 238 Grow ......... Croitre ...... "\ row less ..... Decroitre. . . . I Connoltre ... 277 Grow again. . . . llecroitre. ... I Graze ........ Paitre ....... J Glitter ........ Reluire * . . . . Conduire .... 275 Glimpse, or to j Entrevoi Voir ........ 2 62 have a glimpse or J Grind ........ Moudre ..... 1 Moudre ..... 2 92 Grind again . . . Kemoudre. . . 3 Giv . e f , other JRevetir ................. 248 clothes ...... j Gird .......... Ceindre ..... Craindre ..... 282 To Hold ......... Tenir ....... ) Happen une X O sir ..... VTenir ....... 245 pectedly J Hear ......... Quir .............. \ ..... 241 Hatch ........ Eclore .................. 286 Hurt ........ Kuire a ...... Conduire.... 275 Humour ...... Complaire .. . of To Incur Encourir.... Courir 231 Impart Departir .... Mentir 238 Infringe Contrev ? nir ^ \Tenir. . . 245 Intervene Intervenir. . . . J Invest Revetir 248 Interdict Interdire 3 . . . Dire 284- Inscribe. Inscrire IScrire 286 Induce Induire 1 Instruct Instruire . . . . > Conduire .... 275 Introduce Introduire. . . j Include Comprendre . . Prendre 301 1 See p. 290. * See p. 299. 3 See Note, p. 285. XVI AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF English. French. Conjugated like Page To Jut, Jet out, sC\ term in Archi- > Saillir ' Tressaillir .... 246 tecture only, J Join Joindre Craindre.... 282 To Keep.. Tenir . 245 Know somebody Connoitre . . . ~) r .. a ~*. J r> A. > Lonnoitre. ... 277 Know again . . Reconnoitre . J Know something Savoir* . 259 To Lie Mentir iMentir give one the Lie Dementir. . . . J Lead Conduire .... 7 p. .> Lead again .... Reconduire . . J L re ' ' Learn ... Apprendre .. Prendre .... 301 Leap for Tressaillir ... 246 Laugh Rire 302 Live Vivre 307 rp . f Maintenir . . . ") m ctA e. To Maintain | So utenir ....} Tenir 24f5 Move ... Mouvoir . . 1 ,, . x,- Move 5 orStiru P , Emouvir .. .. | MouvOir **\* 257 Mistake, or be \ Meconnottre Connoitre . . . 277 deceived ... J or, Meprendre Prendre ..... 301 Make Faire "| Make up again Refaire >Faire 288 Mimic Contrefaire . . J Milk Traire . . 305 To Overtake ____ Atteindre . . . Craindre .... 282 Obtain ........ Obtenir ..... Tenir ...... 245 do an ill Office, Desservir . . . . Servir ...... 244 P s e ter aS an y "}Eclore .................. 286 Outlaw ...... Proscrire . . . . JEcrire ...... 286 Omif ........ Omettre ____ Mettre ...... 291 Outlive ...... Survivre .... Vivre ....... 307 Oblige ........ Astreindre3 . . Craindre .... 282 1 See p. 247. a See Notes, p. 260. 3 Grows obsolete, p. 271. THE IRREGULAR VERBS. XVU English. French. Conjugated like Page. To Prevent Prevenir I ^ . 0/LK Proceed Provenir .... f iet L . . Z * 5 Prescribe .... Prescrire . . . 00 /, Proscribe .... Proscrire . . . . j Ecnre 286 Prevail Prevaloir * . . . Valoir 261 Provide Pourvoir 2 . . Voir 262 Pull down Abattre Battre 271 Preserve . Confire 276 Put out Eteindre . . . . *\ Pretend Feindre L/V.i.ii-a oo Paint Peindre >Craindre .... 282 Pity Plaindre ) Part with Se Defaire . . . Faire 288 Put Mettre 3 ) Permit Permettre ... [ Promise Promettre 4 . . L Mettre 291 Put back again ") T> Put off ...... i Reraettre ""J Prepossess '. .' '. '. } Pr6venir "" Tenir 245 Produce Produire .... Conduire .... 275 Pursue Poursuivre . . Suivre 303 Please Plaire 300 To Require Requerir .... Acquerir .... 228 get rid of Se Defaire . . Faire 288 Run Courir "^ Run to .... Accourir.. . I . ,, Runover .... Parcourir. .. . ( Counr 231 have recourse to, Recourir . . . . ) Runaway .... Fuirs 237 Retain Retenir "1 Return Revenir ..... { Remember, orl c . A ! . a4f . Remind...... j Se Souvenir' )>Temr 245 Recollect .... SeRessouvenir ! Relieve Subvenir . . .. J Resent Ressentir .. . . ^ Reply Repartir >Mentir 238 Repent Se Repentir. . J 1 See p. 462. 2 See p. QG3. 3 See Note, p. 291. * See Note, p. 292. 5 See ^237, 238. s See Obs. p. 248. AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OP English. French. Conjugated like to Roar .. Bruire . . . . . Page 273 Resoudre 1 . . Absoudre. . . . 269 Retract ...... Recant 1 Se Dedire * . . Dire 284? Read Read again .... Lire ....;. Relire 289 Resign Dcmettre . . . Se Demettre * JMettre 291 Rise f as ? Naitre Revive ^flowers j Renaitre . . . 298 Reprendre . Prendre .... 301 Reduce Reduire .... Conduire .... 275 Restrain Reach Restreindre . Atteindre3 . " J- Craindre .... 282 Revive Recover . . .... j- Revivre .... 307 To Succour Secourir . . Sleep Dormir . . . : , make Sleep ., Endormir . Shun , Fuir ...... Suffer Souffrir . . . Serve Servir .... Support Soutenir . . Suit CoHvenir . . Start, Startle .. Tressaillir . Stir up Emouvoir.. See ., . . Voir See again .... Revoir .... Solve Soudre . . . , i Sewr. .,-,., , . 1 ~ , Stitch jCoudre.... Sew again .... Recoudre . . ;_ Sharpen ...... Emoudre . . Set out Partir .... Set out again . . Repartir . . be Sensible of, Ressentir., Sraell Sentir Struggle Se Debattre Sit down Asseoir* .. Sit down again, Se Rasseoir ? Se p. 270. * See Note*, p. 285. * Se* p. 270. > Courir 231 Dormir 233 237 Offrir 240 . 244 Tenir 245 246 Mouvoir .... 257 -Voir Absoudre 262 269 > Goadre ...... 278 Moudre ..... 292 V Mentir ...... 238 . J .. Battre ...... 271 * * 1 Asseoir ..... 253 3 Obsolete, p. 271. See p, 854. THE IRREGULAR VERBS. XIX English. To Supersede . . . Say Say again . . . Slander ..... Speak ill of. . . Shut, or close. Shut, or .... Surround with ! French. Surseoir. Dire..., Redire . Medire' Clore r Conjugated like >Dire, Page 255 284 Enclore * walls, &c. Subscribe .... Souscrire . Satisfy Satisfaire . . Shine Luire 3 . . . . Submit Soumettre . Surprise Surprendre Smile Sourire. . . . Seduce . Seduire . , Suffice.orbeSuf-") c m ficient }Suffire4 .. Seem Paroitre . . Subtract.... Soustraire. VEclore ...... 286 ^crire ...... 286 Faire ....... 288 Conduire .... 275 Mettre ...... 291 Prendre ..... 30r Rire ........ 302 Conduire .... 275 Confire ...... 276 Connoitre . . . 277 Traire ...... 305 To Tell Tell again .... Transcribe .... Turn out Transmit Take Take again. . . . Translate .... Throw down . Dire Redire Transcrire . . Demettre . . . Transmettre, Prendre Reprendre . . Traduire Abattre . , | ] Dire .... ____ 284 Ecrire ...... 286 Mettre Prendre ..... Conduire.. . . 275 Battre . , .271 Offrir 240 Dire 284 . 288 To Unsew Decoudre. . . . Coudre 278 Use, or make use 7 o c c . j- Se Servir. . . . Servir 24)4 Uncover Decouvrir . . . Unsay Se Dedire * . . Undo Defaire *) P . Undo again Redefaire. ... j r Understand. . . . Comprendre .^ Unlearn Desapprendre > Prendre 30f Undertake .... Entreprendre . J To Vanquish Vaincre 6 306 1 See Note *, p. 285. 9 See p. 286, * See p. 290. * See p. 303. 5 See Note*, p. -285. 6 See Note* *,t, p. 306. XX AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT, &C. To Welcome .... Accueillir * . . Cueillir ..... 232 be Worth ____ Valoir .................. 261 -- .............. 263 Write ........ Ecrire ...... 1 . Write again . . Rc>crire ..... j Ecnre ...... 286 Whet........ Emoudre. ... Moudre... . 292 EXPLANATION OF THE ABBREVIATIONS MADE USE OF IN THIS GRAMMAR. m. Noun masculine. f. Noun feminine. pi. Plural, sing. Singular. adj. Adjective, pro. Pronoun. v. Verb, p. act. Participle active. p. p. Participle past. p. Preposition, pret. Hef. Preterite definite, preter. plu. Preterpluperfect. fut. Future, fut. corap. Future compound, adv. Adverb. c. ' Conjunction, int. Interjection. The English words that have this mark underneath are not to be translated. The figures *, 3 , 3, &c., point out the order to be given to the words in their translation into French. 1 Very little used. * See p. 264, 265. A PRACTICAL FRENCH GRAMMAR. INTRODUCTION. GRAMMAR is the art of speaking and writing a language with propriety ; or it is the art of rightly expressing ideas by words. Grammar consists of two kinds, viz. general and parti- cular. General grammar considers language in itself; explains the principles which are alike common to every tongue, and distinguishes, with precision, between those particulars which are essential and those which are only accidental. Particular grammar applies these common principles to a particular language, and furnishes certain rules and observations which are, either mediately or immediately, deducible from its common principles. A grammar of the French tongue must be formed agreeably to the established rules and decisions of the Academy. It has for its object, in common with all other grammars, the consideration of letters, syllables, ivords, sentences, &c. In the FRENCH ALPHABET there are twenty-five letters, viz. a, b, c, d, e,f, g, h, i,j, k, I, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, ~. Six of these, namely, a, e, i, o, u, and y, are VOWELS, so called because each can be distinctly sounded without the assistance of any other letter. The rest are called CONSONANTS, because they cannot be perfectly sounded without being associated with some vowel, placed either before or after them. A SYLLABLE, whether composed of one letter or more, requires, in the pronunciation, a single impulse of the voice ; ex. ba, me, mot, &c. Syllables may be either long or short, according to the time required in pronounging them. For example, the first vowel B 8 INTRODUCTION. Is long in It is short in Pate, paste. Patte, pan. Bete, beast. Bette, beet. Gite, lodging. Rite, rite. Tot, soon. Botte, boot. Chute, a fall. CA// silence! As the accents in the French language generally affect the sound of vowels, and often make syllables long, I shall endeavour to give here a clear notion of them. OF ACCENTS. There are in French three different accents. 1st, the acute (') from right to left. 2d, thegrave (') from left to right. 3rd, the circumflex ( A ), a union of the acute and the grave. The vowel e sometimes takes one of them ; sometimes it does not take any. Hence arise four different sounds belonging to the letter e. E. When marked with the acute accent, it is calledferme, close; as in etc, been ; bonte, goodness. When marked with the grave accent, it is called ouvert, open; as in pere, father ; mere, mother; succes, success; ires, very. When marked with the circumflex accent, it is open and long ; as in etre, to be ; fete, feast ; ttte, head. When without any accent, it is called muet , that is to say, not sounded ; as in bonne, good ; chute, a fall ; monde, world ; ville, town ; seroante, female servant. A, i, o, u. Whenever any of these vowels is marked with the circumflex accent, the syllable to which it belongs is long. Ex. pate, paste ; bdtir, to build : baton, stick ; fdche, angry ; epitre, epistle ; lie, island ; gite, lodging ; apotre, apostle ; dome, Aome;jant6me, phantom; lenotre,* ours; le votre, yours; irons, throne ; Aout, August ; gout, taste ; Jtute, flute ; jeune, fast ; voute, vault. * Notre and votre do not take the circumflex accent when they are fol- lowed by a substantive ; they take it only when they are preceded by the article. INTRODUCTION. OBSERVATIONS ON THE GRAVE ACCENT. There are several words in French on which the grave accent is placed merely to distinguish them from others that are formed of the same letters. In those words the accent does not in the least affect the pronunciation. They are <5, to, preposition ; des, from, preposition ; Id, there, adverb ; ou, where, adverb ; du, owed, participle of the verb devoir, to owe; crti, grown, participle past of the verb croitre ; tu, participle past of the verb taire, to be silent. The accent distinguishes a, to, from a, has, third person singular of the present of the verb AVOIR, to have : des, from, is distinguished from des, of the, a compound article; la, there, from la, article ; ou, where, from ou, or, con- junction i du, owed, from du, of the, a compound article ; cru, grown, from cru, believed, participle past of the verb croire, to believe ; tu, participle past of the verb taire, is distinguished from tu, thou, personal pronoun. OF THE DIURESIS. The Di&resis consists in two dots, thus () placed over a vowel ; its function is to indicate that the vowel thus marked is to be sounded independently of the other vowel that immediately precedes it, and not to form with-it a diphthong ; as in ha'ir, to hate ; najf, ingenuous, pa'ien, pagan. OF THE CEDILLA. The Cedilla is a kind of c reversed and placed under the letter c, when this is followed by either a, o, or u, in order, in general, to preserve the pronunciation of s, which it has in the word from which it is derived. Etymology seems to command it. As in regu, received, from rece- voir, to receive ; Francois, French, from France, France. Pronounce resu; Franse. THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF WORDS. There are in the French language nine different kinds of words, which are generally called the nine parts of speech. They are B2 4 INTRODUCTION. L'Artick, The Article. Le Substantify The Substantive. L'Adjcctif, The Adjective. Le Pronom, The Pronoun. Le Verbe, The Verb. L'Adverbe, The Adverb. La Preposition, The Preposition. La Conjonction, The Conjunction. L Interjection, The Interjection. The article, substantive, adjective, pronoun, and verb, admit of variations in their terminations ; the others do not : they are invariable. GENERAL EXPLANATIONS. The article is one of these words le, la, les, THE, which are placed in French before common nouns. The substantive is expressive of the name of a person or thing ; as Pierre, Peter ; roi, king ; maison, house. The adjective expresses the quality of a person or thing; as, bon, good; mauvais, bad; aimable, lovely; rouge, red. The pronoun is a word used to take the place of a noun, in order to avoid its too frequent repetition ; as, Jean est instruit; iLparle John is learned ; he speaks bien, well. II takes the place of a person already spoken of; there- fore, it is a pronoun. The verb either expresses the state of its subject, or the action spoken of, which action is either done, or received, or suffered by the subject of the verb. Ex. Je SUTS mulade, I am ill. Ma sceur ECRIT une lettre, My sister tarltes a letter. Vous SEREZ PUNI, You "will be punished. Suis serves to express the state of illness ; ecrit andpuni express the actions spoken of; therefore they are verbs. The adverb is generally joined to a verb, or to an adjec- tive, and even to another adverb, in order to modify their signification. Ex. Mademoiselle Rose danse elegamment, Miss *Rose dances elegantly. Elegamment is used in this sentence to point out the manner in which Miss Rose dances. Therefore it is an adverb. The preposition serves to express the relation of objects SUBSTANTIVES. 5 with respect to one another. It always joins those objects. Ex. Lesjils DE Brutus, the sons of Brutus ; de is SL preposition, because it expresses the relation between les Jils and Brutus. The conjunction serves to unite the different parts of a discourse. Ex. et, and ; car, for ; mats, but ; &c. The interjection expresses the various sentiments and sudden emotions of the soul. Ex. Htlas ! mon Dieu! Oh ! my God ! CHAP. I. OF SUBSTANTIVES, Substantives serve to express the names of persons or things ; as, Jean, John ; Louise, Louisa ; livre, book. Substantives are either common or proper. The substantive common is that which belongs to all beings or things of the same kind ; such as, homme, man ; roi, king ; ville, town, &c. The substantive proper can be applied but to one person or one thing only, as Pierre, Peter ; Londres, London. Amongst the substantives common, we must distinguish those that are collective. The substantives collective are those which, though in the singular, present to our minds a collection of objects of the same kind. The substantives collective are divided into general collective and partitive collective. The substantive general collective is that which expresses a whole body ; as, Jbrct, forest ; armee y army ; peuple, people. The substantive partitive collective expresses only a par- tial number; as, la plupart,. the most part; une foule, a crowd ; une injinilc, an infinity. OF THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF SUBSTANTIVES. The masculine gender belongs to men and to animals of the male kind. The feminine belongs to women and animals of the female kind. The French language does not admit the neuter gender; therefore all substantives are either of the masculine or of the feminine gender. There are two numbers ; the singular and the plural. The singular number relates to one person or thing only; '9 SUBSTANTIVES. as, un homme, one man ; une table, one table, &c. The plural relates to more than one person or thing. Ex. des hommes, men ; des tables, tables. There are substantives that are never used in the plural, others that are never used in the singular. Substantives that are never used in the plural. 1st. The names of metals. Ex. or, gold; argent, silver; cuivre, brass ; plomb, lead, &c. 2dly. The names of virtues and vices. Ex. avarice t avarice; charite, charity ; foi, faith; haine, hatred; or- gueil, pride ; prodigality, prodigality, &c. Sdly. The names by which the five senses are denoted. Ex. la vue, the sight ; le goto, the taste ; I'odorat, the smell ; le toucher, feeling ; I'ou'ie, hearing. 4thly. Proper names, except when they are used meta- phorically. 5thly. To the foregoing may be added the following, which are not reducible to any general rules : Artillerie, artillery. Faim, hunger. Attirail, implements. Fumee, smoke. Sonheur, happiness. Fuite, flight. Colere, anger. Gloire, glory. Courroux, wrath. Honte, shame. Eiifance, infancy. Jeunesse, youth. Lait, milk. Salut, safety. Miel, honey. Soif, thirst. Noblesse, nobility. Sommeil, sleep. Pauvrete, poverty. Vieillesse, old age. Sang, blood. There are others which are never used but in the plural number only ; such as, Ancetres, ancestors. Atours, apparel. A'teux, forefathers. Ciseaux, scissors. Funerailles, a funeral. Hordes, clothes. Frais, expense. Limites, limits. Delicts, delight. Mceurs, manners. Depens, cost. Mouchettes, snuffers. Entrailles, entrails. Tenebres, darkness. Epousailles, espousals. Vivres, victuals. Fonts, font. Pincettes, tongs. And in general those which in English admit of no singular. SUBSTANTIVES. | GENERAL RULE. In general the plural number is formed by adding an * to the singular. Ex. Lepere, the father; Lesperes, the fathers. La mere, the mother; Les meres, the mothers, &c All nouns, having their singular ending in s, x, or z, admit of no variation in the plural. Ex. Le fils, the son; Lesjils, the sons. Une noix, a walnut; Des noix, walnuts. Le nez, the nose; Les nez, the noses. EXCEPTIONS. Nouns ending in au, eau, eu, ceu, ieu, or ou, form their plural by x instead of s. Ex. Un chapeau, a hat ; Des chapeaux, hats. Un manteau, a cloak ; Des manteaux, cloaks. Un lieu, a place ; Des lieux, places. Un chou, a cabbage ; Des choux, cabbages. The following differ from the above nouns, and their plural terminates in s : Matou, a great cat; Matous, great cats. Trou, a hole; Trous, holes. Nouns ending in al and ail have their plural in aux . Ex. Animal, a living creature; Animaux, living creatures. Cheval, ahorse; Chevaux, horses. Mai, evil ; Manx, evils. Travail, work ; Travaux, works. The following are excepted ; they form their plural in s: Sal, a ball; Gouvernail, the helm. Event ail, a fan; Epowoantail, bugbear. Detail, account, retail; Scrail, a seraglio. Portail, a gateway, &c. Nouns of more than one syllable ending in nt most generally form their plural by changing the t into s ; as, .Enfant, a child; Enfans, children. Commandement, command ; Commandemens, commands. 8 SUBSTANTIVES. But nouns of one syllable only (monosyllables) preserve the t, and form the plural by adding s; as, Dent, tooth ; Dents, teeth. Pont, bridge ; Fonts, bridges. Tout, adj. all, makes tons in its plural masculine, toute in the feminine singular, and toutes in the plural. The following are not conformable to any established rule: A'ieul, a grandfather; A'ieux or a'ieuls, grandfathers. Betail, cattle ; Besticux, cattle. del, heaven ; Cieux, heavens. (Eil^ the eye; Yeux, eyes. p des ciels de lit, testers of a bed. * \des ceils de beiif, ovals. There are in French several compound words like the last two, which require some attention from the learner, in the formation of their plural, the difficufty of which may be soon removed by means of reflection ; for example : A noun being composed of a substantive and of an adjec- tive, united by a hyphen, both admit of the plural forma- tion ; as, Un gentil-homme, a noble- Des gentils-hommes, noble- man; men. A noun compounded of two substantives and of a prepo- sition united by hyphens, the first only in French (which is generally the last in English), admits of the plural forma- tion; as, Un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; Des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. Un chef-d'oeuvre, a master- Des chefs-d'oeuvre, master- piece ; pieces. Some of these French compound words are rendered in English by one word, in which case the formation of the plural in the French is still the same ; as, Un cul-de-sac, an alley Des culs-de-sac, alleys, without egress. Nouns being composed of a verb or a preposition and a substantive, the substantive only admits of the plural form- ation; as, ARTICLE. 9 Un avant-toil, eaves ; Des avant-toits, eaves. Un casse noisette, a Des casse-noisettes, nut- nut-cracker ; crackers. Un garde -fou, a rail ; Des garde-foux, rails, &c. Monseigneur.my lord; ^ s r Messeigneurs, my lords. Monsieur, Mr. or master; lllJ Messieurs, gentlemen.. Madame, Mrs. or madam; f|i] Mesdames, ladies. Mademoiselle, miss; J ^Mesdemoiselles, misses-. Observation. The French language admits of no cases. CHAP. II OF THE ARTICLE. There is in the French language one article only, which answers to the English article the. It is used before nouns common, as if to announce them, and prove that they are used in a determinate sense. This article in the singular is, le for the masculine, as le pere, the father ; la for the feminine, as la mere, the mother ; and for the plural, les for both genders, as les peres, the fathers ; les meres, the mothers. It is subject to elision and contraction. The elision is the suppression of the e in le, and of the a in la, before nouns beginning with a vowel or h mute; as, I'ami, the friend, instead of le ami ; I'actrice, the actress^ for la actrice ; Vhutoire, for la histoire. The contraction is the reduction of two syllables into one. It takes place with respect to the article le and les whenever it is preceded by one of these prepositions, de, of or from, or a, to. Therefore instead of de te, of or from the ; a le, to the (masculine singular), we say, du and au ; and instead of de les, of or from the, and a les, to the (for both genders in the plural), we say, des and aux; as, dujrere, of or from the brother, and not de le frcre; au Jrere, to the brother, and not (i le Jrcre; des freres, of or from the brothers, and not de lesjrcres ; auxjrcres, to the brothers, and not a lesfrcres. The prepositions de and a, when preceding the femi- nine article la, admit of no alteration; for we say, de la, Ifr ARTICLE. of or from the ; a la, to the, or de V, h l' t before a wvoel or h mute ; nor do they admit of any before le, when it is followed by a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. Therefore we say, de I 1 , of or from the ; d l' t to the ; de Vami, of or from the friend ; d I' 'ami, to the friend. A TABLE OF THE ARTICLE IN ITS VARIATIONS AND COMBINATIONS WITH THE PREPOSITIONS de AND . Article masculine, before a consonant. Singular. LE, The. Le pere, The father. Du, Of or from the. Du pere, Of or from the father. Au, To the. Aupere, To the father. Article feminine, before a consonant. Singular. La, The. Lafemme, The woman. De la, Of or from the. De lafemme, Of or from the woman. A la, To the. A lafemme, To the woman. Article masculine andfeminine before a voivel or h mute. Singular. ,, The. L'enfant, The child, De I', Of or from. the. De I' enfant, Of or from the child. Al\ * To the. A Venfant, To the child. L'homme, .The man. * De Pkomme, Of or from the man. A I'homme, To the man. ARTICLE. 11 Article masculine and feminine before a vowel or a consonant^ an h mute, or an h aspirated. Plural. Let, The. Lespcres, The fathers. Des, Of or from the. Desperes, Of or from the fathers. Aux, To the. Aux peres, To the fathers. Les amis, The friends. Des amis, Of or from the friends. Aux amis, To the friends. H aspirated. Les heros, The heroes. Des heros, Of n from the heroes. Aux her os, To the heroes. H mute. Les histoires, The histories. Des histoires. Of or from the histories. Aux histoires, To the histories. There being no neuter gender in French, all nouns are either masculine or feminine. All nouns representing men, or animals of the male kind, are masculine : those representing women, or animals of the female kind, are feminine. RULE 1, ON THE ARTICLE. The article always agrees in gender and number with the noun substantive to which it belongs. EXERCISE. The father. The mother. The sister. The brother. pcre mere sceur frere From the master. To the mistress. Of the boy. maitre maitresse garqon The house. To the room. From the garden. maison, f. chambre, f. jardin, m. To the aunt. Of the child. From the children.*- The tante enfant, m. historians. The prudence. Of the amiability. From the historien prudence, f. amabilite, f. * See the formation of the plural of nouns ending in nt, at the end of page 7. 12 ARTICLE. study. To the attention The king. To the queen. Ztude, f. attention, f. roi reine From the princes. The glory of the heroes. The prince gloire, f. heros, m. humanity of the princesses. The beauty of the "Tiumanite, f.* princesxe beaute, f. spring. The heat of the summers. From the printems, m. chaleitr, f. etc, m. cold of the winters. To the army of the Jroid, m. -/rivers, m. armee, f. Spaniards. Espagnol. Ruf,E 2. In the English language, whenever a noun substantive is taken in the full extent of its signification, the article is not used ; in French it must be expressed. Therefore when you say, I'homme est mortel, man is mortal, as you mean all men, without any exception, you must translate the sentence as if it were thus expressed the man is mortal. And if you say, virtue is estimable, as you mean all kind of virtues, virtue in general, you must place the article before virtue, and translate it thus : la vertu est estimable. Observation. I shall take advantage of this opportunity to give to teachers the following advice. Let them make their pupils read every English sentence they are to translate into French with the literal construction that belongs to the French translation, and place the article wherever it is to be used in French.. For example: a pupil who had to translate the two following sentences Do you -prefer England to France ? Do not neglect study ,-^ should first read them thus : Prefer you the England to the France ? Not neglect not the study ; lie would thus soon get into that habit, and familiarise himself with the French construction. EXERCISE. I hate idleness. Virtue is estimable. Je, pro. hais, v. paresse t f. Vertu, f. est, v. estimable, adj. Gold % is preferable to silver. Do you a Or,m. preferable, adj. argent,m. = vous, pro. * In the first exercises, the /{ mute will be marked by a dasb placed before if. ARTICLE. 13 prefer 7 England to France? Corn grows preferez,"?. Angleterre, f. France, f. Bled, m. croit, v. for men, and grass for cattle. Love pour, p. homme, m. et y c. herbe, f. bttail, m. Aimez, v. wisdom. Do 'not* neglect* study Avoid sagesse, f. - ne pas, adv. ncgligez, v. etude, f. Evitez, v. leisure. She comes from church. We loisir, m. .E/fe, pro. went, v. cglise, f. Nous, pro. speak of America, and not of Poland. - parlons, v. Amcrique, f. non pas, adv. Pologne, f. Grant us peace. Honour is due to Accordez, v. ?zcw$, pro.^azar, f. Honneur, m. rfw, p.p. kings. They come from Africa. Pride roi, m. Us, pro. viennent, v. Afrique, f. Orgueil, m. disgraces man. Charity patiently* bears 1 degrade, v. Ckarite, f. patiemment, adv. souffre, v. injuries.3 injures, f. t- ^ RULE 3. When a noun substantive, instead of being taken in the full extent of its signification, is limited to a particular part of it, the article is expressed in English, and must be so too in French. Example: L 'homme que vous m'avez envoye, the man whom you have sent me. In this sentence we do not speak of men in general, but merely of that particular man whom you have sent me. EXERCISE. Where is the master of the house? The prince Ou, adv. maztre, m. maison, f. prince, m. spoke to the king. To the third page of the parla, v. troisieme, adj. page, f. book. The 1 lazy 1 do* ^not* love 4 work 6 . livre, m. paresseux, adj. aiment, v. ouvrage, m. Justice is the mistress and queen of virtue. Justice, f. matiresse, f. reine, f. Send the child to school. Walk Envoyez, v. enfant, m. ccole, f. Promenez-vous, v. in the garden. Tranquillity of soul is the dans, p. jardin, m. Tranquillite, f. ame, f. * Do, being in this sentence a mere sign of the present tense, is not to be translated into French ; nor is it ever to be translated when it acts only in that capacity. The same rule applies to did. 14 ARTICLE. height of felicity. Give the tooth-picks to the comble, m. filicite, f. Donnez, v. cure-dent, m. gentlemen.* Education is to the mind what Messieurs, m. Education, f. esprit, m. ce que, pro. cleanliness is to the body. - The enemies were proprete, f. corps, m. ennemi, m. etoient, v. on the mountain. You admire the beauty sur, p. montagne,f. Vous, pro. admirez, v. beaute, f. of the ladies. To the thickness of the walls. - We dame, f. epaisseur, f. muraitte, go to the park. It is the will of the em- allons,\. parc,m. C'est,v. volonte, f. em- peror. The fate of nations is governed by pereur sort, m. nation, f. gouveme, p.p. par, p. Providence. - You play with the boys. Providence, f. jouez,v. avec, p. gar f on Revenge is the pleasure of a weak* mind 1 . Vengeance, f. plaisir,m. de un foible, adj. esprit, m. Italy is the garden of Europe, f. - The most Italie, f. Europe, f. /?/, adv. noble of virtues is charity. - Carry the gram- fzoi/e, adj. Portez, v. gram- mar to the boys, and the dictionary to the girls. maire, f. dictionnaire, m. ./^ He comes from the Indies. - Give me the //, pro. vient, v. Inde, f. mot) pro. loaf. m. RULE 4. When there are several nouns substantive coming together in a sentence, the article must be placed in French before every one of them, though it is generally placed in English only before the first; and the article must agree in gender and number with the substantive which it precedes. Adjectives used as substantives follow the same rule, and are always of the masculine gender. Ex. Le sel, la moutarde et Vhuile The salt, mustard and oil sont sur la table, are on the table. Le blanc, le rouge et le noir White, red and black are sont trois differ entes con leurs, three different colours. * Gentleman is never to be rendered into French by gentil-homme. Gentil-homme means nobleman. ARTICLE. 1$ . EXERCISE. Prefer virtue to riches, friendship to Preferez, v. richesscs, f. pi. amitie, f. money, and utility to pleasure. The father, mother argent, no. utilite, f. pere mere and children are dead.' The men, women and chil- sont marts, p.p. Jemme, f. dren of the village were all at the burial. village, m. t ous, adj. a, p. enterrement, m. Children generally* like 1 .apples and ordinairement, adv. aiment, v. pomme, f. pears. 1 like yellow and grey. Peace and poire, f. aime, v. Jaune, m. gris, m. plenty make men happy. Wheat and abondance, f. rendent, v. heureux, adj. Froment, m. barley are dear. I hate milk, butter, and orge, f. cher, adj. lait, m. beurre, m. cheese- Bring the knives and forks. romage, m. Apportez, v. couteau, m. Jburchette, f. Patience and perseverance are necessary. The Patience, f. perseverance, f. necessaire desire of glory, riches, power and pleasure is desir, m. gloire, f. pouvoir, m. plaisir, m. a disease of the mind. Prefer always virtue, maladie, f. awe, f. toujours, adv. prudence and good sense to beauty. Put the prudence, f. bon, adj. sens, m. Mettez, v. wine, beer and cider on the table. (It is said) vin,m. Mere, f. cidre, m. sur, p. table, f. On dit that America, France and Spain have made peace que ont, \.jait, p. p. with England. RULE 5. The article, though expressed in English, must be omitted in French ; 1st. Before a noun expressing a degree of relationship, when that noun is preceded by the name of the person to whom it belongs, or by a pronoun taking the place of the name. Ex. Alexandre Jlls de Philippe, Alexander the son of Philip. Elle est sceur de Mademoi- She is the sister of Miss B. selle B. 16 ARTICLED 2dly. Before a noun expressing a dignity, an office, or a business, when it is preceded by the name of the person to which it belongs, or by a pronoun taking its place. Ex. Monsieur D. gouverneur des MT. D. the governor of Indes, India. // est cure de ***, He is the curate of***. Sdly. Before a substantive expressing a qualification belonging to a city, a town, &c. when that qualification is preceded by the name of that city or town, or by a pro- noun taking its place, provided the name or pronoun be not separated from the qualification by a verb ; for, if it is separated by a verb, the article must be expressed. Ex. Mon ami demeure a Londres, My friend lives in London, viUe capitate d' Angleterre, the capital city of England. Paris est LA ville capitate de Paris is the capital city of France, France. Observation. From the two first parts of this rule are to be excepted the sentences in which the verb etre has for its nominative the pronoun demonstrative ce ; for, as ce points out neither the gender nor number of the noun of which it takes the place, the article becomes necessary. Ex. Vest LE Recteur de ***, He is the Rector of ***. EXERCISE. Who is this young man ? He is the eldest 2 son 1 of Qui ce jeune C'est aine my brother. The Jupiter of the heathens was the mon payen, m. ctoit, v. son of Saturn, and the father of the gods. Robert, Jils Saturne, m. dieu, m. duke of Normandy, the brother of Henry, king of due Normandie, f. Henri England, was the son of William the Conqueror. Guillaume Conqucrant, m. My sister lives at York, the capital city of the Ma, pro. demeure, v. d, p. county* of the same name. Mr. C. the rector of comte, m. mcme, adj. now, m. cure the parish of St. James, and his brother, the paroisse, f. Jacques son, pro. ARTICLE. 17 dean of the cathedral, were the sons of Mr. L. the doyen cathcdrale, f. first lord of the Admiralty. premier, adj. lord amirautc, f. RULE 6. The article is to be placed before the proper names of countries, kingdoms, provinces, rivers, "winds and mountains. Ex. La Russie est un pays fort Russia is a very extensive etendu, country. EXERCISE. Have you passed through Spain, Portugal, or Avez passe par Espagne, f. Portugal, m. ou Holland ? (It is said) that America, France and Spain Hollande, f. On dit que have made peace with England. We intend to pass ont fait avec comptons *?> passer through Italy, Germany and Prussia. The Alps par Italic, f. Allemagne, f. Prusse, f. Alpes and the Pyrenees are very high mountains. Pyrenees de Ires hautes montagne, f. Exceptions. We must except from the above rule, 1st. The names of countries that have the names of their capitals. Ex. Naples et Corfou sont de Naples and Corfu are charmans pays, charming countries. 2dly. The names of countries which are under the go- vernment of the preposition en. Ex. Monfrcre est EN France, My brother is in France. Sdly. Those that are united by the preposition de to a preceding substantive, except those countries be personi- fied ; fo r in this case they take the article. Le roi Je France, The king of France, Lcs routes d'Espagne sont The roads of Spain are mauvaises, bad. La gcncrosite DE iS Angle- The generosityofEngland; terre, that is to say, of the English. 18 ARTICLE. 4thly, When we speak of those countries, as returning, or being returned from them. Ex. Nous arrtvons de Portugal, We arrive from Portugal. Observation. The names of the four principal parts of the world, Europe, Asia, Africa and America, take the article, except only when preceded by the preposition en. Ex. Un courier vient d'arriver A messenger is just come de I'Amerique, from America. II est en Afrique, He is in Africa. EXERCISE. On the Exceptions. We have already spoken of Naples and Corfu.* avons deja, adv. parle Where is your father ? He is in Russia ; and from votre en de thence he (will go) to Poland. The present king of la, adv. ira en Pologne, f. present France is a very* religiouss man 1 . The 1 publics tres religieux public buildings* in France are generally more beautiful than edifice, m. de en general beau gue those in England. The glory of France was ceux de gloire, f. ctoit (not long ago) without equal, and the humilia- il n y y a pas long-temps sans tgal humilia* tion of Spain is now degrading. (A great deal) tion, f. maintenant degradante Beaucoup of wool comes now from Germany to England; laine, f. vient maintenant en and it is better than that which comes from elle meilleure, adj. que celle qui vient Spain. Two missionaries arrived yesterday from missionaire arriterent hier Africa, and three are (to go) to Asia. We trois doivent otter en (were* speaking) of America. parlions * The preposition de, OF, must be repeated before Corfou. ARTICLE. 19 RULE 7. 1st. In narrations, whenever we bring in several nouns together, and we wish to give rapidity and warmth to the sentence, no article is used either in French or in English. In such case no conjunction is placed before the last substantive, and in general those substan- tives are immediately followed by some of these expres- sions ; every body, every thing, all, &c. 2dly. After the conjunction ni, the substantive takes no article, if none is used in English ; but if it is expressed in English, it must likewise be expressed in French. Ex. Conscience, honneur,interet, Conscience, honour, inte- tout Jilt sacrifie, rest, every thing was sacrificed. // n'a ni justice ni Imma- He has neither justice nor nite, humanity. // n'epargnera ni ^'argent He will spare neither the que vous lui avez prele t money you lent him, nor ni le sien propre, his own. EXERCISE. The town was taken by storm; men, ville, f. Jilt, v. prise, p. p. de assaut, m. women, children, (old people) (every body) was vieiliard, m. tons, adj. Jurent put to death. Palaces, temples, public 2 buildings 1 , mis, p. p. a mort, f. Palais edifice, m. private 2 houses 1 , (every thing) was destroyed, particulicre, adj. maison tout Jut detruit, p.p. and the enemies did not leave stone upon "=" laisserent, v. pierre, f. sur, p. stone. His father will 2 spare 2 T neither3 pains nor Son, pro. cpargnera, v. ne ni peine ni money. (He is) a (fatherless child); he has nei C'estj v. un orpJielin, adj. ther parents nor friends. parent, m. ami, m. RULE 8. When two or more substantives immediately follow each other in English, some of them having the sign of the English possessive case ; that is to say, the apostrophe after the last letter, or an s separated from the last letter by an apostrophe, the substantive coming after the last that is marked with the sign of the possessive case must be translated first, then the preceding one, and so on 20 ARTICLE. backwards with respect to all those that are in the posses- sive case, placing before them, if they take the article, either du, de la, de /', or des, according to the gender and number of the noun, or the preposition de only, if they do not take the article. Ex. Lejils DU roi, The king's son ; that is to say, the son of the king. L'epouse vujils nu prince t The prince's son's wife ; that is to say, the wife of the son of the prince. Lajille DE Monsieur White, Mr. White's daughter ; that is to say, the daugh- ter of Mr. White. EXERCISE. I have seen the king's apartments and the queen's ai vu appartement, m. picture. The chancellor's son's wife is the prime portrait, m. chancelier femme pre- minister's eldest 1 sister 1 . The man's strength is mier ainee, adj. force, f. very great. Lend me the maid's cloak. grande, f. Pretez-moi, pro. servante mantelet, m. My cousin's brother is my uncle's best friend. Mon cousin oncle meilleur, adj. ami, m. The title of Dauphin belongs to the king of litre, m. appartient, v. France's eldest 2 son 1 . Modesty is a woman's nine Modestie, f. une femme, f. greatest ornament. plus grand, adj. ornement RULE 9. Whenever the preposition to is used in English instead of the sign of the possessive case, the preposition dc, OF, must be substituted in its place. The same substitution becomes necessary after the words heir t heiress, witness, friend and enemy. Ex. Monseigneur leDucde York, My lord Duke of York, frere du Roi, brother to the king; that is to say, the king's br- ther, or the brother of the king. ARTICLE. 21 EXERCISE. Mr. Richard, brother to the Prince's steward, has intendant a married Miss Prescot, niece to the constable of the Tower. tpousc niece connetable Tour, f. I have spoken to the Marchioness of ****, sister to the Marquise queen's first lady of honour. Mr. Henry, perfumer to the dame Henri princess, has made a considerable 2 fortune 1 . The heir Jb.it considerable fortune, f. -heritier\ to the crown of Portugal is the prince of Brazil. couronne, f. Brasil, m. My father was witness to that quarrel. I am a a ete temoin cette, pro. querelle, f. suis<&> friend to diligent 1 scholars 1 , and an enemy to diligent ecoliers, m. *> ennemi, m. idleness. paresse, f. RULE 10. All the substantives that are preceded by the adverb lien, signifying much, a great deal, many, take the preposition de and the article; that is to say, of the. Therefore bien must be followed by du, de la, de l' } or des, according to the gender and number of the substantive. Ex. Bien DU merite, Much merit. Bien DES amis, Many friends. Bien DE L' 'argent, A great deal of money. That is to say, much OF THE merit; many OF THE friends ; a great deal OF THE money. EXERCISE. The children make much noise. This man has font bruit, m. Cet (a great deal) of money, but he has also many ene- aussij adv. mies. They 1 gives you* much* trouble* now, donnent pei)ie,f. a present, adv. but they (will 2 give 2 ) you 1 hereafter much mats, c. donneront (dans la suite), adv. 98 ARTICLE. pleasure. (There were) many ladies at your father's II y avoit chez (last night).- 'Mr. R. has read many books, and nier au soir, adv. lu, p. p. livre, m. he has acquired much knowledge. To acquiSy p. p. connoissances, f. pi. Pour, p. teach youth, (we must have) a great deal of enseigner jeunesse, f. iljaut, v. avoir , v. patience. RULE 11. The article precedes all nouns substantive when they are taken in a partitive sense ; that is to say* whenever the word some or any is either expressed or understood before them in English, if those nouns are not preceded by an adjective. Some and any being equivalent to of the, they must be rendered in French by du, de la, de V, or des, according to the gender and number of the nouns that follow, and they are to be repeated before every noun. Ex. Du pain et DE iSeau lui suf- Bread and water are suffi- Jisent, cient for him. Apportez T>U vinaigre, DE LA Bring some vinegar, mus moutarde, DE i.huile et tard, oil and forks. D E sfou rchettes, Avez-vous DE L'argent a nous Have you any money to prefer ? lend us ? EXERCISE. Bread, meat and water are things necessary to man. sont chose, f. necessaire 1 drink wine and water. She eats cheese. bois, v. mange frontage, m. Bring me some mustard. Have you bought some achete, p. p. paper, pens and ink? Send him some bread, papier, m. plumes, f. encre, f. meat and potatoes.* Do you* sell 1 fruit ? pomme de terre, f. *s- vendezfruits, m. Buy some tea and sugar. Will you eat some Acnetez the, m. sucre, m. Voidez manger Pomme de terre meaning literally apple of the earth, pomine is the only word that takes s in the plural. ARTICLE. 23 beef with turnips and carrots ? Do you* drink 1 bceiif, m. navet, m. carotte, f. w buvez, v. beer? (Is there) any wine in the cellar? (Was there} biere, f. Y a-t-il cave, f. Y avoit-il any oil in the bottle ? I 1 haves given* him 2 bread, bouteille, f. donne, p. p. lui, pro. money and clothes. She has modesty and prudence. habit, m. modestie, f. prudence, f. He has bought some dishes and plates. Will you plat, m. assiette, f. have some milk or cream ? 1 eat fish, eggs, *G" creme, f. poisson, m. ceuf, m. greens, artichokes and asparagus. Bread, meat, fish and legume^ artichau, m. asperge, f. vegetables often* make 1 a good dinner. legume souvent font diner, m. RULE 12. When the nouns taken in a partitive sense are preceded by an adjective, the words some and any, whether expressed or understood, must be translated into French by the preposition de before a consonant or h aspi- rated, and by d y before a vowel or h mute, instead of the article du, de la and des. De, being a preposition, does not change, whether the noun be in the singular or plural ; of the masculine or feminine gender. Ex. De mauvais vin, Bad wine. De bonne eau, Good water. D 'excellent pain , Excellent bread. De bans livres, Good books. D'habiles gens, Learned people. That is to say, some bad wine ; some good water ; some excellent bread ; some good books ; some learned people. EXERCISE. You always read good books. Bad 1 wine 1 * is* toujours, adv. lisez jgj 3nots worth4 good water. He speaks to learned men. vaut, v. parle gens* f* I have heard good news. You have fine appris, p. p. bonne nouvelle, f. avez beau, adj. * When tbe word gens is preceded by the adjective, it is of the feminine gender ; and \vhen tbe adjective follows it, it is of tbe masculine. 34 ARTICLE. fruit.- She has worthy friends.^ Bring me good fruit, m.* digne, adj. pens. - Onions, celery, leeks, chervil and Oignons, m. celeri, m. poireau, m. cerfeuil, m. plenty of meat make what the French beaucoup font (ce que, pro.) Franpois, m. pi. call good broth. I prefer good water to bad appellent, v. bouillon, m. cider. 1 have discoursed with good people.* cidre, m. converse, p. p. bonnes gens, f. My father has in his garden good plums, fine peaches son prune, f. belle peche, f. and very large apricots. Miss Sharp has fine tres gros abricot, m. Mademoiselle beaux eyes. ceil, m. (plural yeux.) RULE 13. We have said that proper names of coun- tries, kingdoms, republics, counties and provinces take in general the article. However when they are preceded by one of these verbs, to go, to return, to send, to come, or by a substantive conveying the same meaning, the preposition to, that follows the verb, is to be translated into en, which, as we have said in the exceptions to Rule 6, is not to be followed by the article. Ex. Monfrereest alle EN Italie, My brother is gone to Italy. // doit bientot revenir EN He is soon to come back to France, France. A mon retour EN Angleterre, On my return to England. On the contrary to, when immediately preceded by the words road, or way, ROUTE, CHEMIN, must be rendered by de. Ex. La route DE Londres, The road to London. Le chemin DE Bristol, The way to Bristol. Exception. The proper names of distant countries, and of some few places in Europe, do not follow the above rule, as they always take the article. Such are, L' Abyssinie, Abyssinia La Barbade, Barbadoes Le Bresil, Brazil Le Caire, Cairo Le Canada, Canada La C/tine, China Le Chili, Chili La Guadeloupe, Gua- daloupe La Havane, Havannah La Jamatque, Jamaica * Fruit must be put in the plural in French. ARTICLE. 25 Le Japan, Japan La Martinique, Martinico Le Mexique, Mexico Le Perou, Peru La Virginie, Virgi- nia and a few others. Ex. Venir DE 1,'Abyssinie, To come from Abyssinia.^ That is Venir wBresil, To come from Brazil. >to say, Venir DU Caire, To come from Cairo. J from the. Aller A LA Chine, To go to China. "J Aller AU Canada, To go to Canada, >To the. Aller AU Japan, To go to Japan. J EXERCISE. My mother is gone to Spain : on her return to allee Espagne a son England, she (will have) the pleasure of seeing* you 1 . aura de voir Have you ever been to Paris ? My sister says that the Avez jamais etc Paris Ma dit que road to Dover is very bad. She goes to Richmond. Douvres tres mauvais va, v. He comes from Paris. When 1 will 1 you* go 2 to vient Quand <<=>> irez France? I know not; for my father says that he sais ne-pas car, c. dit que U (will* send 2 ) me 1 soon to Canada or Jamaica. 1 enverra bientot, adv. (am going) to Croydon.. She (shall come back) to vais reviendra England (next year) to see her brother who is Fannee prochaine pour voir son qui est arrived from Japan and China. Here is the road to arrive Clapham. My mother intends to send my sister Ma (se propose} de envoyer ma to Portugal or Spain, and thence to Rome, and my cousin de la mon is to go to Mexico or Cairo. doit aller Mexique, m. ou, c. RULE 14. 1st. The substantives preceded by a noun or an adverb expressing a quantity, such as beaucoup, much, or many; tant, so much, or so many ; peu, little ; plus, more ; trap, too much, too many ; mains, less ; infiniment, infinitely, &c.; never take the article, but only the preposi- tion de. Ex. c 26 ARTICLE. Tant de pommes, So many apples. Trop d'argent, Too much money. Plus de rigueur que DE front e More rigour than kindness et DE generosite,* and generosity. Observation. Bien, much, many, is the only adverb of quantity excepted from this rule. (See Rule 10, p. 21.) 2dly. The nouns which are preceded by any of these words, quelque chose, something ; rien, nothing ; que, what (meaning how mttch) ; sorte, kind ; espece, kind, sort, species; always take the preposition de, but never the arti- cle ; pas and point, no or not, follow the same rule, when the noun that follows is taken in an indefinite sense ; but if it is taken in a definite sense, the article du, de la, de P, or des, must be used. Ex. Je n*ai POINT DE repos, I have no rest. Nefaites POINT n'observa- Make no observations. tionx, Nefaites POINT DES obser- Do not make useless ob- vations inutiles, servations. Donnez - mot QUELQUE Give me something good. CHOSE DE #on,f Je ne vois en lui RIEN DE I see in him nothing bad. mauvais, EXERCISE. I have bought six yards of cloth. Bring me achete, p. p. six aune, f. drop, m. three pounds of veal and two pounds of mutton. trois livre, f. veau, m. deux mouton, m. He 1 does 2 not* read^ irreligious 6 books*. She has a <=>> ne-pas lit un great number of children. He has (too much) grand, adj. nombre, m. trop, adj. vanity. You have less merit, but more vanite, f. - mains, adv. mais, c. plus, adv. wisdom. What a noise you make! Do sagesse, f. Que & bruit, m. faites, v. ^ ~~ii * Wben the qve , THAN or AS, which is governed by the adverbs plut, more ; mains, less ; or autant, as much, as many ; is followed by a sub- stantive or substantives under the influence of the adverb, the preposition de must be placed before every substantive coming after que. f Quelque chose is of the masculine gender, though chose is of the feminine. ARTICLE. *not4 gives her* (too many) pears.- nepas, adv. lui trop, adv. a no 4 daughters*. So much pride does ne-point, adv. Tant orgueil, m. >* become 3 him 8 .' (There is) something noble in his sied,v. lui, pro. Ilya,\. ta, pro. physiognomy. He has more friends than enemies. physionomie, f. More virtue than riches and power is necessary to the future 1 happiness 1 of men. We have (so many) grapes*. raisin, m. They have a little money. I know the king of un peu, adv. connois, v. Prussia. Did you see the Duke of Bavaria Prusse, f. Avez,v. vu, p. p. due BaviZre, f. with the Archbishop of York? He commanded an Archeveque commandoit, v. une army of forty thousand men.. She 1 sayss armee, f. quarante mille dit nothing4 true. What kind of dogs do you* nerien vrai, adj. Quelle chien <<*, prefer 1 ? prefcrez RULE 15. The proper names of divinities, men, "women, animals, cities, towns, villages, months, &c. do not take the article, except we limit the extent of their signification to a particular application. Ex. VENUS est la dcesse de la Venus is the goddess of beaute, beauty. LA VENUS de Mcdicis, The Venus di Medicis. EXERCISE. God is the creator, the protector, the benefactor Dieu createur protecteur bienfaiteur and best friend of men. The God of the Christians meilleur Chretien is the only true God Peter, John and Maria are in seul vrai Pierre Jean Marie sont & London. Minerva is the goddess of wisdom and Londres Minerve deesse, f. sagesse, f. * Grapes must be put in French in the singular. c 2 28 ARTICLE. prudence. It was Paris who decided, on Mount Ida, prudence, f. Ce Jut Paris qui decida surle Mont, vet. the grand question between Venus, Minerva and Juno. Junon The works of Cicero prove that (he was) an ceuvres, pi. Ciceron prouvent que cetoit un excellent orator. Solis is the Tacitus of the Spaniards. excellent orateur Soils Tacite Espagnol The Venus di Medicis is one of the finest statues de une plus belles statue, f. which antiquity has* left 3 us 1 .- May and June que antiquite, f. ait laissees nous Mai Juin are two of the finest months in the year. deux beaux mois, m. de annee, f. Observation. The English language has another article besides the, which is a or an ; UN, for the masculine ; UNE, for the feminine. Though we do not consider it in French as an article, I shall give a few rules relative to it, in order to resolve some difficulties which arise from the difference in the genius of both languages. EXERCISE. I have a hat and a sword. She speaks of an chapeau, m. epee, f. parle officer. He 1 has^ given 4 it 2 to^ a sailor. (There are) officier donne le matelot, m. Voild, a bird and a cage. An (ungrateful man) is a oiseau, m. cage, f. ingrat, m. monster in the eyes of a feeling 1 man 1 . Alexander monstre, m. aux ceil, m. sensible Alexandre was a great warrior, and a very learned etoit guerrier, m. tres, adv. savant, adj. philosopher. A fine flower is an ornament in a philosophe,m. belle, a&j.Jleur, f. ornement,iu. garden. RULE 16. 1st. Whenever the English article a or an precedes nouns expressing a measure, a weight, or a num- ber, it must be rendered into French by the article le, la, F, les, according to the gender and number of the noun before which it is placed. Ex. Deux schellings LE cent, Two shillings a hundred. Un ecu LE boisseau, A crown a bushel. ARTICLE. 29 2dly. When the article a or an precedes a noun express- ing time, it must be translated into French either by the article le, la, I', les, or by the preposition par, PER. Ex. Cinq schellings L \semaine, Five shillings a week. ou PAR semaine, Une guince PAR mois, ou One guinea a month. LE mois, 3dly. If the article a or an precedes a noun expressing a distance, it is to be rendered in French by the preposi- tion par, PER, and not by the article le, la, I', les. Ex. Dix schellings PAR lieue, Ten shillings a league. EXERCISE. Barley sells for three shillings a bushel. Orge, f. se vend <<=>> schellings That ale (is worth) six pence a pint. Cette, pro. aile, f. vaut, v. sou, m. pinte, f. Beef costs eight pence a pound. This lace Bceiif t m. coute huit livre, f. Cette dentelle,f. costs a crown an ell. He sells his best cloth cofita ecu, m. aune, f. vend son meilleur drap, m. a guinea a yard. Burgundy 2 wine 1 (is sold) nine verge, f. Bourgogne vin de se vend neuf shillings a bottle. My shoemaker sold 2 me 1 two : Man cordonnier a vendu, p. p. pair* of shoes (at the rate) of half 3 a 1 guinea 3 a paire, f. soulier, m. a raison demi pair. My master comes twice a week. oient (dcuxfois), adv. My uncle goes to France thrice a year. She gives va (troisfois] an, m. donne three shillings a day and ten pence a mile. Jour, m. mille, m. Observation. Foreigners finding the greatest difficulty with respect to the English article, a, an, not knowing, when it is to be translated and when to be suppressed in French, I shall do my best to clear up the difficulty, intreating the learner to give the greatest attention to the different parts of the following rules. RULE 17 The English article a or an is not to be translated in French when it precedes a noun expressing a * Paire takes the plural termination iii French. . 30 ARTICLE. title, dignity, office, trade, business, or tvords mentioning the country to which the object belongs, if that noun, being preceded by the name of the object to which it belongs, or by a personal pronoun taking its place, acts as an adjective qualifying the preceding noun or pronoun. Ex. Monsieur D., membre de la Mr. D., a member of the chambre des communes, house of commons, is in est d Paris, Paris. Etes-vous Anglois? Are you an Englishman ? Non, Monsieur ; je suis No, Sir; I am a French- Frangois, . man. 11 est tailleur, He is a tailor. EXERCISE. (I saw) the Duke of C***, a prince of the blood, J'aivu due sang, m. who (was speaking) to Mr. F. a member of parliament. qui parloit parlement, m. His cousin is a surgeon, and his brother is a physician. Son chirurgien medecin. My sister is a milliner, my brother is a marchande de modes tailor, and I am a carpenter. 1 have read Castor and tailleur charpentier lit Pollux, a French 1 opera 1 . Bristol, a sea* - port 1 , opera, m. de mer, f. port , m. passes now for the second city of the kingdom of passe d present pour seconde England. The king made 2 him 1 a bishop. Is she fit le, pro. eveque. Est a duchess or a marchioness ? No : she is a countess. duchesse marquise Non comtesse RULE 18. If the noun expressing a title, dignity , office, &c. is itself qualified either by an adjective or some other word, then a or an must be translated ; for in such case that noun keeps the nature of a substantive, or it could not be qualified. Ex. Je suis UN prince malheu- I am an unfortunate reux, prince. Je suis UN tailleur, qui I am a tailor, who is look- cherche de I'ouvrage, ing for work. ARTICLE. 31 EXERCISE. That gentleman is an Italian, who 'nevers *succeedecU Ce monsieur Italien ne-jamais (a reussi) in this country. Mr. Barry was a very clever painter. dans ce pays, m. etoit habile peintre Mrs. D.'s husband is a man of talent and a great Madame mart orator. Do 'not3 consider 2 your professor" as orateur -& ne-pas regardez professeur, m. comme infallible ; you know (that he) is a man. I am a man of infaillible savez qu'il high rank, and I expect (to be) treated as such. haute distinction, f. veu x etre traite comme tel RULE 19. Whenever any one of the above nouns, being accompanied by a or an, is preceded by the verb etre, TO BE, and the verb etre has for its subject the demon* strative pronoun ce, the article a or an must ALWAYS be translated, whether the noun itself be qualified or not by an adjective, or some other words. Ex. (Test UN tailleur, He is a tailor. C"est UNE marquise, She is a marchioness. EXERCISE. I (shall go) and* see your sister : (she is) an amiable 1 irai <<=>, voir votre c'est woman 1 . Who is that man whom I saw with you Qui cet que vis yesterday ? (He is) an artist : he is an excellent painter. hier C'est artiste peintre I am a painter myself: I (shall be) very glad to moi-meme serai fort aise de (become acquainted with him) and to see his paintings. Jaire sa connoissance de voir ses peinture Have you ever heard Mr. D. preach ? Who is he? Avez jamais entendu precher Qui est-il * The conjunction and, used instead of to, in order to, being preceded by one of these verbs, to go, to come, to return, and followed by another verb, is never translated into French. Ex. Come and speak to me ; me purler. He came yesterday to see me; // vinthier nif ooir. 32 ADJECTIVE. He is a doctor in divinity. He is an excellent orator. divinite He has a brother who is also a very clever man. He qid aussi habile is a poet. poete Exception. The article a or an must be omitted before the above nouns when they form an incidental clause,* or part of one in a sentence ; for in such a case, those nouns always act the part of adjectives ; that is to say, they are always introduced to qualify the preceding noun or pro- noun, and for that reason they must be under the influence of the 17th Rule. CHAP. III. ON THE ADJECTIVE. The adjective is a word used to express the quality of a person or thing. Ex. : bon rot, good king ; bonne reine, good queen ; bel enfant, fine child ; mediant garfon y wicked boy ; good,Jine and wicked are adjectives, because they express the qualities of king, queen, child and boy. Therefore whenever we can add the word person or thing to another word, we may be sure this is an adjective. For example : rich, poor, good, bad are adjectives, because we may say, rich person, poor person, good person or good thing, bad person or bad thing. Adjectives must agree in gender and number with sub- stantives- Formation of the Feminine of the French Adjectives. All adjectives ending with an e mute belong to both genders ; therefore they admit of no change in the singu- lar. We say, * We call an incidental clause or proposition some useful information, remark, or qualification, obliquely introduced into the body of a sentence, and which may be omitted without injuring the grammatical construction. Ex. Le due de Clarence, PRINCE pu The duke of Clarence, Prince of SANG, estfrere da Rot, the blood, is brother to the King. In th'ft sentence, the words Prince of the blood form an incidental clause ; for it is evident that, if you suppress them, there will be still remaining a complete and perfectly grammatical sentence. It may be also easily per- ceived that these words Prince of the Mood are introduced into the sentence in order that they may perform the part of an adjective. ADJECTIVE. S3" Unjeune homme, A young man. Unejeunejemme, A young woman. Adjectives ending with one of the following letters, d, e, i, I, n, r, s, t and , form their feminine by adding an e mute. Ex, Masc. Grand, Fern, grande, great, tall, large. Poli, polie, polite. Aime, aimee, loved. Civil, civile, civil. Demi, demie, half. Nu, nue, naked. The last two adjectives are indeclinable when they pre- cede a substantive ; but they are declinable when they follow it. Ex. Une demi-livre, A half pound. Une livre et demie, A pound and a half. Nu-ttte, bare head,") La tete nue. Nu-pieds, barefoot, j Lespieds mis. There are a few ending in an, as, el, il, eil, ien, in, es, et, is, on, os, ot, and ul, that double the final letter, before an e mute, for the feminine. Ex. Masc. Gras, Fern, grasse, fat. Gentil, gentille, genteel. Eternel, eternelle, eternal. Pareil, pareille, alike. Chretien, chrttienne, Christian. Moyen, moyenne, middle. Epais, epaisse, thick. Bon, bonne, good. Gros, grosse, big. Sot, sotte, foolish. The following are very irregular, and cannot be com- prised under any rule, viz. Masc. Beau, BEL,* Fern, belle, handsome, fine. Benin, benigne, benign. Favori, favorite, favourite. Fou, FOL,* Jolle, foolish. Frais, Jraiche, fresh. * These adjectives are used before substantives beginning with a vowel or an h mute. c5 3* ADJECTIVE. Masc. Long, Fern, longue, long. Malin, maligne, malicious. Mou, MOL,* molle, soft. new. Adjectives ending in c take he after the c for their femi- nine. Ex. Masc. Blanc, Fern, blanche, white. Franc, franche, sincere. Sec* seche, dry, &c. The four following are excepted : Masc. Caduc, Fern, caduque, in decay. Grec, Grecque, Greek. Public, publique, public. Turc, Turque, Turkish. Those ending inydiangeyinto ve for the feminine. Ex. Masc. Bref, Fern, breve, short. Naif, naive, plain, ingenuous. Neuf, neuve, new. Veuf, veuve, widowed. Vif, vive, quick. Actif, active, active. Adjectives ending in x change x into se. Ex. Masc! Douloureux, Fern, douloureuse, painful, dolorous. Heureux, keureuse, happy. Jaloux, jalouse, jealous, &c. The following are excepted : Masc. Doux, Fern, douce, sweet. Faux, Jausse, false. Perplex, perplexe, perplexed. Prlfix, prefixe, prefixed. * Roux, rousse, reddish. * These adjectives are used before substantives beginning with a vowel or an h mute. ADJECTIVE. 35 Formation of the Plural of the French Adjectives. The French adjectives form their plural by adding an s to the singular. This rule is without any exception as to the feminine of adjectives. The masculine has two exceptions, which are the following : Exception 1 . Adjectives ending in French in s or a; do not change their terminations for the plural. Ex. Un homme gras, A fat man. Des homines gras, Fat men. Un enfant heureux, A happy child. Des enfans heureux, Happy children. Exception*}. Adjectives ending in au form their plural by the addition of an x ; those ending in al change al into aux. Ex. : beau, fine, beaux ; nouveau, new, nouveaux ; general, general, generaux. Observation. Most of the adjectives ending in al have no plural for the masculine. As, conjugal, conjugal ; fatal, fatal ; filial, filial ; Jinal, final ; frugal, sober ; jovial, jovial; pastoral, pastoral; pectoral, pectoral; nasal, nasal; natal, natal ; naval, naval ; total, total. RULES ON THE ADJECTIVES. RULE 1 . The adjective must agree in gender and num- ber with the substantive which it modifies. EXERCISE. The tall* man 1 , the little woman, and the pretty petit, adj. joli children, whom I met yesterday with their grand- que rencontrai hier, adv. leur mother* (were going) to London : they were all very alloient avoient GRAND* hungry and thirsty. The polite 2 inhabitants 1 of that fine faim* habitant cette * In the following instances, the adjective grand loses the e in the ferai" nine, and, instead of it, takes the apostrophe. A grand" peine, With hard labour. C grand' f aim, ("very hungry. Avoir!, grand' soif, To be< very thirsty. (_ grand" pew, (_very much frightened. Faire grand' c/tifre, To live well. La grand' mere, The grand-mother. La grand' messe, The high mass. La grand' chambre, The high court. 36 ADJECTIVE. city treat all strangers (in a) civil* ancU frank* traitent etranger d'une manner 1 . Lean* sheep 1 grow fat in good manitire, f. Maigre brebis, f. deviennent dans pastures. Constant* study 1 joined to a great applica- pdturages etude, f. joint applied-* tion makes men learned. The new* coat 1 which tion, f. rend savant neuf* habit, m. que you gave 1 me 1 , is better than the old great-coat avez donne meilleur que, c. redingote, f. which my father had bought at his tailor's. We avoit achctee chez son tailleur went yesterday to the high court, where we found alldmes trouvdmes all the judges already met. deja, adv. assemble RULE 2. When an adjective modifies two or more substantives, it must always be put in the plural ; and if they are of different genders, it must be put in the mascu- line. Ex. Lefrere, la sceur, le neveu The brother, sister, ne- et la niece sont morts, phew and niece are dead. EXERCISE.f The book, paper, pencil and penknife, which papier, ra. crayon, m. canif, m. que you lent 1 me 1 are excellent. The pen, ruler, avez pr etc excellent regie, f. inkhorn and grammar which my brother has bought ecritoire > f. que man achetees, p. * New must be translated by neuf when h means not used, not worn ; and by nottveau when signifying nf a new fashion, of a new invention. h Some grammarians except from this rule the adjectives which qualify nouns substantive expressive of things, whenever these are not subjects to a verb ; but excellent grammarians are of a different opinion, atid sound rea- son seems to be in their' favour. They, however, recommend, for harmony sake, to place the substantive of the masculine gender the last. Yet those sentences are to be excepted in which the meaning of the first substantive is included in that of the last. In such cases, the adjective may very pro- perly, and even elegantly, agree with the last ; the conjunction et, and, must then be left out, as in the following sentence : // gouverne avec un pouvoir, une He governs with an absolute power autoritc abiolue, and authority. ADJECTIVE. ST are very good. The king, queen, prince and ires, adv. princesses were gone. The corn, wheat, rye, princesse etoient sorti seigle, m. peas and beans, in a word, all the grains which feve, f. en mot, m. grain, m. gui were on the ground, were frozen. My father's etoient sur terre, f. Jurent gele Mon house and my uncle's (country-seat) are (very much) chateau, m. bien, adv. alike. He studies with 'an* incredible 6 application* semblable etudie incroyable, adj. ands courage*. She left the trunk, the room courage, m. laissa coffre, m. chambre, f. and the closet open. I found the doors, the cabinet, m. ouvert ai trouve 1 porte, f. windows and the shutters shut. We saw the chil- Jenctre, f. volets, m. Jerme vimes dren, father and mother well recovered. "When we bien retabli Qitand arrived on the frontiers, we found the soldiers, arrivdmes sur frontiere, f. trouvdmes soldat the officers and the general in chief assembled, and qfficier en chef,m. assemble (drawn up) in (battle array). range en bataille, f. Of the Place to be given to the Adjectives. RULE 3. The following adjectives must be placed before the substantives. Beau, handsome, fine. Saint, holy, saint. Bon, good. Tout, all. Brave, brave. Joli, pretty. Cher, dear. Mediant, wicked. Chetif, vile, poor, mean. Mauvais, bad. Galant, well bred. Meilleur, better. Grand, great. Moindre, less. Gros, big, large. Petit, little, small. -Honnete, honest, civil. Vieux, old. Jeune, young. Vrai, true. 38 ADJECTIVE EXERCISE ON THE FOREGOING ADJECTIVES. I have seen a handsome lady, who (was speaking) to an ou dame, qui parloit old gentleman. He had a fine hat and a pretty monsieur II avoit chapeau sword. Your little sister deserved a better fate. I epee, f. Votre meritoit destin, nu know a young man who has a good horse, but a bad connois cheval, m. stable. He 1 hass lent* it 4 to an honest man.- ecurie, f. II a prete le* The apostle Paul was a holy man. My brother has apotre etoit bought a good watch. Your father was a brave gene- achete montre,f. Votre etoit ral, and a well-bred man. -You have lost all your avez perdu votre money. Vile creature, I have heard your wicked creature, f. entendu conversation. conversation, f. RULE 4. We place after the substantives 1. All participles used as adjectives; as, Unefemme aimante, A loving woman. Du bceufroti, Roast beef. 2. Adjectives ending in esque, il, ic, ique, or ule ; as, Style burlesque, Burlesque style. Amusement pueril, Childish amusement. Bruit public, Public report ; &c. 3. All adjectives expressing shape or form ; as, Une table ronde, A round table. Une chambre carree, A square room. 4. All adjectives expressing colour or taste ; as, Un chapeau noir, A black hat. Un -habit rouge, A red coat. Unepomme douce, A sweet apple. Une liqueur amere, A bitter liquor. * The e in le must be contracted before the verb a, has ; sayj there- fore, U Fa, &c. ADJECTIVE. 39 5. All adjectives expressing the matter of which a thing is composed; as, Des parties sulfureuses, Sulphurous parts. Un corps aerien, An aerial body. 6. All adjectives expressing the qualities of hearing or touching; as, Un instrument sonore, A sonorous instrument. Une voix -harmonieuse, An harmonious voice. Un bois dur, A hard wood. Un corps mou, A soft body. 7. All adjectives expressing the names of nations ; as, U empire Romain, The Roman empire. La poesie Angloise, The English poetry. 8. All adjectives, which, when used by themselves, convey the meaning of a substantive, as rich, blind, &c. Un -homme riche, A rich man. Unejemme aveugle t A blind woman. RULE 5 When a substantive is modified by two or more adjectives, the adjectives must be placed after the substantive. Ex. Unejemme vertueuse et bien- A virtuous and beneficent jdisante, woman. EXERCISE. We have a just, wise and bountiful king. Mr. Nous avons juste sage lienfaisant Monsieur Brown's daughter is with a sincere and generous lady. sincere genereux I have a scholar of a solid, bright and lively genius. ecolier, m. solide brillant vif esprit, m. Miss Preston is a young, handsome and well-shaped Mademoiselle bien-Jait lady. She has married a sober, virtuous and amiable dame Elle a spouse sobre vertueux aimable man. Observations upon the adjectives epais, thick ; gros, big, large ; haut, high, tall ; large, wide, broad ; long, long ; and prof and, deep. The difference that exists between the English and French languages in the turn of sentences, when these 40 ADJECTIVE. adjectives are accompanied by substantives expressing measure, requires a clear explanation of the difficulty. Therefore I shall say, There are two ways of translating such sentences. The first, by using the adjective itself; the other (which is the most elegant) by changing the adjective into its corre- sponding substantive. RULE 6. If the adjective itself be used, it must be placed immediately after the noun substantive of which it expresses the dimension ; the preposition de, OF, follows it ; then come the number and substantive expressing the measure. The preposition de must be repeated after every adjective of dimension. Ex. Une table longue EX dixpieds A 1 table* ten* feeU longs et large DE huit, and 6 eight 8 broad?. That is to say, a table long often feet and broad of eight. J'ai une boite SUPERBE* I 1 have* a? beautiful^ box* longue DE deuxpieds, trois two? feet 8 three? inches 10 pouces, profonde D' long 6 , one 12 foot'3 and'4 pied et demie et large DE a half 1 5 deep 11 , and' 6 deux piedSf ** two 18 feet'9 broad 1 7. That is to say literally, I have a box beautiful long of two feet three inches, deep of one foot and half, and broad of two feet. EXERCISE. I saw a tree eighteen feet large. I have J* ai vu un arbre, m. dix-huit pied, m. gros a box four inches thick, ten feet long, and une boite, f. quatre pouce, m. epais dix pied, m. long six broad. I know a man seven feet high. (It is) a large connois un . sept haut C'est un ditch nine feet six inches deep and five feet broad. fosse, m. netif six prqfond cinq (There is) a room fifty paces long and VoUd une chambre, f. cinquante pas, m. * From this sentence it may be easily perceived that, whenever the sub- stantive of \vhich the dimensions are given is followed either by an adjec- tive or any other words that modify it, the adjective expressing its dimen- sion most come after th word or words expressing those modifications. ADJECTIVE. 41 twenty broad. The walls of our garden are thirty vingt muraille, f. noire sont trente feet three inches high and two feet broad. I have a tree trois sixty feet high and eighteen round. soixante dix-huit gros. RULE 7. If the adjective be changed into its corre- sponding substantive, the object, of which the dimensions are given, must be immediately followed by the preposi- tion de, OF, then by the number and substantive express- ing the measure, and finally by another preposition de and the substantive that takes the place of the adjective of dimension. Whenever there is any new dimension given, the preposition de must precede the number, and be repeated before the substantive that takes the place of the adjective of dimension. Ex. line table DE dix pieds DE A table ten feet long longueur et DE hv.it DE and eight broad. largeur, That is to say ; a table OF ten feet or length and OF eight OF breadth. When there is more than one dimension given, the sentence may be elegantly turned thus : Une table DE dix pieds DE A table ten feet long and longueur, SUR huit DE eight broad. largeur, That is to say literally, a table often feet of length upon eight of breadth. Une boite DE quatre polices A box four inches thick, d'epaisseur, SUR dix pieds ten feet long and six DE longueur et six DE broad. largeur, That is to say, a box OF four indies OF thickness, UPON icnfeet OF length and six OF breadth. The last exercise is to be translated again according to Rule 7. 48 ADJECTIVE. DEGREES OF SIGNIFICATION IN THE ADJECTIVES. There are three degrees of signification in the adjec- tives ; the positive, the comparative and the superlative. The Positive. The positive is the adjective used in its simple significa- tion, without expressing any increase or diminution ; as, riche, rich ; pauvre, poor ; bon, bonne, good. The adjec- 'tive agrees in ^gender and number with the substantive to which it relates. EXERCISE. A good, feeling, beneficent and virtuous man is a sensible bienfaisant treasure to society. A true and sincere friend is tresor, m. pour societe, f. a 1 verys rare* being 2 . Men used to vicissi- bien, adv. rare etre, m. accoutume mal- tudes are not easily dejected. The causes of four, m. sont aisement alattu, p. p. cause, f. good and evil are various and uncertain; often bien, m. mal, m. sont varie incertain (entangled with each other) and subject to unforeseen* entremele sujet (a des) imprevu accidents 1 . Intemperance makes life short and miser* Intemperance, f. rend vie, f. court able. The Comparative. The comparative is the adjective expressing a compari- son between two objects, and showing that the one is either equal, superior, or inferior to the other. There are therefore three different sorts of comparatives ; the com- parative of equality ; as, Je suis aussi riche que vous ; I am as rich as you. The comparative of superiority; as, mon Jrere est plus studieux que le votre ; my brother is more studious than yours. The comparative of inferiority ; as, les richesses sont mains, utiles, or, ne sont pas si utiles, a I'-homme que la sante; riches are less useful, or, are not so useful, to man as health. ADJECTIVE. 43 RULE 8. The comparative of equality is formed by placing aussi, AS, before the adjective, and aussi or autant, AS MUCH, before the participle passive; aussi must be repeated before every adjective. The conjunction que, AS, unites the objects that are compared. Ex. Ma sceur est AUSSI amli* My sister is as ambitious tieuse QUE vous, as you. L'-homme vertueux est The virtuous man is as AUSSI, ou AUTANT, cs- much esteemed as the time QUE le libertin est libertine is despised. meprise, EXERCISE. Alexander was as ambitious as Caesar. 1 am as Alexandre etoit ambitieux que Cesar Je suis tall as you. My father is as rich as yours. - haut riche le volre Miss D. is as amiable as her cousin. If Mademoiselle sa cousine, f. Si, c. my father were as rich as my uncle, lie (would make) a mon etoit oncle Jeroit better use of his riches. Your brothers are as meilleur usage, m. ses Vos sont learned as we. 1 am as rich as you, and as honest and nous civil as my companions. My cousin is as merry, as compagnons, m. cousin, m. gai lively and amiable as his brothers. enjoue ses RULE 9. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing phis, MORE, before the adjective; and que, THAif, will unite the objects that will be compared. Plus must be repeated before every adjective. Sa cousine est PLUS savante His cousin is more learned et plus studieuse QUE vous, and more studious than you. 44 ADJECTIVE. EXERCISE. Miss A. is handsomer* and more learned than her et que, c. sisters. Lucia is taller and more proud than her Lucie orgueilleux sa little cousin. His sister is more covetous than he. Sa avare lui, pro. Nothing is pleasanter to the mind than the Rien ne, adv. agreable esprit, m. light of truth. Nothing is more lovely than virtue, lumiere, f. virile, f. aimable and nothing is more desirable than wisdom. My desirable sagesse, f. Ma daughter is taller than your son by two inches.f de pouce, m. Your brother is taller than you by the 1 whole 1 heads. ttte, f. In winter the roads are always worse than En hiver, m. cfiemin, m. sont toujours plus mauvais in summer. His eldest* brother 1 (will be) more attentive, en tie, m. sera attentif industrious and rich than he industrieux lui. RULE 10. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing the adverb moins, LESS ; or ne-pas^. si, NOT so, before the adjective ; gue, THAN, follows it; moins must be repeated before every adjective. Votre cousin est MOINS Your cousin is less noble noble ttUE vous, than you. H n'est PAS si orgueilleux He is not so proud as his QUE sa sceur, sister. * To translate this adjective, handsomer, it must be changed into more handsome, and the same turn must be given to all others, the comparatives of which are formed by the addition of er or r. f- The preposition by, being preceded by a comparative, is to be trans- lated by the preposition tie. J It will be easily perceived that the dash, which separates ne from pas, points out the place to be given to the verb that is used in the sentence. ADJECTIVE. 45 EXERCISE. Mrs. P. is less polite than her daughter, and her Madame poll sa so. daughter (is not) so revengeful as she. You are 3 'nots vindicatif elle* etes ne-pas so dutiful as your brother. My father is not so rich obtissant as yours Miss Goodwill is less amiable than her mother. le votre sa Paris (is not) so populous as London.- Your peuple Londres companion (is neither) so prudent nor so circum- compagnon, m. nest ni\ prudent ni circons-> spect as you. pect Observation. The adverbs more and less, offering serious difficulties when preceded by the article the, I consider it as necessary to give the following rule, though it has no connexion with the comparatives. RULE 1 1 . The adverbs more and less being preceded by the article the, and placed in two different members of a sentence, the second of which is a consequence drawn from the first, the article is to be suppressed, and the con- struction of the sentence must be this. Begin the sentence with the adverb more or less, then bring in the subject of the verb, afterwards the verb, and lastly the adjective or noun substantive standing as the object of the verb. Ex. Plus nous sommes riches, The 'richer* we* are*, the plus nous sommes avares, mores covetous 8 we 6 are7. That is to say ; morgtue are rich, more ive are covetous. N. B. If the object of the verb should be a conjunctive pronoun, that pronoun must precede the verb. Ex. Plus vous etes vertueux, plus The more virtuous you are, je vous aime, the more I love you. That is to say ; more you are virtuous, more I you love. The e ofque must be contracted before the pronoun elle. Write then qitflle. f Ni, being a negative conjnnction, takes the place of pas. 46 ADJECTIVE. EXERCISE. The more a thing is difficult, the more honourable chose, f. difficile, adj. -honorable it is. The less you give to your children, the less ette donnez, v. they spend. The richer they are, the more Us, pro. dependent, v. covetous they are. The more a young man studies, avare, adj. ttudie, v. the more learned he grows, and the more savant , adj. devient, v. respected he is. The more a drunkard drinks, the respecte, p. p. ivrogne, m. boit, v. more thirsty he is. The more odious laziness altere, adj. odieux, adj. paresse, f. is, the more we should avoid* it 1 - The less devrions, v. eviter, v. la, pro. you apply, the less you learn. The more vous vous appliquez, v. apprenez, v. they shall know* you 1 , the less they will esteem* connoitrontj v. cstimeront, v. you 1 . Observation. The three following adjectives are com* parative by themselves. Meitteur, better, for plus ban, which is never used. Pire, worse, for plus mauvais, which is used. Moindre, less, for plus petit, which is also used. EXERCISE. The watch which my grandfather has bought is montre, f. que grandpere, m. achetee better than the clock which he gave to my mother. -horloge t f. a donnee mere, f. My friend's buckles are better than those of his boucle, f. celles uncle, but mine are worse than his. The onde, m. les miennes les siennes, life of a slave is a thousand times worse than death vie, f. esclave, m. ^ mille fois mart, f. itself. -The pain which I endure is less than that meme peine, f. que souffre cette which is inflicted on galley-slaves. gut est infligee aux galerien, m. ADJECTIVE. 4T The Superlative. The adjective is in the superlative when it raises the quality to the highest or to a very high degree. There- fore there are two kinds of superlatives : the superlative relative, and the superlative absolute. Formation of the Superlative Relative. RULE 12. The superlative relative is formed, first, by placing the article le, la, les ; du, dela, des ; au, d la, aux f the, of the, &c. either contracted, or in its natural state, before the comparative adjectives, meilleur, best ; pire, worse; moindre, least; or before the comparative adverbs mains, least; plus, most; and mieux, best; followed by an adjective. Ex. Votre sceur est LA MEIL- Your sister is the lest and iEURE et LA PLUS belle the handsomest woman Jemme de la ville, in the town.* 2dly, by placing one of these possessive pronouns mon, ton, son, notre, votre, leur, instead of the article, before the comparative adjectives or adverbs meilleur, pire t moindre t mains and plus. Ex. Monsieur R. est mon meil- Mr. R. is my best friend. leur ami t Monfrcre a toujours ete My brother has always votre plus zele protecteur, been your warmest pro- tector. N. B 1. When an adjective in the superlative relative precedes the substantive, the article placed before the adverb plus or mains serves both for the formation of the superlative and for the substantive. Ex. LA plus aimablefemme de The most amiable woman Londres, in London. 2. When, on the contrary, the adjective is placed after the substantive, the article is repeated before both the substantive and the adjective. Ex. "LA Jemme LA plus aimable The most amiable woman de Londres, in London. * The preposition in, following a superlative relative, must be translated by the preposition de, or the genitive of the article du, de la, des, Sec. if the noun governed by the preposition t' takes the article. ADJECTIVE. 3. If the substantive is qualified by more than one adjec- live, those adjectives must be placed after the substantive, and the article and adverb of comparison are to be repeated before every adjective. Ex. LE prince LE PLUS sage, I/E The wisest, most prudent PLUS prudent et LE PLUS and most generous prince genereux qui AIT existe,* that has existed. EXERCISE. The vine is onef of the most useful and agreeable vigne, f. utile gifts of Providence.^ Virtue is the most precious don, m. Providence, f. preeieux thing in the world. The lion is the strongest and chose, f. dumonde,m. lion fort most courageous of all animals. (There is) the hand- courageux animal, m. Voila somest lady in London. She is so touchy, that she will bourru veut not bear the least joke. Miss P. is the mildest, soitffrir raillerie, f. doux politest and most affable of all her sisters. || Ingratitude poli affable ses Ingratitude, f. is the greatest of all vices. If France were as rich vice, m. Si etoit as England (it would be) the best country in the ce seroit poi/s, m. world. monde, m. Formation of the Superlative Absolute. RULE 13. The SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE is formed by placing tres, fort, bien, very ; or infiniment, infinitely ; extremement, extremely, before the adjective. When the substantive is modified by more than one adjective, the * Qui or qve following a superlative relative always governs the next Terb in the subjunctive mood. Therefore in the above sentence, instead of tkat^has existed, we say, that may have exited, Qfi AIT EXISTS. f- The word gift being understood after one, one must take its gender. j See the N. B. 3, after Rule 12, at the top of this page. Place the substantive thing before the adjective precious. U See the N. B. 3, at the top of this page. ADJECTIVE. 49 adverb forming the superlative must be repeated before each of them. Ex. Charles dix est TRES reli- Charles the Tenth is very gieux, TRES charitable et religious, very charitable TRES indulgent, and very indulgent. EXERCISE. God is a being infinitely great and perfect. I am etre, m. parfait your most humble and obedient servant. The front trts obcissant servitetir, m. Japade, f. of your house is very beautiful. You are very good, but beau your brother is very wickeih My uncle has a very fine mediant country 2 - house 1 , and very 3 spacious 5 gardens 1 . My campagne, f. maison de spadenx best friend is dead. Our common 1 enemy 1 has 'the 5 Notre commun most 4 inveterate* hatred 3 against this country. Their inveterc haine contre ce JLeurs least embarrassments* make their greatest delight. embarras, m. .font delices, f. pi. Pride and passion are his least defects.* Orgueil, m. colere, f. sont ses dcfant, m. OF ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS OF NUMBER. The adjectives of number are words used in calculation. I call them adjectives, because they are intended to modify; and every word that modifies is an adjective. They are divided into two sorts, the cardinal and the ordinal. The cardinal merely express the number of the persons and things of which we speak. The ordinal point out the order of the persons or things with respect to the numbers. Observation Some of the cardinal numbers having different pronunciations, according to their different situa- tions, I shall give a proper representation of them for the advantage of beginners. * Observe that in these two sentences, feast is an adjective, and not an adverb. It is therefore to be translated by moindrc and not by moiits. . D 50 ADJECTIVE. CARDINAL NUMBERS. PRONUNCIATION. Not followed by any other word. Before a vowel, or Before a consonant, or an A mate. an h aspirated. ^'"L'lone. Une, f.J Deux, two. Trois, three. Quatre, four, quatre, Cinq, five, cink, Six, six, siss, quatre amis, cat maisons. cink oranges, tin livres. siz -hommes, si plumes. Sept, seven, set, stars, J Huit, eight, /*#, huit anges, 1 hvi vilk$f angels, J Neuf, nine, weM/J neuve Mmus, 1 neuJardinSt bishops, J jP/x, ten, diss, dizoMciers,} di dames . officers, J Onze, Eleven. Douze, Twelve. Treize, Thirteen. Quatorze, Quinze, Seize, Fourteen. Fifteen. Sixteen. Dix-sept, Seventeen. Dix-huit, Eighteen. Dix-neuf, Vingt, Nineteen. Twenty. 'Vingt-un, or \ Vingt-et-un,* j Vingt-deux, Vingt-trois, Vingt-quatre, Vingt-cinq, Vingt-six, Twenty-one. Twenty-two. Twenty-three. Twenty-four. Twenty-five. Twenty- six. Vingt-sept, Twenty- seven. Tfce conjunction, ct, is used from twenty to eighty 'before un. ; itot before any other number. But we cannot say with any pro- auatre-vingt etun; we must say, quatre-vingt-un, &c. I shall bseve 9 also that ia vingt the g is never pronounced j the t !S also mute, except when followed by a vowel, or an h not aspirated. Yet from twenty- one to thirty, the t must be distinctly sounded. ADJECTIVE. Vingt-huity Vingt-neiif, Trente, Trente-un, or 1 Trente-et-un, j Trente-deuxy fyc. Quarante, Quarante-et-un, Quarante-deux, Cinquante, Cinquante-et-uny Soixante, Soixante-et-un t Soixa.nte-deu.Xy ' Soixante-trois, Soixante-quatre, Soixante-cinq, Soixante-six t Soixante-septy Soixante-huit, Soixante-neuf, Soixante-dixy Soixante-onzey Soixante-douzey Soixante-treizey Soixante-quatorze, Soixante-quinze, Soixante-seize, Soixante-dix-sept, Soixante-dix-h uit, Soixa nte-dix-n eufy Quatre-vingt* Quatre-vingt-un, Quatre-vingt-deux, Quatre- vingt-troiSy Quatre-vingt-quatre, Quatre-vingt-cinq, Quatre-vingt-sixy Qiiatre-vingt-sept, Quatre-vingt'huity Quatre-vingt-neiify Twenty-eight. Twenty-nine. Thirty. Thirty- one. Thirty-two, &c. Forty. Forty-one. Forty-two. Fifty. Fifty- one. Sixty. Sixty-one. Sixty-two. Sixty-three. Sixty-four. Sixty-five. Sixty-six. Sixty-seven. Sixty-eight. Sixty-nine. Seventy. Seventy-one. Seventy-two. Seventy-three. Seventy-four. Seventy-five. Seventy-six. Seventy-seven. Seventy-eight. Seventy-nine. Eighty. Eighty-one. Eighty-two. Eighty-three. Eighty-four. Eighty-five. Eighty-six. Eighty-seven. Eighty-eight. Eighty-nine. * In qvatre-vingt the g and t are not sonnded in any of thejiumbers to one hundred, not even before a vowel ;. therefore we say, quatrc-vin, quatre-vin-un, quatrc.-vin-huit } yuatre-vin-onse. D 2 52 ADJECTIVE. Qnatre-vingt-dix, Ninety. Quatre-vingt-onze, Ninety-one. Quatre-vingt-douze, Ninety-two. Quatre-vingt-treize, Ninety-three. Quatre-vingt-fjiiatorze, Ninety-four. Quatre-ving t~quinze, Ninety-five. Quatre-vingt-seize, N inety-six. Quatre-vingt-dix'sept, Ninety-seven. Quatre-vingt-dix-huit, Ninety-eight. Qiiatre-yingt-dix-neiif) Ninety-nine. Cent,* ^ A hundred. Cent-un, &c. A hundred and one. -Deux censy Two hundred. Trois cens, &c. Three hundred. Mille,* mil,\ A thousand. Deux mille, Two millions. Troh mille, &c. Three millions. Million^ A million. RULE J4-. Cent in the plural, and vingt in qualre-vingt and six-vingt (this last number is become obsolete), take an s when they are followed by a substantive either expressed or understood ; as in these examples : deux cens soldats, two hundred soldiers ; quatre-vingts chevaux, eighty horses ; six-vingts ecus, one hundred and twenty (or six score) crowns: Combien serons-nous a table? How many shall we be at table ? Nous serons quatre-vingts ; we shall be eighty. The word persons is understood after hoiu many, and so it is also after eighty. But whenever cent and quatre-vingt are followed by another number, they must be written without an s. Ex. : quatre-cent-six maisons ; four hundred and six houses. Quatre-vingt-dix officiers ; ninety officers. Observation 1- Before onze and the ordinal number onzieme, the article is not to be contracted. We say, le onze, le onzieme ; du onze, du onzieme, &c. ; les ouze, des ouze, &c. pronouncing these numbers as if they began with * In one hundred, except speaking of th'ngs that may be sold by the hundred, one is not to be translated ; therefore we say cent hommes, one hundred men ; un cent depommes, one, or ahuudrcd apples. In one thou- sand, mille, one is never translated. J- In mentioning dates, we write mil and not mille ; in any other case we use milte t which never takes the sign of the plural. J Million is not an adjstfive ; it belongs to the class of the ntbstanlivft. ADJECTIVE. 5S an h aspirated, which k however must be pronounced slightly. In this sentence, surles unekeure, at about one o'clock, the u in une is also to be sounded as if it were preceded, by an h aspirated. Observation 2. When the above numbers one,two, three, &c. are followed by a participle past, the participle must be preceded by the preposition de. Ex. II y en eut vingt v'absous, et Twenty were acquitted, cinq DE condamnes & and five were condemned mort, to death. EXERCISE. I was in the company of eleven gentlemen and nine compagnie, f. ladies.' He has spoken to three officers and two parle generals. If I had a hundred guineas, I (would lend*) generaux,m> avois - gutnce t f. enpreterois you 1 eighty. The army of our allies was composed armee, f. nos allic, m. composes of a hundred thousand men of foot, and of twenty <=>> infanterie, f. thousand of horse. They took fifteen hundred men cavalerie, f. jirent prisoners, killed four thousand, wounded a prisonnier, m. en tuerent en blesserent thousand, and (carried away) above two millions in emporterent plus de en specie. The battle (was fought) in one thousand esptce, f. bataille, f. se lii'ra en eight hundred and fourteen, at three o'clock in the heure, f. & du morning. I shall be here (at about) one o'clock. I have matin id vers une heure found a purse in which (there were) one and trouve bourse, f. dans larfiielle ily avoit thirty* guineas, one and forty crowns, and one and guince, f. ecu, in. * Those compound numbers must be inverted in French, as the highest always comes fust. Therefore turn them thus ; thirty and one, forty and one, &c. 54 ADJECTIVE. twenty shillings. 1 saw one and fifty men assembled schelling, m. at vu assemble before St. James's palace. When my brother devant, p. St. Jacques, m. Quand died he was one and thirty years old. Mr. P. (will pay)* mourut avoit <>. payera me 1 one and sixty guineas well told. 1 received me bien compte regus yesterday by the last mail one and forty letters hier dernier malle, f. lettre t f* well sealed, and very interesting. The enemies had cachete important eurent one hundred men killed, seventy wounded, forty tue, p. p. blesse, p. p. lost, and five hundred taken prisoners. perdu, p. p. Jait, p. p. prisonnier ORDINAL NUMBERS. Premier, m. premiere, f. 1 ~p' t or unieme,* Second, m. seconde, f.\ j **i * f or deuxieme,* J Troisicme, Third. Quatrieme, Fourth. Cinquieme, Fifth. Sixieme, Sixth. Septieme, Seventh. Huititme, Eighth. Neuvieme, Ninth. Dixieme, Tenth. Onzieme, Eleventh. DonztimE, Twelfth. Treizieme, Thirteenth. Quatorzieme, Fourteenth. Quinzieme, Fifteenth. Seizieme, Sixteenth. Dix-septieme, Seventeenth. Dix-huiticme, Eighteenth. * Unieme is only used after vingt, tretife, quarante, cinyuante, soiranfe, quafre-ringt, cent el mills; and deuxiemeis always used instead of second after these same numbers. We therefore say, vitigt-unieme, lingt-deux- ieme ; tinquante-vnietne, einquante-devjneme, &c. Yet the use of deux- i&me h not, like that of unieme, confined to the formation of these com- pound numbers. ADJECTIVE. ! Dix-neuvieme, Vingtieme, Vingt-unieme, or Vingt- et-unieme, Vingt'deuxieme, &c. Trentieme, Trente-unieme, &c. Quarantitme, Quarante-unieme, &c. Cinquantieme, Cinquante-unieme , &c. Soixantieme, &c. Soixante-neuvieme, Soixante-dixieme, Soixante-onzieme, &c. Quatre-vingtieme, Qiiatre-vingt-unieme, &c. Quatre-vingt-neuvienie, Quatre-vingt-dixitme, Quatre-vingt-onzieme, &c Centieme, Cent-unieme, Cent-deuxieme t Deux-centieme, Millicme, Nineteenth. Twentieth. Twenty-first. Twenty-second. Thirtieth. Thirty-first. Fortieth. Forty-first. Fiftieth. Fifty-first. Sixtieth. Sixty-ninth. Seventieth. Seventy-first. Eightieth. Eighty-first. Eighty-ninth. Ninetieth. Ninety-first. Hundredth. Hundred and first. Hundred and second. Two hundredth. Thousandth. SUBSTANTIVES OF NUMBER. There are three sorts of substantives of number, which are the collective, the distributive and the proportional. The collective serve to denote a determinate quantity of objects ; such as, une demi douzaine, half a dozen ; une douzaine, a dozen ; une centaine, a hundred ; un milUer t a thousand; un million, a. million. The distributive serve to denote the different parts of a whole; as, la moitie, half; le tiers, the third part ; le quart t a quarter, or fourth part ; un cinquieme, a fifth part, &c. The proportional serve to denote the progressive increase of the number of objects ; as, le double, double ; le triple, triple ; le quadruple, quadruple, &c. RULE 15. The cardinal numbers must be used in French in speaking of the days of the month, excepting the first, though the ordinal be used in English. Ex. Le DEUX de Novembre, The second of November. Le PREMIER de Mai, Thejirst of May. 56 ADJECTIVE. EXERCISE. My friend will come to see 2 * us 1 onf the fifth of viendra voir < dtt next* month 1 . Lady - dayj falls on the prochcin mois, m. Notre-dame, f. jour, m. tombe Q twenty-fifth of March. In the leap 2 year 1 the Mars, m. bissextile annee, f. month of February has one day more, which is the mois, m. Ftvrier, m. de plus qui twenty-ninth. The first of November is All-saints day, Novembre, ru. la toussaint, f. and the fifth of the same month is the day of the meme de$ gunpowder plot.|j Come on the first day of poudres, pi. conspiration, f. Venez * July. Juiiiet, m. RULE 16. Whenever the ordinal numbers are used in English to point out the rank or order which persons or things hold with respect to one another, the ordinal num- bers must be used in French. EXERCISE. Pay attention to Rides 14- and 15, and to the observations on the Cardinal Numbers, On the eleventh of June I received twelve letters, but Juin reyus the eleventh has 1 afforded* me 1 more pleasure than the procure me plus others. Mrs. B. is the fifth lady whom I have seen Madame, f. que to-day. The spring begins on the twenty- aujourd'hui printemps, m. commence first or twenty-second of March. He cannot spend Mars, m. ne peut pas dtpenser the sixth part of his fortune.- The eleventh of Novem- parlie, f. sa fortune, f. * See the note* in the exercise upon Rule 19, page 31. f- On preceding a date i> uever translated in French. % * Lady-day ; that is to say, the day of our lady. Say, the day of all saints. j| Say, rtftheplotoftheguH-poiL-dert. ADJECTIVE. 91 her, which is the eleventh month of the year, was the annce, f. dullest day of the 2 whole 1 months. triste tout RULE 17. In speaking of sovereigns and princes, the cardinal numbers are used in French, instead of the ordinal ; and they are placed after the substantives as in English, but without the article ; as, George trois, Henri quatre ; George the Third, Henry the Fourth. However from this rule are to be excepted the two first ordinal numbers, premier and second, first and second, which must be used in French, but without the article; as, George pre- mier, George the First ; Francois second, Francis the Second. When we speak of the Emperor Charles the Fifth, and of the Pope Sixtus the Fifth; we say, Charles quint, Sixte quint ; quint is a contraction of the Latin word quintus, fifth. EXERCISE. See Rule 5, on the Article, page 15. Edward the Sixth, the son of Henry the Eighth, Edouard, m. . Jils, m. Henri and the grand-son of Henry the Seventh, was* 'bat? petit avoit ne quc nine years old when he began to reign. Henry an, m. <*>> quand commenca a regner the Fifth, King of England, the son of Henry the rot, m. Fourth, and father of Henry the Sixth, married Catha- (pousa Cathe- rine, the daughter of Charles the Sixth, king of France, rine, f. conquered the greatest part of that kingdom, and conquit grand partie,f. ce royaume,m. died (in the) midst of his victories (Long live) mourut an milieu ses victoire, f. Five George the Fourth, son of George the Third. Charles George the Fifth, King of Spain, and the Pope Sixtus the Pape, m. Fifth, were two great men. ttoient grand D 5 58 ADJECTIVE. RULE 18. The article is suppressed in French before the ordinal number when it is preceded by a noun used to quote a. chapter, an article, a page, a line, &c. ; but should the ordinal number precede the noun, the construction is the same in French as in English; and the article is expressed. Ex. Livre troisieme, Book the third. Le troisieme lime, The third book. EXERCISE. What you (look for) you will find* in the second Ce que cherchez trouverez le book of Samuel, chapter the third, verse the Samuel, m. ckapitre, m. verset, m. ninth, page the first, and line the tenth. We read page, f. ligne, f. lisons in Telemachus, book the seventh, page the hundred Telemaque, m. and twenty-fifth, that Mentor pushed Telemachus into the que poussa Teltmaque sea, and threwa himself 1 (into it*) afterward with him. mer, f. jeta se y ensuite lui Our master forgives the first time, threatens the Notre pardonne Jots, f. menace second, and always* punishes 1 the third. toujours punit ' OF COMPOUND ENGLISH INVERTED NOUNS. Nouns, such as a tin-box, Burgundy-ivine, I call com- pound inverted, and with reason, I think ; as, according to their meaning, the last should come first, and the first last; and the words that are in ellipsis should be placed between both. For example, these words a tin-box, according to their meaning, present to the mind this simple construc- tion, a box made of tin, and Burgundy-ivine, "wine from Burgundy. These English inversions give rise to difficul- ties, which it is impossible to bring to any fixed rules that would embrace them all. I shall however do my best, assisted by the decisions of the French Academy, to throw some light upon them. * Translate the sentence as if it were thus expressed ; you it will find, vous le trottveres. ADJECTIVE. 59 RULE 19. To translate into French these English compound inverted words, the first in English must be put the last in French, and the last must be put the first ; and whenever the first in English specifies the material of which the second is made, or the country or place from which it comes, the last in French is to be preceded by the preposition de, of or from. Ex. Une maison DE brigue, A brick house. Une cuiller v'argent, A silver spoon. Du poisson DE riviere, A river fish. Du vin DE Bourgogne, Burgundy wine. That is to say, a house of, &c. ; a spoon of, &c. ; a fish of, &c.; wine from, &c. EXERCISE. Your 1 sister 2 has 3 a* silk 6 gown s and a Votre, pr. sceur, f. a, v. une soie, f. robe, f. un gold thimble. We drink Champagne wine. - It is or, m. de, m. buvons C'est, v, a marble pillar. - They have a house marbre, m. pillier, m. Us ont une maison, f. built with oak wood. -- She has construite, p. p. de, p. ckene, m. bois Elle a bought silver buckles and diamond argent. >** t , .ii. boucLe, r. uiamans, rfl. ear-rings. Have you spoken to the (pendans-d'oreilles, m.) Avez, v. parle, p. p. silk-merchant? - Bring me my straw- marchand, m. moi mon, pr. paille, f. hat. - The rich (make use) of silver chapeau,ra. riches, m. se serve/it, v. argent plate, and the poor make use of Jrorf vauselle, f. pauvres, m. font, v. usage, m. fer, M. iorks and pewter spoons. ctain, m. cuiller, f. RULE 20. Whenever the first word in English expresses the use to which the second is destined, the second in French (which is the fW m ? - ""- ..... J - J by the preposition ^ to o cu _ 60 ADJECTIVE. language, I shall not pretend to reduce it to any fixed rule. Lepot au lait, The milk-pot. La boite d poudre, The powder-box. Lefer a friser, The curling-irons. Un pot d I'eau, A water-jug. La chambre a manger, The eating-room. That is to say, the pot to the, c. ; the box to, &c. ; the iron to, &c. ; a jug to the, &c. ; the room to, &c. EXERCISES.* Gun- powder was invented by a monk. - Canon poudre, f. Jut invenlre par moine, m. Go to the wine - cellar, and bring* us? a Allez vin, m. art. care, f. apportez nous vinegar - bottle. - The servant has vinaigre bouteille, f. dotneslique, f. and m. a lost the tinder-box, and cannot light perdu, p. p. fusil, m. ne sauroit, v. attumer, r. the candle. - 1 live in the hay - market, chandelle, f. demeure sur Join, m. art. marche, m. my cousin in the fish - market, and my mon, pr. sur poisson, m. art. ma, pr Bister in the poultry - market. - If you Si, c, sur volatile, t. art. . go to London to-morrow, bring me" a um^. allcz, v. demain, adv. toupet, rav iron. Give me the oil bottle, pepper jer, m. moi, pr. huiie, f. art. poivre, m. art. box, and mustard - pot. - Have you seen loite, f. moutarde, f. art. VM, p. p- the water-mill which my father has bought? moulin, m. que, pr. No, but 1 have seen the wind-mill which your bro- A^o, adv. vent ther has built at Greenwich. -- We had a Jaitbdtir a eumes>v. cabbage - soup, a rice - pudding, a (leg t riz m art. pouding, m. c ,m.aru ?"T' '' r ' sauce, and ice of mutton) with caper - f ^ . ^ v n t. is to ** preceded by the article, * Wtewver the second word ,n French is t I pot these letters (art.) imjpedmtely after t, ADJECTIVE. 61 cream.* 1 have found your sister's work - bag, creme, f. .ouvrage, m. sac, m. in the eating - room. We shall have peas manger, m. chambre, f. aurons,v. pois, m.art. porridge, a salt* cod 1 , with egg - sauce, and a soupe, f. sale, adj. morue, f. osiif, ro. tarbot with lobster - sauce.f 1 bought a homar, m. art. at achete plum cake, an apple - tart, and aisin, m. art. gateau, m. pomme, f. art. tarte, f. o gooseberry and cherry pies.J Give me groseille, f. art. cerise, f. art. tourte, f. the wine-glass and the coffee - cup. verre cafe, m. tasse Recapitulatory Exercise upon the preceding Rules. Ignorance is the mother of admiration, error Ignorance, f. est mere, f. admiration, f. erreur, f. and superstition. The covetous despise the poor. superstition, f. Les avare meprisent les pauvre Humility is the basis of Christian 2 virtues'. -Humilite, f. base, f. Chretien Pride is generally the effect of ignorance. Orgueil, m. effet, na. Give me some bread, meat, turnips and water. Donnez-moi Merit and favour are the two springs of envy.-- - Mtrite, m. faveur, f. sont source, f. envie, f. Interest, pleasure and glory are the three motives Intcret, m. motifs, m. pf the actions and conduct of men. Is 1 it* 'not* conduit e, f. Est ce ne-pas Peter's book ? Your father is gone to London, where he allt has bought (a few) horses and (a great many) cows, achete quelques beaucoup vache (which he) intends to se nd to Canada or Jamaica. qu'il se propose d" envoy er * Caper-sauce cannot be made with one caper on'y ; therefore capre must be put in the plural number. Take care to place the word sume before soup, sauce and cftani. f Read the last note *, and apply it to peas and egg. Read the last note *, and apply it io plum, apple, gooseberry and cherry, 'See the exception on Rule 13, page 24. 62 ADJECTIVE. The father's house and the son's garden tnaison, f. jardin, m. {are adjoining). He found the windows and the door sejoignent trouva shut. Truth is the basis of human 1 happiness l ; forme Verite, f. Jiumain bonheur, m. without it (there is no)* confidence in friendship, sans elle il n'y a point confiance, f. dans amitie, f. and no security in promises. The love of point surete, f. promesse, f. amour, m. liberty and independence is the character of n liberte, f. independence, f. caractere,m. minds 1 . Iron, steel and brass are more useful Fer, m. acier, m. cuivre, m. utile than gold and silver. The smith has at last argent, m. serrurier, m. enfin repaired the two jacks, and the cook repare toume-broche, m.-|- cuisiniere, f. (is roasting) the meat. I have seen the inside of fait r6tir dedans, m. the church. Bring my powder-box, and my eglise, f. ma mon (toupee-iron.) 1 take a lesson three times a week.- for afriser prends ?> The study of grammar is 2 X neither3 so dry nor so dull as etude, f. ne ni sec triste (it is thought). Have prudence and patience, and on se t imagine Ayez prudence, f. patience, f. you will have success. A good conscience is to aurez succes, m. conscience, f. the soul what health is to the body. Merit 6me, f. ce que sante, f. corps, m. Merit? f m . and virtue are the only source of true nobility unique source, f. veritable noblesse, f. Religion, commerce and arms are proper* instruc- Religion, f. commerce, m. arme, f. propre instruc- tions'J for a young prince Her father has been tion, f. a Son etc. * See Observation 2, on Rule 14, page 2G. f- In all compound nouns formed of a verb- and a substantive, the part belonging to the verb, as tourne, is indeclinable ; thesubstantire, on the con- trary, as troche, is declinable. $ As they are not the only instructions proper for a young prince, proper instructions must not be translated by les instructions propres, which would exclude all other instructions ; but by lies instructions propres, some in- structions, &c. ADJECTIVE. 63 made a knight of the Order of the Bath, and fait chevalier, m. ordre, m. Bain, m. her grandfather was a knight of the Order of the etoit Garter. He has not (so much) profit, but more Jarretiere, f. tant profit, m. honour. Fortune's favours are seldom the faveur, f. rarement prize of virtue. Gaming is the son of avarice^ recompense, f. Jeu, m. and the father of despair. This cloth is equal desespoir, m. Ce drop, m. comparable to silk. 1 see the coast of England. A forest sole, f. vois cote, f. foret^ f. twenty miles long and eleven wide. The example mille exemple, m. of a good life is a lesson for the rest of pour reste, m. mankind. The French 2 fleet 1 was destroyed by genre humain, m. Franpois Jlotte, f. fut dctruite the brave Admiral Nelson, on the first of August, one Amiral, m. Aout, m. thousand seven hundred and ninety-eight. The eldest 2 ame son 1 of the king of England bears the title of- Prince of porte titre,m. Wales, as presumptive 2 heir 1 to the crown. GaUes comme prtsomptif heritier, m. de la couronne, f. Lewis the Sixteenth was the grandson of Lewis the Louis, m. petit-jils Fifteenth. William, surnamed the Conqueror, Guillaume, m. surnomme Conquerant, m. King of England and Duke of Normandy, was one Due, m. Normandie, f. ftoit of the greatest generals of the eleventh century, He siecle,ra. (was born) at Falaise, and was the natural* son 1 of naquit a naturel Robert Duke of Normandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's die fourreur, m. daughter. He died at Hermentrude, in France, on the file, f. nwurut a ninth of September, one thousand and eighty-seven. 64 ADJECTIVE. Mrs. Nelson's servant knows the price of all the servante, f. suit prlx, m. provisions. She bought yesterday some chickens at denree, f. acheta pouht, m. a one shilling and three pence a-piece. She came from *<=* sous vint America in three weeks. Thomas was formerly a en etoit autrefois musician, now he is a (dancing master), musicien, m. a present maitre d danser, m. to-morrow he (will be) a painter. This water is very denial n sera peintre*vs\. Cette agreeable to the smell. We (are going) to Coxheath odorat, m. aliens to see the camp. 1 have in my wardrobe five *o- voir camp, m. dans garde-robe, f. coats, sixteen waistcoats, twenty-two pair of stockings, haliit veste, f. has and forty-six handkerchiefs. The road to Croy- mouchoir, m. chemin, m. don is very bad in winter. Bring us good wine, good en hirer, m. beer and the (oil-bottle). The front of the boutcille a I'huile, f. Ja$ade, f. king's palace (is not) so beautiful as I thought. Gene- n'est pas croyois Gene- rosity excites admiration. Charles the Second, the rosite, f excite I'adnriration, f. son of Philip the Fourth, the grandson of Philip the Philippe Third, and the great grandson of Philip the Second, arrierc-petlt-Jils, m. left his kingdom to Philip the Fifth.-- On the eight- laissa son eenth of February, one thousand four hundred and Fcvrier seventy-eight, the Duke of Clarence, brother to king frere, m. Edward the Fourth, was drowned in a butt " fut tioye dans tfthneau, m. (of malmsey wine). The inhabitants of the city of de vin de malvoisie, f. habitant, m. ville, f. Dublin have presented a petition to the king. It out presentc adresse, f. Elle ADJECTIVE. 65 was signed by one and twenty knights, and* above two etoit signe par plus hundred citizens. Good cider is preferable to bad citoyen, m. cidre, m. wine. That man always 2 wears 1 -}- a green hat, a white a shirt, red shoes and black stockings. He has many chemise, f. bas, m. bien children and plenty of money The longer^: the day oeaucoup argent, in. long is, the shorter is the night. You have a fine hat.' court nuit, f. Shame is a mixture of the grief and fear Honte, f. melange, m. chagrin, m. crainte, f. which infamy causes. Religion, morality, govern- que infamie, f. cause morale, f. gouverne- ment, fine arts, in a word (every thing) is over- ment,m. beaux arts en mot, m. tout ren- turned, Homer was the first poet who personified the verse Jut poete, m. personnifia divine* attributes 1 , human* passions 1 , and physical 2 divin attribut, m. humain physique causes 1 . Pride and vanity are often the source vanite, f. sou-vent of the misfortunes of mankind. We sell good malheur, m, vendons bread, excellent meat, and very large fishes ; but 1 gros poisson, m. mats we* have* ? neither$ gold nor|| silver. (Is there) any avons ne-ni Yat-il beer in the cellar ? Mrs. B. is a good, virtuous, pru- dans cave, f. vertueux dent and generous lady : she has a daughter as beautiful file, f. as an angel ; but she has neither so much docility nor^f ange, m. * Repeat the preposition by. f- Adverbs ye generally placed after the verbs ; and when these are in a compound tense, the adverbs are to be placed after the auxiliary verb. Ex. Je dis toujours la vMt t J*ai toujours dit la virile, I always speak the truth. I hare always spoken the truth. $ See Rule 11, page 45. See Rule 7, on the Article, Part 1 , page 19. II See Rule 7, on the Article, Part 2, page 19. ^[ Repeat the adverb so much. 66 ADJECTIVE. affability as her cousin Pindar (was born) at cousine, f. Pindare, rn. naquit d, p. Thebes, a city of Greece. Malta is a small island, Grece y f. Malthe, He, f. but it produces corn, cotton, honey, figs and the elle produit coton, m. miel, m. Jigue, f. finest oranges in the world.* The inhabitants of that beau orange, f. fine country are all catholics, and go (every Sunday) pays, m. vont tons les Dimanches (to hear) high mass. The pleasure of the mind is d la esprit, m. greater than the pleasure of the body, and the corps, m, diseases of the mind are more pernicious than the mala die, f. pernicieux diseases of the body. Health, honours and fortune Sante, f. united together cannot satisfy the heart of man. uni ensemble ne peuvent satisfaire cceur, m. (It is) in the sixth page of the second book, chapter C'est a the third. Miss W.'s father, a banker in the banquier, m. Strand, is one of the richest menf in town, but she Strand, m. is prouder and more haughty than if she were the orgueilleux hautain etoit handsomest woman, in Europe. Their son arrived Leur yesterday at Portsmouth from Peru and Martinico, in the St. George, a ninety-gun ship4 Hypocrisy is canon, m. vaisseau sie t f. a homage which vice pays to virtue. A judicious* hommage,m. que vice, m. rend judicieiix answer 1 does more honour than a brilliant 2 repartee 1 . reponse, f. fait Itrillant repartie, f. Give me a knife and fork. My father has bought one and thirty fine 1 grey 3 horses 3 . (He is) an intrepid* man 1 , and gris C'est intrepide **See the note * on Rule 12, on the Superlative Relative, page 47- + Say, one of the men the most rich of the town. $ Say, skip of ninety guns. ADJECTIVE. 6T a man of honour and probity, Mr. C. the queen's de probite, f. jeweller has a very 2 prudent* wife 1 , and the most Jouailler, m. faithful, industrious and honest servant in London. Jidele industrieux honntle He found beauty, youth, riches, wisdom, and trouva la beaute Jeunesse, f. f even virtue, united in her person. Thomas has meme reuni dans sa discretion, but he has no wit. They have discretion, f. ne point (a quantity) of apples and pears. Vienna, the capital beaucoup Vienne, f. of the empire of Germany, is a fine city. The more Allemagne, f. pleasing plays are, the more dangerous they are.* agreable spectacle, m. dangereux The rich, the poor, the young the old, jeunesgens,m. vieillards,ra. the learned and the ignorant are all subject to death.t savant sujet mart, f. True friends are very rare. The famous mine of Vrai rare Jumeux mine,f. Potosi, in Peru, is above two hundred and fifty fathoms a plus toise, f. deep. Henry the First, king of England, and brother profondeur Henri to William Rufus, died the richest prince in Europe. le Roux mourut Paul is taller than you by an inch; but Mrs. pouce, m. Nichol's brother is the tallest of all. tons * See Rule 1 1, on the Comparatives, page 45. i Put all those nouns, except death, in the plural* 68 PRONOUN. i- V* CHAP. IV. OF PRONOUNS. Pronouns are words which supply the place of nouns. There are six different kinds of pronouns, the personal, the possessive, the demonstrative) the relative, the interro- gative and the indefinite. PART I. OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. The personal pronouns are those which denote persons, and supply the place of them. There are three persons : The first is the person who speaks. Ex. JE parley I speak. Nous parlons, We speak. The second is the person to whom we speak. Ex. Tu paries, Thou speakest. Vous parlez, You speak. The third is the person of whom we speak. Ex. IL or KLLE parle, He or she speaks. LLS or KLLES parlent, They speak. The pronouns of the first and second persons are the following, and they are of both genders. First Person. Singular. Je, moi, I. De moi ; d moi, Of me ; to me. Moi, me, Me, or to me. Plural. Nous, We, us, or to us. De nous ; (i. nous, Of us ; to us. Second Person. Singular. Tu, toi, Thou. De toi ; a toi, Of thee ; to the. Toi, te, Thee, or to the. Plural. * Vous, You, or to you. De vous ; a vous, Of you ; to you. PRONOUN. 69 The pronouns of the third person are, for the Singular. Masculine. //, lui. He, or it. De lui ; a lui, Of him ; to him. Lui, To him, or to it. Le, Him, or it. Plural. Masculine. Us, eux, They. D'eux ; deux, Of them; to them. -Leur, To them. Les, Them. Singular. Feminine. Elle, She, it. D'elle ; belle, Of her; to her. Lui, To her, or to it. La, Her, or it. Plural. Feminine. Elles, They. D'elles ; a elles, Of them; to them. Leur, To them. Les, Them. Observation. When the above pronouns are preceded in French by a preposition, moi, tor, lui, eux, elle and elles must be used, and not je or me, tu or te, il or le, Us or les, &c. Ex. With me, avec moi ; for thee, pour toi ; without him, sans lui; in her, en elle; in them, en eux (mas.), en elles (fern.). REFLECTED PRONOUNS. First Person. Singular. Moi-meme, Myself. Plural. Nous-memes, Ourselves. 70 PRONOUN. Toi-meme, Vous-meme t Vous-memes, Lui-meme, Eux-memes, Elle-meme, Elles-memes, Second Person. Singular. Thyself. Yourself. Plural. Yourselves. Third Person. Singular. Masculine. Himself, itself. Plural. Themselves. Singular. Feminine. Herself, itself. Plural. Themselves. Singular and Plural. Masculine and Feminine. Soi, To himself, to herself, to itself, to themselves. Se, Himself, herself, itself, themselves. This pronoun is of both genders and of both numbers ; it is called reflected, because it generally represents the action expressed by the verb, as reflected upon him who does it ; as, il s'kabile, he dresses himself; elle sejlatte, she flatters herself; Us se ruinent, they ruin themselves. Se always precedes the verb ; soi always follows it, being preceded by a preposition. Soi, with reference to persons, is never used but when it relates to an indefinite subject. Ex. Chacun pense & soi, every one thinks of himself. Observations. 1 . The pronouns of the first and second persons are applied only to persons and to things that are personified. PRONOUN. 71 Those of the third person are applied either to persons or things, whether these be personified or not. 2. Tu, te and toi are never used, except expressive of anger, contempt, or great intimacy. Vous is substituted foi tu and toi ; and though it belongs to the second person plural, and the verb that accompanies it is in the same number ; yet if any noun qualifies it, that noun must be put in the singular. Ex. Vous etes aimable, 3. The following pronouns You are amiable. Je, moi, " Nous, Tu, toi, II, lui t Us, eux, Elle, Elks, When rendered in English by nt We, Thou, He, They, She, I They, are always the subjects of the verb. Vous, you, may be the subject or object of the verb. It is the subject, when it performs the action expressed by the verb. Ex. Vous aimez, you love. It is its object, when it does not perform that action, but receives it either directly or indirectly ? directly ; that is to say, without the assistance of any pre- position expressed or understood: indirectly; that is to say, with the assistance of a preposition expressed or understood. Ex. Je vous aime ; that is to say, J'aime vous, I love you. Je vous parle ; that is to say, Jeparle a vous, I speak to you. In the first example, vous is governed directly by the verb love ; in the second it is governed indirectly by the verb speak ; that is to say, with the assistance of the preposition to, which is understood. 4. The pronouns it and they always take in French the gender of the nouns they represent. Ex. Cette table est excellente, mais ELLE est chere ; this table is excellent, but it is dear. A qui sont ces maisons ? ELLES sont d moi; whose houses are those? They are mine. T2 PRONOUN. EXERCISE On the Personal Pronouns -which are the Subjects of the Verb. I love and adore the God of all goodness who created 2 de bonte (a crte) me 1 . We 1 too* often* forget 1 the benefits* trap souvent oublions bienfaits que we have received. Ungrateful man !f thou 1 daily3 regus tons les jours offendest,* thou* daily 6 provokest* a God who 'nererJ offenses provoqucs ne-jamais ceases* to* load 6 thee 5 with new benefits. O ye men ! cesse de combler de who seem to concentrate your happiness in the plea- qui semblez concentrer sures of this transitory* life 1 , remember that you live 2 cette passagtre souvenez-vous que vivez x buts to die. This picture is very old ; but it ne-que pour mourir Ce portrait, m. ancien is well painted. The house which I have bought is bien peint ' . v que at achetee well situated, but I assure' you 1 that it cost* me 1 much. situe assure que coute me beaucoup The books which you saw in my library are good que vites ma bibliothcque books ; but they are badly bound. Your buckles mal relie boucles, f. (would be) much more in the fashion, if they were seroient d mode, f. ctoient smaller. My hat is quite new ; but it is too large. Man tout neiif trop grand Their coach is old ; but it is as good as if it were Leur carrosse, m. vieux etoit new. Observations.- 1 . The pronouns "tve and they, when used in a general, vague, or indefinite sense, are elegantly trans- lated into French by the indefinite pronoun on, which * Which is understood after the word benefits ; but it must be expressed in French, and translated by que. f The article is never placed before nouns representing tbose on whom we call, as it were by apostrophe, to listen to us. PRONOUN. 73 always governs the verb in the singular, and is generally* of the masculine gender. Ex. On n'est jnmais trtis mal~ keureur, quand on a ioujours la vertu pour compagne ; we are never very wretched, when we have virtue for our constant companion. 2. On is to be repeated before every verb upon which it acts as subject. Ex. On joua, on chanta et Von dansa jusqua deux heures du matin ; they played, sung and danced till two o'clock in the morning. 3. in order merely to soften the pronunciation, I' on is to be used instead of on, whenever it is preceded by et, and; ou, where; ou, or; and si, if. The /' placed before the pronoun has no meaning at all. Ex. Dites moi ou Von va ; tell me where they are going. If however I'on were to be followed by one of these pronouns le, la, les or leur, or by a word beginning with one of those monosyllables, the I' should be suppressed, in order to avoid a still greater harshness in the sounds. Ex. Si on le lui donne ; if they give it to him. Et on la loua taiit que, &c. ; and they Praised her so much that, &c. Si I'on le lui donne t ft on la loua ; would be intolerably harsh. There are other cases in which the ear may claim Von instead of on. Practice will make them known. EXERCISE OX THE PRECEDING OBSERVATIONS. People imagine that, when they are rich, they are On s* imagine que quand est happy ; but they (are mistaken) very often ; for the more keureux se trompe trcs souvent car one has, the more one wishes to have.f When we are veut avoir (raised up) to honours, or we are invested with some eleve ou que revetu de quelque * I say that on is generally of the masculine gender (instead of saying is always), because we 6ntl in the dictionary of the Academy this exception : "When it is clearly understood that the n!)ject represented by on is a woman, it must, in that cae, be followed by a feminine. Ex. On nest pas lou jours jeutie etjolie; we are not always young and pretty. Quand on eat jolie, on ne I' iff/tore pen ; when we are pretty we are conscious of it." t I should advise learners not to pretend to translate one single sen- tence of this exercise before they have turned it as I do the following : One imagines that -when one is rich, one if happy ; but one is mistaken very often ; for more one has, mare one withes to half, E 74 PRONOUN. dignity, we are to expect to be criticised. . - dignile, f. doit s'attendre etre critique (Some persons) reported last* week 1 (that in) On rapporta derniere semaine, f. qu'en France they talk of peace. - We are always humane, parle charitable and compassionate when we have (acute compatissant beaucoup feelings). - If we knew* how abundant and solid de sensibilite savoit combien are the consolations which religion offers, we should qve offre w incessantly 2 'recurs to that inexhaustible 2 spring 1 . sans cesse auroit recours cette intarissable source, f. When we are admired for our beauty, we (cannot ne sauroit help) J being3 proud* (of it a ).f s'empecher de etre jlatte en RULE 1. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons being subjects to the verb, must be repeated before every verb, when these are in different tenses ; but they may be repeated or not when the verbs are in the same tense, except the second be followed by its object; for then they must be repeated. Ex. Je crois et je croirai toute I believe, and shall for ever ma vie que, &c. believe that, &c. J'estiine,jerespecte etfaime I esteem, respect and love vot re sceur, your sister. JTestime, respects et aime I esteem, respect and love vot re sceur, your sister. J'estime votre sceur, etje la I esteem your sister, and I respecte, respect her. EXERCISE. I complain and shall continue to complain of the me plains continuerai a me plaindre imprudence of your conduct, unless I see you follow my advice.' suivez mes conseils dites * See Observation 2, page 73. f See the note*, Observation 1, page 73. PRONOUN. 75 repeated* (to me 1 ) that you love* ancU*45 will ever* rcpetc me que aimez <** love 7 r me 6 . I believe 1 you 1 , and thanks you 1 (for 1 it). aimerez crois remercie en We entered the garden, we saw peaches, plums and entrames\ vimes pears, and we gathered the finest. cueillimes RULE 2. In general the personal pronouns of the third persons may be repeated or not, whether the verbs be in the same or in different tenses. Ex. 11 parle et tent elegamment, He speaks and writes ele- or II parle et il ccrii tie- gantly. gamment, Exceptions. 1. From this rule are to be excepted the sentences in which, in order to lay more stress upon the verbs, when there are several following one another, we suppress the conjunction et before the last ; for in this case the pronoun must be repeated before every verb. Ex. II craint, il tremble, il sagite, il se desespere ; pour lui plus de consolation : he fears, he trembles, he is agitated, he despairs ; for him there is 110 more consolation. 2. When there are several verbs following one another, and we wish to give rapidity to the narration, we do not repeat the pronoun. Ex. // va, vient, retourne sur ses pas et ne sarrete que, &c. ; he goes, returns, retraces his steps, and never stops until, &c. EXEHCISE. A good dog pays 2 no 1 attentions to those people J~a.it ne (nucune attention) aux gens who are 1 Neither* friends nor foes, and declares qui ne-ni ni ennemis declare war against those who are troublesome by profession ; la guerre a ceux importuns par etat * That you are understood in English after and ; they must be expressed in French. The 6gures 4 and 5 point oat the order in which they are to be placed in the sentence. j- We cannot say in French to enter the garden, 1o enter an apartment, but to enter into KNTRER DANS. Therefore the preposition DANS must be used after nous entrdmes, E2 16 PRONOUN. he 1 knows' them* (by their) clothes, their voices, their aux habits a la voix a leurs manners, and keeps 2 them 1 at a proper 1 distance 1 . gestes tient les a convenable distance, f. (How many) traitors we constantly 2 meet 1 in Combien traitre, m. constamment rencontrons dans society ! Traitors to their consciences, traitors to those te, f. leurs ceux they call their friends. Do they3 see 2 you 1 ? qu'ils appellent leurs voient They 1 accost? you*, take* you* by the hand, embrace 1 accostent prennent par embrassent you 1 , make 2 you 1 a thousand offers of services, embrace 3 offre you 1 agains, leave 2 you 1 , meet other people, encore quittent renccntrent cT autres personnes speak of you, candidly* say 1 * they hate 2 you 1 , parlent sincerement disent ha'issent and conclude by poisoning what is 2 most 3 precious* Jinissent empoissonner ce qui est leplus (to you 1 ) your reputation. vous reputation, f. KULE 3. The personal pronouns, subjects of the verbs, of whatever person they may be, are not to be repeated before verbs preceded by the conjunction ni, neither, nor. Ex. II est tres malade ; il ne He is very ill ; he neither mange, ni ne boit, ni ne eats, drinks nor sleeps. dort;\ EXERCISE. Your sister does >not* resembles you 8 ; she is neither *<=>> ressemble informed, nor anxious for information ; she neither;}: reads instruit jaloux de sinstruire lit That is understood after the verb say, and must be translated into French by qve. f- Whenever a verb is either preceded or followed by a negative conjunc- tion, pronoun or adverb, the particle ne must be placed before the Terb ; and jf ^MJfer, nor, precede the verbs, the particle ne alone is put before the first, ^^both ni ne before every one of the others. be above note t. PRONOUN. 7T nor writes. We neither love nor esteem Miss Tur- ecrit aimons estimons ner; she (speaks ill) of every body; she pities dit du mal tout le monde (a pitie de) no one, and tramples under foot the most sacred duties personne foule aux pieds devoir, m. of religion.* Bonaparte neither loved nor esteemed aimoit estimoit any man, he despised 1 them 1 alb. aucun meprisoit les tout On the Pronouns je and moi, /; tu and toi, thou ; il and lui, he ; ils and eux, they. RULE 4. 1. /, thou, he and they are always to be trans- lated by je, tu, il and Us, when the verb to which they stand as subjects is expressed. They are, on the contrary, to be translated by moi, toi, lui and eux, whenever the verb is understood. Ex. JE sais qu'jL est riche, I know he is rich. Sers fidelement ton Dieu, et Serve thy God faithfully, TU seras heureux, and thou shalt be happy. Qui a lu cetlre lettre ? Lur ; Who has read this letter ? He. Quiparloit? Moi, Who was speaking? 7. Qui viendra avec vous? Who will come with you? Eux ; They. In the two first examples, / and thou are followed by the verbs of which they are the subjects; that is to say, by know and shall be ; on the contrary, in the three last, has read is understood after he ; was speaking, after I ; and will come, after ihey. 2. I, thou, he, they, must be translated by moi, toi, lui, eux, whenever they are followed by one of these pronouns, who, whom, or that, preceded or not by a preposition, and even in those sentences in which who, whom, or that, is understood. Ex. (Test MOI quiFaifait, It is I who have done it. Voudrois-tu Voffenser? Toi Wouldst thou offend him? dv'il comble de bienfaits! Thou whom he loads with benefits ! Qui I'a dit ?Cest moi, Who said it ? It was I. In the last example, who said it is understood after it was I. * Turn the last part of the sentence thus : the duties the most sacred, &c. T8 PRONOUN. 3. Whenever a verb has two or more pronouns as its subjects, or if one or two pronouns are accompanied by one or several nouns, and they all act as subjects to the verb, met, tot, lui and eux must be used instead ofje, tu, U and Us. Observation. If the pronouns used in the sentence as subjects to the verb are of different persons, or ifmoi or tot is joined to a noun, an additional pronoun must be placed before the verb, and that pronoun will be in the plural, in order to represent all the subjects of the verb. This additional pronoun must be the plural of that one in the sentence which is the nearest to the first person, and of course it shall be r.ous, if /is one of them. Ex. Toi et MOI, xous serons Thou and I shall always be toujours bans amis, good friends. Toi et tui, vocs serez Thou and he shall be pu- punis, nished. L'AMBASSADEUR et MOI, The Ambassador and I xous dinarnes ensemble dined together yester- hier, day. ELLE et xous, sous en She and toe were very fumes tresfdckft, sorry for it. . Mon FRERE et tm par- My brother and he set off tirent hier pour Parts,* yesterday for Paris. 4-. 3/o j is sometimes joined to je ; tot to tu ; lui to il ; and eux to Us in order to give more energy to the sen- tence, or to point out more forcibly an opposition ; and mot, toi, lui and eux may be placed either after or before the verb. In the sentences in which an opposition is to be marked, the double pronoun is only used in the second member. Ex. 11 dit aii'il est innocent ; et He says he is innocent ; as JE maiatiens MOI, or et to me, I maintain he is MOI JE maiatiens qu'tt guilty. est coupable, MOI a aid il fait tant de I to whom he does so much mal, JE chercke toutes let harm, I seek every op- occasions de le sercir, portunity to serve him. Vous riez, et EUX, ILS pleu- You laugh and they cry. wtnt, * In tfa* last example Ibere is DO additional pronoun, became my brother and he are both of the same person ; that i& to say, of the third, and go- vern the rcrb in the third person plural. PBONOUN. 79 Observation. Sometimes je does not appear in the sen- tence ; but it is understood. And this generally happens when the sentence is exclamative. Ex. 3/o z, irahir le meilieur des I, betray the best of amis! friends! Eire capable d*un tel crime, I, be guilty of such a moi ! crime ! That is to say, Moi JE VOUDRQIS trahir le meillfur des amis! Jupourrois etre capable, &c. EXERCISE. \Vho (was calling 3 ) me 1 ? It was not I. The boy appeloit me Ce ne-pas wants (to speak 2 ) to you 1 . 1, who am older than he, desire parler -&* age lui I go and speak 1 (to him 1 ) ! No, I will not go; alltr -= lui Non veux (let him come) himself. It is I who am to be quil vienne lui-meme dots <& rewarded instead of him. My father commanded the recompense au lieu, commandoit horse, and I commanded the foot. He could not cavalerie, f. iiifanlerie, f. put do 1 it 1 in one day, and I did it in the space of Jaire le en aifait dans espace, m. three hours. When the enemy appeared, my compa- heure, f. parut mes nions (ran away) and I remained alone. My bro- prirent la fuite restai seul thers, sisters and I* went yesterday to the concert. allames concert, m. You and your sister are engaged to dine to-morrow with a diner Mr. Donallon. How darest thou answer thy Comment oscs rcpondre a ton master in so 3 insolent* a 1 manner 1 ? thou whom he loves, de si insolent maniere, f. que aime thou for whom he takes so much pains. He and pour qui prend peine, f. they, not (being able) to agree, were obliged pourant s'accorder Jurent oblige ' See Rale 4, Part 3, and the Observation, page 78. SO PRONOUN. to part. It is I who wrote the letter; but it is de se separer ai tcrit lettre, f. he who carried 1 it 1 . It is 3 'neither I, nor thou, nor a portee la Ce ne-ni ni he, who have broken the windows ; but it is they who avons casse Jenclre, f. ce have* done 3 it 1 . ont foil le On the Personal Pronouns Objects of the Verb. These pronouns may be, as it has been observed before, either direct or indirect objects of the verb. They are direct objects of the verb when they are governed directly by the verb, and not with the assistance of a preposition either expressed or understood. Ex. Je vous estime, I esteem you. They are indirect objects of the verb, whenever they are governed indirectly by the verb ; that is to say, with the assistance of a preposition expressed or understood. Ex. Je LUI parlerai ; that is to I shall speak to him or to say,je parlerai A LUI, ou her. A ELLK; Je vous donne ce livre ; I give you this book ; that that is to say, je donne is to say, I give this book ce livre A vous ; TO you. Pronouns Objects of the Verb. Meor mot (direct orindirect), Me or to me. Te or toi (direct or indirect), Thee or to thee. Le (direct), Him or it. La (direct), Her or it. Ltd (indirect), To him, to her, to it.* Nous (direct or indirect), Us or to us. Vous (direct or indirect), You or to you. Les (direct), Them. Leur (indirect), To them.* * The preposition to being often understood in English before these pronouns, it may not be easy for the learner to know whether they are direct or indirect objects of the verb. The suppression of the preposition never takes place but when the verb governs both a direct object and an indirect one ; the former representing the thing spoken of, and the Jatter the pei son. When the object of Hie verb which represents the person comes PRONOUN. 61 Of the Place these Pronouns are to have in a Sentence "with respect to the Verb. RULE 5. In French these pronouns are generally to be placed before the verb ; and if the verb is in a compound tense, they are to precede the auxiliary verb. Ex. Je LA respecterai totijours, I shall always respect her. Je LUI ai envoye la lettre, I have sent him the letter. EXERCISE. Your brother bought yesterday a very good book, and acheta after having read it, he gave it to my sister. You speak apres avoir lu le donna ma of my cousin, do yous know 1 him 1 ? 1 see her and mon **=* connoissez vois speak to her (every day). Do you* know 1 your parle tons les jours savez vos lessons? We know them all.- I (will carry) them legon, f. savons lout menerai to my brothers, but I (will write) to them before. chez mes ecrirai atiparavant I find him more reasonable than his sister. Your trouve raisonnable sa dog (is thirsty) ; shall I* give 1 him water? * Men, m. a soif <&> donnerai They are fatigued, and I give them rest. fatigue donne repos, m. RULE 6. Whenever the verb commands in the second person singular, in the first and second persons plural, all these pronouns must be placed after the verb, and be united to it by a hyphen; and then moi and toi are always used instead of me and te. Ex. Diies-uoi, tell me. Parlons-Lui, let us speak- to him, or to her. Habillez-uoi, dress me. Recompensez-LES, reward them. immediately after the verb, the preposition to is suppressed. In such a case make an inversion, place the noun expressive of the thing next to the verb, then bring in the pronoun ; and the preposition that was in ellipsi* will necessarily appear, and show that this pronoun is indirect object to the verb. Ex. He gave her one guinea ; that is to say, he gave one guinea TO her: il LUI donna unc guinee. * Read attentively the note at the bottom of the preceding page. 82 PRONOUN. Observation. Whenever the verb forbids, instead of commanding, the pronouns must be placed before the verb, according to Rule 5. Ex. Ne ME parle pas, Do not speak to me. Ne i.'eiivoyez pas demain t Do not send it to-morrow. Ne ME ditespas, Do not tell me. - EXERCISE. Send them some apples ; but do not send them Envoyez & any plums. 1 give you these books ; but do not lend prune, f. donne ces pretez them to your brother. You may tell it to my votre pouvez dire man father; but do not tell it to my mother. Believe me, ^ dites ma Croijez go and speak to them ; but do not insult them. allez <* parler <* insultez Have you returned to her the handkerchief which she has rendu mouchoir, m. lent you ? Send it to-morrow, do not forget it.- prele demain oubliez Bring me some chocolate, but bring me no sugar.*. Apportez chocolat, m. I have seen her. cue RULE 7. When two verbs joined by either of these conjunctions, et, and; ou, or; command in the second person singular, or in the first or second person plural, the pronoun or pronouns, object or objects of the last verb, may very elegantly be placed before it. Ex. Ecrivez-vioi ; et ME faites Write to me; and let me savoir quand vous vien- know when you will drez ; come. Observation. The verbs penser a, stinger d, to think of; courir a, accourir a, to run to ; venir a, to come to ; prefe- rer a, to prefer to ; sejler a, to trust to ; and other reflec- tive verbs which govern two pronouns, the one directly, the other indirectly ; that is to say, with the assistance of the preposition a, to ; require that the pronoun governed by the preposition a should be placed, being preceded by * Read the second part of Rule 14, and the first example, page -26. ! PRONOUN. 83 that preposition, after the verb, though the other pro- noun, which is governed directly by the verb, be placed before it, according to Rule 5. Ex. Je mejte A vous, I trust to you. Nous pensons A vous, We think of you. Vous la prcjerez A MOI, You prefer her to me. EXERCISE. Bring me my hat, or send it to me by the carrier. moil par voiturier, m. Trust to him, but do not trust to them, and do not Fiez-vous believe them. Think of us and write to us as soon croyez Pensez a ecrivez x> aussitot as you can. Go and see her, and carry her que pourrez Allez <<=> voir portez these flowers. Send me my clock, or bring it toine ces Jleurs, f. horloge, f. me yourself. Do not give it to my sister, give it to me. voua-meme <* donnez Why do you prefer her to me, and give her all your <=>> prefirer affection?* A Table of the Pronouns Objects of the Verb. First Person Singular, masculine and feminine. The order to be given to these pro- nouns with respect to each other. Me or to me, me, mol,\ Me le, me la, me les, rn'i/, m'en, m'y en, le moi, la moi, les moi. First Person Plural, masculine and feminine. Us or to us, nous, jtfous le, nous la, nous Us, nous y, nous l'i/, nous les t/ y nous en, nous y en. Second Person Singular, masculine and feminine. Thee or to thee, te ortoi,\ Te le, tc la, te les, t'y, t'en, t'y en. * Repeat the pronoun you after the verbg-j're. + Afoiand toi are never used but after the verb: that is to sajr, when it commands, or when they arc preceded by a preno it. on. 84 PRONOUN. Second Person Plural, masculine and feminine. The order to -.be given to these pro- nouns with respect to each other. You or to you, vous, Vous le, vous la t vous les t vous y,' vous en, sous yen. Third Person Singular, masculine. Him, it, le, Le lui, la lui, les lui, le To him, to it, lui, leur, le moi, lui en, fy. Third Person Singular, feminine. Her, it, la, La lui, la leur, fa 'moi, le To her, to it, lui, lui, I'y, lui en. Third Person Plural, masculine and feminine. Them, les, Les en, les y, le leur, la To them, leur, leur, leur en, leur y en. The Order which the Pronouns Objects of the Verbs mutt keep ixith respect to each other. RULE 8. Whenever a verb governs two of these pro- nouns, if both are not of the third person, the pronoun, which is the indirect object of the verb, conies first, and the other after it, if they are to be placed before the ver&. Ex. ^ // ME LE prfre, He lends it to me. Je vous le promets, I promise it to you. But if they are to be placed after the verb, then they keep, in French, the same order they have in English. Ex. Donnez LE MOI, Give it to me. Montrez LES NOUS, Show them to us. EXERCISE. My brother (will send) them to you, or he (will bring) enverra apportera them to you himself. 1 asked yesterday a favour sollicitai grace, f. of our gracious king, and he granted it to rne. Have bon accorda jou bought the watch (of which) you spoke to me last 2 acfiete dont parldtes PRONOUN. 85 week 1 ? Yes, I have bought it. < Will you achetee Voulez show it to me ? Very willingly ; my daughter montrer volontiers (will go for it). Emma, my watch is in the next* ira la chercher dans voisin room 1 ; bring it to me. (Here it is), mother. Give La void ma mere it to me. RULE 9. If both pronouns are of the third person, the one that is the direct object of the verb comes first, and the indirect object comes after it, as in English, whether they are to be placed before or after the verb. Ex. Nous LE LEUR donnons, We give it to them. II LE LUI dira, He will tell it to her. Envoyez LE LUI, Send it to him or to her. Donnons LE LEUR, Let us give it to them. EXERCISE. How do you* know 1 that he likes my house?* Comment ? savez We showed it to him last* Monday 1 . (Here is) fimes voir dernier Lundi Void the book; carry it to them. My captain wishes to Mon capitaine desire ** sell his horse ; your father offered to buy it ; but the a offert de acheter captain refuses to sell it to him. If they ask a refuse vendre demandent favour, will 1 you 1 refuse 1 it to them ? Where is your * refuserez sister ? She is in the garden. Take this fan eventail, m. and carry it to her. Y and EN. These pronouns are used to represent persons, things and places, and follow the same rules as the above pro- nouns objects of the verbs. * Turn the sentence thus ; that my house pirates him ; that is to say, to him ywe ma maison lui plait. . 86 PRONOUN. Y is used with the signification of to him, to her, to it, to them, in kirn, in her, in it, in them, &c. ; there, thither, in or to that place. EN is used instead of some, any, of him, of her, of it, of them, from him, from her, from it, from them, from here, from there, &c. RULE 10. 1. According to the preceding rules Y and EN are to be placed before the verb, except when it com- mands in the second person singular, first and second per- sons plural. 2. When they are placed in the same sentence with any of the above pronouns objects of the verbs, they always come after them ; and when Y and EN meet in the same sentence, EN is always placed the last. Ex. // vous dira de belles paroles ; He will tell you fine words ; mais ne vous yjiez pas ; but do not trust to them. Nous vous y verrons ; We shall see you there. A-t-il des amis? Out, Hen a; Has he any friends? Yes, he has some. Vous avez de beaux fruits, You have fine fruit, give donnez-ni'en ; me some. Je vous y en enverrai; I will send you some thi- ther. Observations. 1. Moi being immediately followed by en, must be changed into m 1 , and instead of moi en, we say in'en. 2. We but very seldom make use of the pronoun Y in speaking of persons : we then have recourse to the per- sonal pronouns, as in this sentence, C'est un honnete homme ; attachez-vous d lid : he is an honest man ; attach yourself to him. However custom allows us to say, Je connois cet homme, je ne my jie pas ; I know that man, I do not trust to him, EXERCISE Upon the Pronoun Y. I never (will consent) to it ; and I 'neither will 4 ne-jamais consentirai ne-ni veux speak nor write to him.* Believe me, go and see parler ni ecrire Croyez allez >> * The pronoun to him must be repeated before write. PRONOUN. SI them, do not confide in it. We have forced them to o- Jiez vous aTons forces it. 1 (will carry) my brother thither. He menerai (will carry) them to you thither himself. = Did you porter a Avez think of what you had promised me? No, but I pense a ce que aviez promis Non (will think of it). It is a good book; we read excel- penserai y C'est on lit lent things (in it). Our orchards are very fruitful, chose, f. y Nos verger, m. fertile we see all sorts of fruits (in them). Since those on volt sorte fruit, m. y Puisque ces people have deceived you, do not trust them (any more). gens trompe ^>> vousjiez plus When a friend is dead, we 1 often 1 think-* (of 6 him) mort on souvent pense a lui no3 longer*. ne plus EXERCISE r v Upon the Pronoun EN. I have heard that your uncle is arrived, and I am oui dire arrive very glad of it. She spoke to him of it. Talk no aise parla Parlez ne more of it, for I will (not hear) of it (any more). plus car veux ne entendre purler plus 1 thank you (for it). Do you not see the remercie en ***> voyez beauty of it?* They are sorry for it. Since sontfuches Puisque you have no pears in your garden, I (will send) you ne-pas poire, f. enverrai some. They have stolen from us the greatest part ont vole & partie, f. of them. My brother has written a letter to your Mon ecrit sister, and shown me the two first lines of it. a montre ligne,?. * The sentence being interrogative, the pronoun you, which is subject of the verb to sec, must come after that verb. Say then not of it see you not, Arr- * 88 PRONOUN. Will you lend me some books ? With all my heart; Voulez prefer dcs De cceur, m. I will lend you some very pretty ones. Do you* preterai en de ires Joli o- think 1 that she has spoken to him of it ? If I had croyez ait parle avois money, I (would give) you some, but you know as well as donnerois mais savez I do how scarce it is now. Send me none. <* combien rare a present Envoyez ne en pas Have you any ? Do you remember it ?* Avez en u souvenez-vous en On the Pronouns le, la, les. Observation. These pronouns are often used in French to prevent the repetition of one or more words, and supply their place. In English they are either not expressed, or rendered by so. Ex. Est-elle belle? Oui, eUe i?est ; Is she handsome ? Yes, she is. // est riche, mais nous ne LK He is rich, but we are not sommespas; so. RULE 11. Whenever a noun substantive, not used adjectively, is either understood in English, or rendered by *o, it is to be expressed in French by one of these pronouns le, la t les, according to the gender and number of the substantive of which it takes the place. Le is for the masculine singular, la for the feminine singular, and les for the plural and for botli genders. Ex. Cette jeune demoiselle est- Is that young lady your elle votrejille? Oui, elle daughter ? Yes, she is. I'est ; Etes-vous la niece de man Are you my friend's niece? ami? Oui,je la suis; Yes, I am. EXERCISE. Are you my friend Mr. D.'s son ? Yes, I am. Are you the mother of that fine child ? No, I am not. Ladies, are you Mr. Brown's aunts ? Yes, we are. Mesdames * Sa.y,yourtel/of\t remember you 1 Vous EN, &c. PRONOUN. 89 (Is this) your book ? Yes it is.* (It is said) that Est-ce la c'est lui On (lit you are the son of my neighbour Mr. Peter, are you so ? voisin, m. Pierre Yes, Sir, I am. Are you the sister of Mrs. Monsieur Madame Adams ? Yes, I am. She is very amiable, and so are aimable you also. Are you the ladies whom my mother aussi dame que expects ? Yes, we are.- These young people are the attend Ces jeune gens scholars whom you have taught? Yes, Madam, ccolier enseignes (they are). (Is that) the horse which you bought ce sont-eux Est-ce la chcval, m. que from my brother? Yes, (it is). (Are these) the de c'est lui Sont-ce Id houses which you built ? Yes, they are. - que avez fait batir ce sont elles Are you the widow of Mr. B. ? Yes, I am. RULE 12. If so takes the place of an adjective or adjectives, of a substantive used adjectively, of a verb, ox of any part of a sentence ; or if an adjective or adjectives, a substantive used adjectively, a verb or any part of a sentence is completely understood in English, every one of them must be expressed in French by le, which remains invariable, as adjectives and verbs cannot communicate any gender or number, but only receive them. Ex. Vous m'avez true belle, You have thoughtmehand- maisje ne le suis pas ; some, but I am not. Etes-vous veuve ? Non, je Are you a widow ? No, I ne le suis pas ,-f ^ am not. * Io this sentence, and in all others like it, the verb etre being preceded by the pronoun ce, the noun, which is understood in English, must be ren- dered in French by hti, elle, eu.r or elles, according to (he gender and num- ber of the noun which they represent, and not by le, la, les. Ex. Is that your house ? Yes, it is. Est-ce la volre tnaison ? Oui, c'est elle. That is to say, it is it. Cefest, would not be French. t The substantive veuve being taken in this sentence in an indetermi- nate, in an indefinite sense, performs the part of an adjective. 90 PRONOUN. EXERCISE. My brothers were ill yesterday, and are so still Mes malade hier encore to-day.- 1 am satisfied with my fate, but my sister aujourd'hui content de sort, m. ma is not so with hers. I had heard that your sister was du sien avoir out dire que etoit married ; but my cousin tells me that she is not. Our marie mon dit Notre master rewards us when we deserve it. Children recompense meritons ought to apply to their studies (as much) as they doivent sappliquer leurs ttudes autant can. 1 thought your brother was diligent, but I peuvent croyois etoit mistook ; for he is not and 'never* will be 3 so 1 . me suis trompe ne-jamais sera , Are you a mother? Yes, I am. *.'; t * RULE 13. The pronouns objects of the verb, being governed by two or more verbs, must be repeated in French before every governing verb, though generally expressed but once in English. Ex. Votrefls vous aime et vous Your son loves and fears craint, you. Je LE plains et L' 'encourage, I pity and encourage him. EXERCISE. You have very fine roses in your garden ; when I shall avez serai be in- the country, pray send me some. May God d campagne de grace envoyez Que Dieu bless and reward her! said the prince. Our mas- benisse recompense dit ter rewards and punishes us when we deserve it. punit meritons Beauty* often 1 seduces and deceives us. A* Beaut e, f. souvent seduit trompe (wells-bred) child 1 , who knows the extent of his duties bien-ne connoit etendue ses devoir towards his parents, far from offending and vexing envers parent loin de qffenser de molester PRONOUN. 91 them, cherishes, loves, honours, respects and obeys cherit aime honore respecte obcit them.* leur. RULE 14. The following personal pronouns me, te, se, le, la, les et leur can never be used after a preposition. We cannot say, j'ctois avec LE, avec LA, avec LES, I was with him, with her, with them; or il a parle pour ME, pour TE, pour LEUR, ou pour LES, he has spoken for me, for thee, for them ; but we must use the personal pronouns mot, toi, soi, lui, elle, eux or dies, and say, j'etois avec LUI, avec ELLE, avec EUX; il a parle pourMOl, pour TOI, pour EUX, ou pour ELLES. EXERCISE. The nosegay, which I gathered in our garden, .is bouquet, m. que ai cueilli for her, and not for him. He was with me when pour non-pas etoit ne received a letter from them. If he do not come reg ut lettre, f. v=* vient soon, we (will set out) without him. Your sisters bientot partirons sans Vos have displeased me ; I am very angry with them. mecontente fache contre Your brothers have broken these windows ; I am sure of Vos casse ces stir it ; for I was behind them,- and John was with me. car derriere Jean Recapitulatory Exercise on the Personal Pronouns. I (shall send) you to-morrow the books which I have enverrai que ai promised you: if they please you, I advise you to promts plaisent conseille buy them: you (will find) them at Mr. Barry's. acheter trouverez chez Your eldest 3 brother 1 has assured us that Miss assure Mademoiselle * Them must be rendered in Frcncli by leur before obeys ; as we say in French obeir A quelyu'un, and not olcir qvelquun. 92 PRONOUN. Sophia W. is in London : write to her, and invite her Sophie ASHAMED TO BEG).- I love, esteem and respect them, *> * aime estime respecte and give them the relief that (lies in my power). les secours qui dependent de moi When a Roman general received the honours (of a) Qitand Romain general rcyevoit du triumph, a herald told him (now and then), triomphei m. heraut disoit de temps en tempt " Recollect that thou art mortal." Let us always* Souviens-ioi es mortel *&> <& submit 1 with resignation to the decrees of divine soumettons-nous decrets providence. Lend me thy book ; I (shall return) it to Prete ton rendrai * The rerb dire requires the noon or pronoun representing the person that is its object, to be preceded by the preposition a either expressed or understood ; therefore say, and shall tell to them .... PRONOUN. 93 thee to-niorrow ; do not refuse it me. Carry this & refuse Portez ce pencil to my sister, and present it to her politely. crayon, m. ma prcsente poliment Do you 2 know 1 Miss V. ? Yes, we were speaking H=S connoissez Oui portions (of her). You know Mr. D.; have you seen him en avez vu lately? Do not speak to me (of him). 1 can depuis pen '-&-> parlez en Jenepuis neither esteem nor respect him.- (Here are) apples ni estimer ni respecter Void and pears : take some, taste them ; you will find them prenez-en goutez trouverez excellent : (I shall buy others) to-morrow, and send J'en acheterai d'autres you some. The (ambitious man) torments and ambitieux tourmenter consumes himself to obtain places or honours ; and consumer se pour obtenir places ou when he has obtained them, he is not yet satisfied. quand obtenus encore satisfait Have you received any money ? Yes, I have. regu J'en ai regu Will you give me some fruit? With all my heart. Voulez donner du DC 1 shall never 2 consent 1 to that foolish ne-jamais consentirai ce sot scheme ; do not speak to me (any more) of it. Tell projet, m. <" plus Dites me candidly ; did you3 'not* think 3 he was a pru- Jranchement *<>> que cetoit dent 2 man 1 ? Yes, I did. Well, you see he is je le croyois He bien voyez qu'il not so. (To love) a 1 persons truly 1 is* Aimer personne, f. sincerement c'est to render that person all the services (in our rendre a cette personne service, m. qui dependent power). Are you not married, Madam? No, Sir, I am da nous mariee not." -You are (if I am not mistaken) the cousin of sije ne me trompe cousine, f. Mrs. Good ? Yes, I am. 1 have been told she is very On jn'a dit quelle > 94 PRONOUN. well informed. She is, Sir, and will be more so still ; for inslruit encore car she is 1 constantly* reading 1 instructive* books 1 . *? constamment lit instructif You and I are not quite so studious : I am not, most tout a foil si studieux ires certainly, but 1 know you are, and I am glad cerlaincment sais que vous fort aise of it. My son learnt last* year 1 all the fables of apprit foble, f. La Fontaine by heart, but he has already forgotten the par cceur deja oublie greatest part of them. (How 'many) children* Combien, adv. d'enfans has* your* sisters ? She has two,* one son and one a-t-elle daughter. When (will they send) your servant enverront-ils votre domestique to prison? He is (in it) already, and I assure you en prison y assure (I shall not go) and see him there. (Has he) any queje n'irai pas <=* voir A-t-il money ? No ; but I shall send him some. Your daugh- Votre ter wishes to see the British 2 Museum 1 ; I shall desire *=>> Eritannique Musee, m. accompany her there myself. Do you not accompagnerai ne desirez wish to read these books? take them, read them, vous pas * lire ces prenez lisez and give them afterwards to your father. Buy the donnez ensuite Achetez chocolate that man offered us yesterday, and send chocolat t m. que cet nffrit hier envoyez me half of it. Listen to me, my friends, and la moitie Ecoutez - mes amis believe me. God is a good father ; love him with all croyez aimez de your hearts (sing.) ; serve him faithfully ; trust to him ; seroez jidelement jtez-vous depend upon him; he will not abandon you; he comptez sur abandonnera * Say, the of them has fwo, ellten a, &c. PRONOUN. 95 will protect you ; watch over you ; and sooner or protcgera il veillera sur t&t ou later reward you for your love and tard il recompensera de confidence. Always depend on our divine master:* de votre conjiance comptez divin he never has forsaken you.f abandonne PART II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. These pronouns are called possessive, because they always denote possession or property. Some are always joined to the substantive, of which they denote the pos- session. Ex. Man litre, my book. Ma maison, my house. Others are never joined to any substantive, but relate to, and take the place of one, or more than one substan- tive expressed before, and of which they also point out the possession. Ex. Get enfant estplusjeune que This child is younger than LE MIEN, mine. La maison du Connie B. The house of the Earl B. louche a LA NOTRE, joins ours. The possessive pronouns which are always joined to a substantive are the following. They never take the article. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Both genders. Mon, Ma, Mes, my. Ton, Ta, Tes, thy. Son, Sa, Ses, his. Both genders. Singular. Plural. Notre, Nos, our. Votre, Vos, your. Leur, Leurs, their. * Adverbs arc generally to be placed in French after the verb ; and when they are negative, the particle ne is to precede the verb. When the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb must be placed immediately after the auxiliary verb. t See the end of the above note. 96 PRONOUN. Ex. Man pere, my father. Mesjreres, my brothers. Ma mere, my mother. Ton ami, thy friend. Ta maison, thy house. Tes domestiques, thy ser- vants, &c. Observation. The pronouns ma, ta and sa must be changed into man, ton and son before nouns beginning with a vowel or an h mute, though of the feminine gender. This substitution takes place in order to avoid the meeting of the two vowels, which would give to the articulation or them a most unpleasant harshness. Therefore instead of saying ma ame, my soul ; ta indifference, thy indifference ; sa opinion, his opinion ; sa humeur, his humour, &c. ; we must say, mon dme, ton indifference, son opinion, son hu- tneur, &c. RULE 1, PART 1. These pronouns always agree in gender and number with the nouns to which they are joined, and not, as in English, with the noun to which the object belongs. Ex. Son pere, her father. Sa mere, his mother. 2. They must be repeated before every substantive that follows them, though but once expressed in English. Ex. Mon frere, ma sceur, mes My brother, sister, cousins cousins et mes tantes ; and aunts. 3. Whenever we address any body by a noun expressive of relationship, or by the word friend or friends, those nouns must always be preceded by one of these pronouns, mon, ma, mes, according to the gender and number of the noun. Ex. Bonjour, MON pere; Good day, father. Etes vous la, MES sceurs? Are you there, sisters ? Observation. The words papa, father, and maman, mother, used by children, are excepted from this rule, as tnaman is never used with the pronoun ma, and papa is very seldom preceded by mon, except when they follow an adjective which qualifies them ; for the pronoun may then be expressed or not. Ex. Papa, regarde-moi ; Father, look at me. Mon cher papa, parle-moi, My dear father, speak to or chtr papa, parle-moi; me. Woman, embrasse-moi ; Mother, kiss me. Ma bonne maman, or bonne Good mother, do not cry. n^ ne pleure pas ; PRONOUN. 97 EXERCISE Upon the above Rule. Give me my dictionary and grammar. She had dictionnaire, m. grammaire, f. avoit lost her gloves and fan. Have you found your perdu gnnt cventail, m. Avez trouve pen ? His daughter is older than my son, but her plume, f. JHle t f- vieux fils, m. son (is not) so tall as my nephew. Her brother nest pas grand neveu says that he will not refuse you what you ask of dit refusera ce que demandez <* him. Dear father, pray, forgive me. My anibi- lui de grace ambi- tion is the only cause of my imprudence. 1 have tion, f. seul cause, f. imprudence, f. ai seen your father, mother, brothers and sisters. Her vu affection for me is false. Good night, cousin; I affection, f. pour faux soir, m. hope that you will soon come (to see) my country* - espere * bientot viendrez voir de campagne house 1 and gardens. Your horses and carriage cheval, m. carrosse, m, are very beautiful ; but the queen's horses and carriages beau are much more so. Mother, where is my sister ? beaucoup Maman Father, dear father, (how much) I love you ! Papa combien RULE 2. The article !e, la, or les, must be used instead of the possessive pronoun, before the object of the verb, whenever a personal pronoun, either subject or object of the verb, excludes the necessity of the possessive pronoun, and there is no ambiguity left in the sentence ; and if the words to have a pain in are used, a must be suppressed, and in changed into to the. Ex. J'ai mal aux yeux, I have a pain in my eyes. II se cassa le bras, - He broke his arm. That is to say, he broke the arm TO HIMSELF. F 98 PRONOUN. Can I have a pain in the eye of my neighbour, or of any body else ? And can any one break to himself the arm of another? Why then should we express the possessive pronoun ? Observation. All verbs conjugated with two pronouns of the same person, that is to say, reciprocal and reflected verbs, will never leave any ambiguity in the sentence, though the pronoun possessive be suppressed. If I say, Je me suis blesse a la main, I have hurt my hand ; that is to say, J have "wounded myself in the hand ; is it not evident that I speak of my own hand ? Exception. Custom authorizes us to say, Je are suis tenu tout le jour sur MES jambes, I have been all day on my legs; Je I'ai entendu de MES PROPRES OREILLES, I have heard it with my own ears; Je I'ai vu de MES PRO- PRES YEUX, I have seen it with my own eyes. EXERCISE. My mother has (a pain) in her head.' I have a pain a mal a tele, f. in my ear, and she has a pain in her teeth. When oreille, f. dent, f. I eat meat, I have always a pain in my stomach.- mange toujours estomac, m. The man who fell from the roof of our house, tomba toit, m. disjointed his wrist, - broke his right 2 leg 1 , se demit poignet, m. se cassa droit jambe, f. sprained his left 2 foot 1 , dislocated his se donna une entorse au gauche pied, m. se disloqua shoulders and hurt his head. When 1 run fast, I cpaule, f. se blessa cours vite (am afraid) of falling and breaking my arm crains de tomber de me casser bras, m or neck. cou, m. Observations. On the possessive pronouns of the thkd person, son, sa, ses, lenr and leurs, its and their. When we speak of persons or of things that are personi- fied, these possessive pronouns offer no difficulty : they are translated literally. But when they relate to things that are not personified, then there is a difficulty which 1 think PRONOUN, 99 rather serious, particularly for foreigners. I shall endea- vour to make it vanish, or at least to make it less. In order to succeed in this undertaking, let us say, J. That the noun being preceded by the possessive pro- noun, it maybe either subject or object of the verb. If it is subject of the verb, of it or of them may generally be sub- stituted for the possessive pronoun ; and in that case, it is to be translated by en. Ex. Paris est line belle ville ; la Paris is a fine city ; its situation EN est agrtable : situation is pleasant. That is to say, the situation OF IT. 2. If thenounprecededby the possessive pronoun is object of the verb, and the possession of it does not belong to the subject of the verb, of it or of them may still be substituted for the pronoun; therefore it must be translated by en, except the possessor be also object, or a complement of the object of the verb. Ex. L'Angleterre est une tres England is a very small petite ile ; cependant tout island ; however every le moncle EN admire les one admires its riches. richesses : That is to say, the riches of it. I have said except the POSSESSOR be also OBJECT or the COMPLEMENT OF THE OBJECT ofthe verb ; for in that case the possessive pronoun is translated literally by one of these pronouns son, sa, ses, leur or leurs. Ex. J'aime beaucoup la ville de I like London much ; Londres; cependant je however I should wish Toudrois la purger de ses to clear it of its thick epais brouillards, ou de fg s > r of some of its quelques-uns de ses epais thick fogs. orouillards : I consider de ses epais brouillards as the complement of the object quelques-uns. : \ 3. If the noun preceded by the possessive pronoun is object, and the possession of it belongs to the subject of the verb, the possessive pronoun must always be translated literally by the French corresponding pronoun son, sa, ses t leur or leurs. Ex. 100 PRONOUN. L'eglise de France a perdu The French church has SESplus precieuses prero- lost its most precious gatives, prerogatives. Having thus made the above observations on this diffi- culty, I shall give the following rule. RULE 3. Whenever to one of these possessive pro- nouns its or their followed by a noun expressive of a thing not personified, we can substitute either of it or of them, the possessive pronoun is to be translated by en t which must be placed before the verb. When we cannot change them into of it, or of them, they must be translated by one of these pronouns, son, sa, ses, its ; leur or leurs, their. Ex. Paris est une grande ville ; Paris is a great city; but mais les rues EN sont its streets are too nar- trop etroites : ette a en row (the streets OF IT) : consequence ses dcsagrt- it has therefore its in- mens. conveniences. It is impossible to substitute of it for the last its. EXERCISE. Windsor is a fine town ; I admire its situation, ville, f. admire situation, f. walks and streets.- This house is well situated, promenade, f. rue, f. Cette situe but its architecture is bad. His coach is beauti- architecture, f. carros&e, m. ful; (every body) admires its painting and orna- tout le monde, m. admire peinture, f. orne- ments. The shops of London are (very fine) ; went, f, boutique, f. snperbe foreigners especially see their riches and cleanliness etranger, m. sur-tout voient proprete with pleasure and astonishment. The walks of your etonnement, m. allee, f. (country-seat) are well kept ; I like their regularity. chateau, m. tenu aime regularite, f. Take from London the (greater part) of its narrowest 1 Enlevez b la plupart eiroit streets 1 , and you (will have) the finest city in the world. rue, f. aurez PRONOUN. 101 (I am very partial to) a country* life 1 ; tFaime beaucoup la (de la campagne) vie, f: its enjoyments are great in the spring, summer jouissance, f. dans printemps, m. etc, m. and autumn. The river Loire sometimes 8 automne, m. riviere, f. de Loire 'overflowss its banks. The Garonne is a most sort de lit, m sing. Garonne, f. tres beautiful river; its bed is very deep. Observations. 1. If a substantive is qualified by two adjectives expressing opposite qualities, these pronouns must be placed before each of them. Ex. Je lui ai montre mes bans I have shown him my good et mes mauvais habits ; coats and my bad ones ; mes habits bleus et mes my blue ones and my habits noirs ; black ones. If, on the contrary, those adjectives do not express opposite qualities, the pronouns are not to be repeated. Ex. Vos beaux et riches habits Your handsome and rich vous ont coute bien de coats have cost you I'argent, much money. This observation can offer no difficulty, as the same repetition takes place in English, whenever it must take place in French. 2. The letter o in noire and votre, when these pronouns are followed by a noun, never takes the circumflex accent ;. when they are not followed by a noun, it always takes it. Possessive Pronouns that are never joined to a Noun. The possessive pronouns that are never joined to a noun are the following : Masculine. Feminine. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Le mien, les miens; La mienne, les miennes, mine. Le tien, les tiens; La tienne, les tiennes, thine. Le sien, les sienst La sienne, les siennes, his or hers. Le notre, lesnotres; I M not re, lesnotres, ours. Le votre, les wires; La votre, les votres, yours. Le leur, les leurs; La leur, les leurs, theirs. 102 PRONOUN. In the pronouns le notre, le votre, la notre, la noire, les notres, les votres, the letter o is alwa3*s marked with the cir- cumflex accent ; but it never takes it when notre and notre are not preceded by the article. Ex. Void notre livre; voild le votre. These pronouns always relate to a noun expressed before. They take the place of it ; and agree with it in gender and number. They therefore might very properly be called possessive relative pronouns. Ex. Voild votre livre ; void LE There is your book ; here mien ; is mine. That is to say, here is MY BOOK. RULE 4. When any of these pronouns is used after the verb KTRE, to be, signifying to belong to, it must be ren- dered in French by the corresponding personal pronoun, which is to be preceded by the preposition a, except when the verb etre has the indefinite pronoun ce for its nomina- tive. Jn this case the personal pronoun must be trans- lated literally. Ex. Ce livre est A MOI, This book is mine; that is to say, belongs to me. A qui est ce livre ? Whose book is this ? // est A MOI, ou c'est LE It is mine. MIEN ; Observations. 1. Ce pointing out neither gender nor number, (for we say, c'est le mien, c'est la mienne, CE sont les miens, CE sont les miennes,) cannot be a proper repre- sentative of the noun that is understood ; we want, there- fore, in the last sentence, c'estle mien, the possessive adjec- tive pronoun le mien, to take the place of the noun livre, and to point out its gender and number. 2. These modes of speaking a of mine, a of thine, a of his, a of hers, a of ours, a of yours, a of theirs, (the dash takes the place of a substantive,) must be changed thus ; One of my, one of thy, one of his, &c. which are to be translated literally, putting the substantive in the plural. Ex. Un de mesamis, A friend of mine ; that is to say, one of my friends. Un de leurs parens, A relation of theirs ; that is to say, one of their relations. PRONOUN. 103 XERCISE. Your daughter is handsomer than mine, but mine has beau more wit than yours. Her house is more convenient esprit, m. commode than ours ; but yours is not so well situate as theirs. silue This hat is mine, and not yours; but this sword is non pas cette yours, and not his. 1 lost a book of mine ; and a ai perdu friend of yours found it." He sold me a knife; a trouve vendit couteau, m. but this knife was not his ; a friend of his had lent it to ctoit prfre him. Is that your brother's book? No: it is mine. Est-cela And these pens, whose are they ? They are ours. ces a qui Ce PART III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. These pronouns are called demonstrative ', because they point out in a precise manner the persons or things to which they are applied. They are, Singular. Masc. Fern. Ce, cet, Cette, this, that. Celui, he, that ; Celle, she, that. Celiii-ci, Celle-ci, this. Celui-ld, Celle-ld, that. Plural. Masc. Fern. Ces, Ces, these, those. Ceux, Celles, they, these, those. Ceux-ci, Celles-ci, these. Ceux-la, Celles-lii, those. Ce quiy ce que, what,* meaning that uuhichythethingiuhich i * I mnst observe, to do justice to the language, that ce qui and ce qite as well as what in English, contain two different pronouns ; the first, cc, that is demonstrative, and qui or yne which are relative. The next sentence will prove it to evidence. Ex. What you say is true; that is to say, that is J04 PRONOUN. ceci, this, meaning tl.is tiring; cela, that, meaning that thing. These pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns to which they relate, except ce qui, ce que ; ceci, cela, which always are of the masculine gender, and in the singular. RULE 1. Ce,cet, celte, ces, are always followed by the noun which they point out. Ex. CETTE MAISON est lien This house is very high. haute, Cet is never used but in the singular before nouns of the masculine gender beginning with a vowel or a silent h. Ex. Cet enfant est tres foible, This child is very weak. Cet homme est fort instruit, This man is well informed. EXERCISE. This book has made a great noise in the world. fait beaucoup dans This history of England, written by Hume, is generally ecrite en general much admired. That lady is my niece, and those two fort estimee children are her sons. Do you 1 see 1 that man, that *<=>> voyez woman, those young ladies and that child who (are qui se walking along) the river ? They are foreigners. promenent le long de) riviere, f. ctranger Take this apricot and this orange ; (I think they abricot, m. orange, f. Je les crois are) good. (No more) of these follies; I do not like plus sotlise =>> aimc them. tnie, or that tiling is true which, or which thing you say. Ce que rous ditex est vrai ; c'est a dire, celte chose est rraie, laifiielle on Inquelle chose votes ilitcs. Is it not evident that the first pronoun ce, THAT, points out the object to which we allude ; and that the second qu?, WHICH, relates to that object? Let us, therefore, conclude, that in English u-hat, and in French ce qni and ce yiic, contain two pronouns ; and that the first is demonstrative, and the second relative. The learner, by not losing sight of this observation, will soon conquer the difficulty which arise* from the translation of the corresponding English pronoun whut. PRONOUN. 105 KULE '2. The particles ci, here, and Ih, there (ci is an abbreviation of id), are often placed after the substantive following the pronoun ce, cette, this, that; ces, these, those; in order to point out with more precision the object or objects to which they are applied; or to express a prefer- ence. Celui-ci, celle-ci, this ; ceux-ci, celles-ci, these ; celui-la, celle-ld, that ; ceux-ld, cettes-ld, those, are to be used whenever this, that, these, those, instead of being followed by a substantive, take the place of it ; and two or more objects are either compared with, or opposed to, one another. Ci and Id are to be united to the noun or pro- noun by a hyphen, as above. Ex. Je n'aime point celtepornme-ci, I do not like this apple. Je mangerni cette poire-ld, I shall eat that pear. Je prendrai cette rose-ci ; je I shall take this rose ; I la prefere d celles-ld; prefer it to those. Observation. The following words, the former, the latter, referring to substantives mentioned in a preceding part of a sentence, are often rendered in French by celui- la, celle-ld, ceux-ld, celleS'/d, the former. Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, the latter : they agree in gender and number with the nouns to which they relate. Ex. Les Anglois et les Irlandois The English and the Irish se battirent frier pendant fought yesterday for* deux heures ; ceux-ldju- two hours ; the former rent vainqueurs; etceux- remained conquerors; ci Jurent contraints and the latter were forced d'abandonner le champ de to give up the field of bataille ; battle. The former; that is to say, those : the latter; that is to say, these. EXERCISE. Learn this lesson ; it is not so difficult as that. Apprenez difficile I prefer this way to that road. This room is chemin, m. route, f. much larger than that parlour. These candles are grand salon t m. chaudelle, f. * Wlienever/or means during, it must be rendered in French by pen- dant, and not by pour, t 5 106 PRONOUN. better than those. (There was) a great battle // y cut combat, TCI. between George and Stephen ; the former had a broken* entre Etiemie eut If cassc nose 1 , and the latter lost a tooth. In the nez, m. perdit dent, f. Dans engagements which took place between the Austrians bataille, f. qui eurent lieu Autrichien and the French, the former lost two thousand men, Franpois perdirent homme and the latter fifteen hundred. RULE 3. Whenever this, that, these, those, are used without pointing out any comparison or opposition, and they relate to a noun expressed before, they must be ren- dered in French by celui, celle, ceux, celles, without being followed by the particle ci, or la. Ex. La marine d'Angleterre et The English and French celle de France etoient navies were formerly the autrefois les plus redout- most formidable ones ables, (that is to say, the navy of England, and THAT of France). fai vu volrejardin et celui I have seen your garden de votre oncle, and your uncle's (that is to say, and that of your uncle). Observat ion .Whenever the demonstrative pronoun that is suppressed in English, and replaced by the sign of the possessive case, it must be expressed in French, as in the following example and in the preceding one. Renvoyez woi mes livres et Send me back my books CEUX de monfrere, and my brother's (that is to say, and THOSE of tny brother). EXERCISE. She brought her picture, and that of her husband. a apporte portrait, m. mari I have seen the king's palace, and that of the palais, m. PRONOUN. 10T queen. That gold 1 watch 1 which you showed d'or montre, f. avez montree me is not yours ; it is that of your brother. 1 have c'est lost my buckles and those of your cousin. Your perdu cousin, m. books and those of your little sister are torn. 1 know petit sont dechire connois this cap ; (it is) that of your mother. You have bonnet, m. c'est torn my gown and my sister's. 1 have found ray dechire robe, f. trouve hat and my brother's in the room. The thieves chambre, f. voleur, m. came by night into my father's house ; they entrerent de nuit opened my room and my mother's, and stole Jbrcerent la porte de volerent my watch and my sister's. You may, if you please, pouvez voulez take your grammar and your brother's ; but leave mine laissez and my friend's. Our oranges and Mr. Savage's orange, f. Sauvage are the best that you can find. on puisse trouver. RULE 4. He, she, they, him, her, them, having no refer- ence to any noun expressed before, and not being followed by any, but by one of these pronouns ivho, 'whom, of whom, to whom, &c. act as demonstrative pronouns, and must be translated by celui, celle, ceux, celles. Ex. CELUI QUI aime Dieu ai- HE WHO loves God will mera son prochain, et lui love his neighbour, and Jera du bien ; do him good (he, that is to say, that man, that person), EXERCISE. She who dines with us is my brother's wife. He dine jemme who supports idleness makes himself despicable. She encourage rend meprisabfe 108 PRONOUN. whom you saw at my brother's is not yet married. one vites chez encore marie You punish him who is not guilty. Men commonly* punissez cotipable ordinairement hate 1 him whom they fear. She whom you hdissent que craignent hate is my best friend. You have punished him who haissez amie, f. puni did not deserve it, and rewarded her who was guilty. <=>> meritoit recompense We ought to pray for them who persecute us. Of all devons ' qui persecutent virtues, that which most 1 distinguishes 1 a Christian is qui le plus distingue c'est charity. This book and that which* I lent you que ai prete are the two best. Those who seem to be happy qui paroissent etre are not always so. toujours RULE 4. Ce qui, ce que, what ; ceci, this ; cela, that. Whenever -what is used with the acceptation of that U)hich t that thing which, it must be rendered in French by ce qui or ce que ; by ce qui when which stands as subject to the fol- lowing verb ; and by ce que when which is object to that verb.f Ex. * The particle la is not to be added here to celui. The words which I lent yon point out sufficiently the book of whicb it is spoken. J* Having observed tbat the pronouns ce qui, ce que, offer a serious difficult) to learners, I think the following; observations may be useful, la order to know whether what, meaning that which, the thing which, is to be rendered by ce qui or by ce que, examine if the following verb has another word for its subject or not : if it has, render what by ce que ; if it has not , render it by ce qui. Ex. / wndertland what you fay : say is the verb which follows u-hat now look for its xuhject. The sulijcct of a verb is that which does the action expressed by the verb. In Urn sentence, the action is that of saying. Well, ask this question, who says ? What will be the answer? You. Then you is the subject of the verb. Therefore what must be translated by ce que ; and the translation of the above sen- tence will be, Je cotnpretids CE QUE rout titles. In this sentence, we knoiir what will happen toytiti, will happen is tbe verb t hat follows what ; to you is its indirect object : then which must be its subject. You will, therefore, translate the sentence thus : A'otw savo.'is CE QUI rout arrivtra. From these observations, it is easily perceived, that the pronoun what, meaning that which, the thing which, acts in a double capacity: in tbe first sen- tence, it stands as object of two verbs ; in the second, as object to the first, PRONOUN. 109 Je comprends CE QUE vous I understand ivhat you say Nous savons CE QUI vous We know what will happen arrivera, to you. When this, that, mean this thing, that thing, this must be rendered by ceci, and that by cela. Both are, as I said before, of the masculine gender. Ex. CECI est Ion ; CELA est This is good ; that is bad mauvais ; (that is to say, this thing is good; that thing is bad). EXERCISE. I know what has happened. - Do you* know 1 what I sais est arrive * savez think ? -This pleases me ; that frightens me. - May I pense plait fait peur Puis-je know what causes your grief, and sadness ? - savoir cause chagrin, m. tristesse, f. Your father has (a good deal) of friendship for you; for beaucoup car he *never4 refuses 3 you* what you ask of him. ne-jamais refuse demandez <=>> lui You seem much dejected ; tell me what vexes 2 you 1 . paroissez bien abattu dites-moi fdche Go and tell my father what has passed here ; Allez v dire d. s'est passe id and do not forget what you have seen, and what you have * oubliez heard. - Give me this, and take that. I prefer this to entendu prenez prefftre that. ami subject to the second. Let us examine both sentences. The 6rst sen- tence is this : I understand what you say. Who understands? I. Then / is subject of this verb. What do 1 understand ? That thing, or the thing. The next verb is say. Who says ? You. Then you is subject of the verb say. What do you say ? Which, which thing. Then which is object of tire verb. Therefore what acts as olject of understand) and as ^object of say. (Look at OBSERVATION 3, an the Personal Pronouns, for the explanation given oft he SUBJECT and OBJECT of the verbs, p. 7 1 .) The second sentence is this : We know what will happen to you. Who knows ? We. We is therefore subject of the verb. What do we know ? That thing, the thing: Then that thing, the thing, is object of the verb. What will hap- pen? Which, which thing. Then which i subject of will happen. There- fore in this sentence what acts as object of the verb know, and as subject to will happen, 110 PRONOUN. PART IV. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Relative pronouns are those which relate to nouns or pronouns either expressed or implied before. Of these, we have six, which are : Qui, who, which, or that. Que, whom, which, or that. Lequel, which. Dont, whose, of whom, or of which. Quo/, what (meaning the thing which'). Oil, a"ou,par oii, where, to which, from which, through which. QUI. Observations. 1. Qui belongs to both genders and numbers. 2. QMJ, not being preceded by any preposition, may relate to both persons and things. Ex. L'hommc QUI vovsparloit, The man who was speak- ing to you. Les arbres QUI croissent The trees which grow in dans ce pays, &c. that country, &c. 3. Qui preceded by a preposition is used only with rela- tion to persons or to things that are personified. Ex. Le roi, d qui vous devez The king, to whom you votrejbrtune, votre pros- owe your fortune, your perite, a droit a votre re- prosperity, has a right connoissance ; to your gratitude. Ne cessonsjamais de remer- Let us never fail to thank cier le del, a qui nous heaven, to which we are devons tout notre bon- indebted for our happi- ly r; ness. We could not say ; le cheval A QUI vous donnez a boire % the horse to which you give some drink ; la table sur QUI, &c. the table upon which, &c. : we must say, le cheval AUQUEL, &c. la table sur laquelle, &c. or it would be per- sonifying the table and the horse. 4. Whenever whom is preceded by the preposition of, and followed by a personal pronoun, it is much better to translate of whom by dont, than by de qui. Whose (when it is not interrogative) signifies of whom f and, therefore, follows the same rule, Ex. PRONOUN. Ill Le prince dont vous sollici- The prince whose protec- tez la protection, tion you solicit, or of inhom vou, &c. 5. Qui is often and elegantly used to take the place of celui qui, he who, meaning whoever. Ex. Qui sert lien son pays nitrite HE WHO serves his coun- d'etre heureux, try well deserves to be happy. QUE. 6. Que, whom, which, or that, always relates either to persons or things that are expressed ; and cannot be but direct object of the verb that governs it. Ex. Le Dieu Quzfadore est le The God whom I adore is Dieu des Chretiens, the God of Christians. Lebien QUE vomfaites aux The good which you do to autres, sera tot ou tard others, will sooner or recompense, later be rewarded. 7. Whom, ivhich and that are often suppressed in English ; they are understood ; but they must be expressed in French, and rendered by que. Ex. ISenfant QUE vous aimez The child you love so tant, much (that is to say, the child WHOM you love so much). RULE 1. Qui, when it is not preceded by a preposi- tion, may relate to persons and things ; when preceded by a preposition, it relates only to persons or to things per- sonified. Que may relate to persons or things ; it is always direct object of the verb ; and, when understood in English, it must be expressed in French. EXERCISE. I know a man who (is to go) and see the camp. connois doit aller ** camp, m. I have read the letter you have sent me.* The lu envoyce man who sold me these pens is very cunning. a vendu ruse * See Rule 5, on the pronouns objects of the verb, page 3 1. 1 12 PRONOUN. The lady of whom you speak is not handsome. Miss dame parlez D***, whom you love so much, is very ill. The aimez tant malade person to whom I wrote last* year 1 has personne, f. ecrivis passee annee, f. answered me this morning. He who was with you repondu matin, m. etoit related to me (every thing) that had passed. She a raconte tout ce s'etoit passe will not hear of the lady whom he (is going) to veut entendre parler va ** marry. Who was with you ? It was a gentleman whose epouser etoit avec Ce monsieur name I know not.* Men generally 1 love 1 him who nom, ra. sais generalement aiment flatters them. The man whom I sent to you was finite ai envoy e honest.- You speak of the lady whosef husband has parlez mari a been so ill. etc malade RULE 2. These pronouns gut and que, as well as dont t must be repeated in French before each verb of which they are either subjects or objects, though most commonly expressed in English only before the first verb. Ex. Le Dieu QUE nous aimons The God whom we love et QUE nous adorons, and worship. EXERCISE. The man who caresses and flatters us is the most dan- caresse plus gerous being t know. The man whose manners etre connoisse mceurs, pi. f. are innocent, and whose behaviour is blameless, is innocent conduite, f. irrtprochable the man whom we ought to cherish and honour. The devons *" cherir respecter \ * Turn the sentence thus ; OF WHOM / know Hot THE name. j- Say, or WHOM the husband. PRONOUN. US letters which you have written and shown to me* were tcrites monlre.es tolerably well written. The woman to whom I passablement Jemme, f. have lent so much money, and spoken so often, is dead. pretc parle mort Servants are men or women -f- whom we keep Domestiques ou nourrissons and reward for the services which they do us. recompensons rendent He who lives (as a) good Christian cannot but die vit en ne peut que mourir happy.J LEQUEL and DONT. Lequel, whom or which, relates to persons and thfngs ; and takes both genders and both numbers ; therefore it is subject to the following variations. Sing. mas. Plur. mas. Leguel, Lesquels, Which or whom. Duquel or Desquels or? O f which, of whom, or whose. dont, dont, J Auquel, Auxquels, To which, or to whom. Sing. fern. Plur. fern. Laquelle, Lesquelles, Which, or whom. De laquelle Desqudles | Ofwhich ofwhora , O r whose. or dont, or dont, j A laquelle, Anxquelles, To which, or to whem. This pronoun relates to both persons and things. It is the only one of the relative pronouns that takes the arti- cle, which article is so closely united to it, that they both form but one single word. In duquel, auquel, desquels, desquelles, auxquels and auxquelles, which are contractions of de le quel, a le quel, de les qucls, a les quels, a les quelles, the prepositions a and de being incorporated with the article, they form with the article and pronoun one single word. RULE 3. The pronouns lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- quelles, are never to be used either as subjects, or direct * Turn the sentence thus : and which you me have shown* f Say, are tome men, or some women, &c. 4.' See Obserration 5, page 111. 114 PRONOUN. objects of a verb, except in order to avoid obscurity. Qt or que must be used. Ex. Dieu qui a cree le del et la Godw&ohascreatedheaven terre, and earth. Les vertus QUE nous devons The virtues which we ought cherir, to love. The following sentences would be very improper : Dieu. LEQUEL a cree le ciel Les vertus LESQUELLES et la terre, nous devons cherir. But in the following example : C'est un effet de la bonte de It is an effect of the good- la divine Providence, ness of divine Provi- LEQUEL attire Fadmira- dence, which (effect) tion de tout le monde ; commands the admira- tion of all. If we said QUI attire, instead of LEQUEL attire, the pro- noun qui might be wrongly considered as relating to Providence, instead of relating to effet . EXERCISE. A Sovereign who fears God, who respects his laws, Le craint loix and causes* them 1 (to be) respected ; who, an enemy fait les ** respecter ^ to war, loves peace and maintains it in his dominions; de la guerre conserve etat who always* has 1 the happiness of his people at heart, son peuple d cceur should, if possible, be immortal. God, who has devroit s'il etoit possible immortel created us, who (every* day) grants* us 1 new benefits, cries tous les jours accorde bienfait,m. commands us to love him. O ye rich* men' ! make commande de faites a proper 1 use 1 (of those) riches which God has convenable usage, m. des granted you ; and recollect that the poor, whom you accordees souvenez-vous que despise, have a right to call upon you in their meprisez ^ droit de s'addresser a dans leurs distress. besoins. PRONOUN. 115 BULK 4-. Whenever the pronoun which, relating to irrational beings or inanimate objects, is preceded by a preposition, it must be translated by kquel, lesquels, laquelle, IcsqueUes.* Ex. Le cheval AUQ.VEL vousdon- The horse to lohich you nez a boire, give some drink. Lajenetre sur LAQUELLE The window upon tohich vous vous appuyez, you lean. EXERCISE. The trade to which you appty ad the commerce, m. vous vous appliquez profession to which you are devoted, are very honour* profession, f. devoue able. (Is that) the horse for which you gave a Est-ce Id avez donne hundred guineas? Lying is a vice for which Mensonge, m. young people ought to have the greatest horror. The gens doivent horreur, f. table upon which you write is broken. The reasons table, f. sur ecrivez cassee, p. p. raison, f. upon which you ground your system are satisfac- appuyez systeme, m. satisfai- tory. Charity, the exercise* (of which 1 ) is so often sant pratique, f. commanded in the Holy Scriptures, is one of the noblest rccommande ecriture virtues. DONT. Dont is of both genders and both numbers ; it takes the place of duqitel, desquels, de laquelle, desquelles, of whom, of which, whose ; and must come immediately after the substantive to which it relates. Ex. * Observation. Of which and whose (the latter being equivalent to of whom, of which) are exceptions to this rule, as they often may be trans- lated by dont. Indeed (font must be preferred to duqucl, de laquelle, &c. whether it relates to persons or things, whenever it is to be followed by the noun which in English is preceded by whose. Ex. La dame UONT vous admires la The lady whose beauty you admire. beaute, La Tamise DONT le lit esl, Sfc. The Thames whose bed is, &c. orthe Thames the bed of which is, &c. 116 PRONOUN. Les livres dont vous parlez, The books of which you speak. Les enfans, dont I' innocence Children, whose innocence est si precieuse, &c. is so precious, &c. QUOI, OU, D'OU, PAR OU. Quoi (relative pronoun), meaning the thing which, is always preceded by a preposition.* Ex. Dites moi a quoi vous Tell me of what you are pemez, thinking. Je ne sais de quoi vous avez I do not know of what you d vous plaindre, have to complain. Ou, d'ou, par ou, where, in which, to which, from which, through which, always relate to inanimate objects, with reference to a physical or moral locality. Ex. Voild la maison oit je na- There is the house in which (/ids, I was born. La nature est un It-ore elo- Mature is an eloquentbook, quent, oil nous trouvons in which we find the Les preuves les plus irre- most irrefragable proofs fragables de la toute- of the omnipotence of puissance de son auteur ; its author. EXERCISE On the above Pronouns DONT, QUOI, ou, D'OU and PAR ou. The child of which you are speaking is my youngest son. The sacred 1 religion, 1 the 8 fundamental 10 saint religion, f. jbndamentaux principles? (of which)s you* (so 6 boldly 7 ) attack,* principe avec taut d y audace attaquez has been sealed (by the) blood of its divine founder. a etc scellee du fondateur Do you* know 1 of what your* sisters complains 1 ? se plaint Ask him for what he calls you. Could you Demandez-lui pour appelle Pourriez * What is sometimes used to convey an exclamation ; and, as sucb, it mnstHje rendertd in French by tjuui ! Ex. What! you dare answer me thus ? Quoi! vous oses me repondre aiiisi ? PRONOUN. 117 tell me of what he is guilty ? (There is) nothing for dire coupable II n'ya f ttifotitren out fait Itur devoir ; and in the edition t 1 798, Ai fun ni I'autre itafait sou devoir : neither of them has dune his duty. PRONOUN. 129- Observations. 1. The above rule is applicable to sub- stantives united by the conjunction ni repeated as it is in the pronoun ni Inn ni I'autre, when they are subjects of a. verb. Ex. Ni la grandeur ni for ne Neither rank nor riches nous rendent heureux, make us happy. 2. Whenever ni I'un ni Vaulre is governed by a prepo- sition, that preposition is to be placed after each of the conjunctions ni, Ex. Je n'ai parle ni 'A I'un ni !A I have spoken to neither I'autre, of them ; that is to say r / have spoken neither TO the one nor TO the other* 3. This pronoun being negative, it requires the negation ne to be placed before the verb to which it stands either as subject or as object. See the above examples. EXERCISE. Both serve to the same purpose. My father and 1 servent menie usage, m. mother set off last* week 1 for the country ; but partirent campagne, f. (both of them) are already returned ; and both intend sont dija revenus se proposer to stay in town all the winter. 1 called on your de rester en hiver, m. ai passe chez cousins, and I heard that both had been married cousine, f. aiappris que s'ctoient ma rices a week. Honour your father and il y avoit une semaine, f. Respectez mother, and endeavour to please both. Do you* tdchez de plaire a ^^ speak 1 of my brother or sister. 1 speak of both parlez parle Apples and pears are good fruits ; but peaches are Pomme, f. poire, f. pcchcs, f. preferable to both.* 1 wrote to both ; but neither preferable ai ecrii * Observe that both apples and ptars are in the plural ; therefore you must translate to both as if there were to the ones and to the othert. G 5 ISO PRONOUN. of them answered my letters. Yesterday* I a repondu d expected 1 my two best friends ; but neither of jhem attendois came. 1 will give it to neither of them. Do you 2 vinrent donnerai prefer* currants to cherries ? I like neither of them.* groseille, f. cerise, f. aime Both religion and virtue are the bonds of civil 2 society 1 . lien, m. societt; f. Neither of them has done his duty.-j- Neither devoir, m. kindness nor rigour moved him. Neither of those douceur, f. rigueur, f. ebranlerent ces ladies is my mother. Have you heard from reg u des nouvelles de your nephew and your niece since their departure ? No, neveu niece depuis depart Non Sir : I correspond with neither of them.- Mr. Pitt spoke both correctly and elegantly. I both love and parloit esteem him. Quelque-que, whatever, however. RULE 8. Quelque-que. Quelque joined to a noun fol- lowed by que is declinable before a substantive, even when that substantive is immediately preceded by an adjective. Quelque agrees only in number with the substantive. It is indeclinable before an adjective, if that adjective is not immediately followed by the substantive it qualifies. It governs the verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Quelques fautes que vous Whatever faults you may ayezjaites, on votts par- have committed, they donnera ; will forgive you. Quelque elegamment qu'il However elegantly he may park, speak. Quelque grandes que soient However great your faults oosjautesy on vous par- may be, they will forgive donnera ; you. * See the note , page 129. f Say, neither of them have done their duty. PRONOUN. 1S1 Observation. The dash that separates quelque from que, marks'the place that is to be given to the substantive or adjective that follows whatever or however. EXERCISE. Whatever efforts people make to hide the truth, it , effort, m. on Jasse pour voiler (is discovered) sooner or later. Whatever services se decouvre tot tard service, m. you may have done to your country, it will reward ayez rendus patrie^ f. recompensera you for them. Whatever capacity a mau may te, f. puisse have, he ought not to boast. However equitable doit se vanter your offers be,* I do not believe they will be accepted. offre, f. soient "*" crois soient acceptees Thoughf kings be ever so powerful, they die soient """ "" puissant meurent (as well as) the meanest of their subjects. However comme vil sujet, m. learned those ladies may be, they sometimes 2 mistake 1 . savant quelquejbis se trompent However elegantly he may write, his style v ** ecrive style, m. not pleasing. agr cable Quel que, quelle que, whatever. RULE 9. Qitel que, quelle que, must be thus divided, when it is immediately followed by a verb or a personal pronoun ; and agree in gender and number with the noun to which it relates. It likewise requires the verb to be put in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Quelle que soit votre Jhutc, Whatever your fault may on vous pardonnera, be, they will forgiveyou. * This is the construction to be given to those sentences in which quelque, however, is followed by an adjective. Place quelque 6rst, then the adjf.ctive, then que, then the verb, and after it, its subject, &c. How- ever equitable that may be your offers, &c. f- Turn the sentence thus : However powerful that may be the kings, &c. 132 PRONOUN. EXERCISE. Whatever the enemy be* whose malice 3 you 1 ennemi, m. malice, f. dread 1 , you ought to rely on your inno- apprehendez devez vous reposer sur ' cence.- Laws condemn all criminals, whoever they condamnenl criminel may be. Whatever your intentions may be, I puissent intention, f. think that you (are in the wrong.) Whatever the crois avez tort reasons be which you (may allege), they are not raison, f. allcguiez sufficient. Whatever these books be, send them to me. sitffisant livre Whatever her fortune be, he says he never will marry fortune, f. dit epousera her.f Quoi que, quoi que ce sort qui or que, whatever ; qui que ce soit qui or que, whoever, whosoever, whomever, &c. . - Quoi que, quoi que ce soit qui or que, meaning "whatever thing that ; quclque chose qui or que, relate to things only; and are always of the masculine gender. Quoi que ce soit may be used with or without a negation. When used with a negation, it means nothing. Qui que ce soit qui or qne relates to persons only. It may be used, as the abov^i pronoun, with or without a negation. When it is used with a negation, it means nobody, not one person. RULE' 10. All these pronouns govern the following verb in the subjunctive mood ; and, whenever the second mem- ber of the sentence which contains qui que ce suit, begins with a verb upon which that pronoun acts in English as subject, the personal pronoun il must be put in French before that verb. Ex. * Turntliis sentence thus : 1l7,atei-er be the enemy of whom you dread the matiic, &c. and take it as a rule, in all sentences like this, lo place the rerb immediately after quefytc, whatever, and its subject immediately after, &c J- He strys THAT lie, &;. PRONOUN. 133 Qiioi que ce soil quil vous Whatever he may say to dise, ne le croyez pas, you do not believe him. Qui que ce soil qui me Whoever will deceive me, trompe, il sera puni; shall be punished. EXERCISE. Whatever may happen to you, never murmur against puisse arriver murmurez contre Divine Providence ; for whatever we may suffer, we car soiiffrions deserve it. Whatever I do, you always blame me. mtritons Jasse bldmez Who is the man who has stolen his money ? I know not ; Qui vole sais but whoever he (may be), and whatever he (may say), if (fuel qif il soit dise my father catch him, he shall be punished. In attrappe & whatever your master employs you, do it heartily. emploie Jaites de bon cceur Whatever you may say, your brothers shall be disiez seront punished, if they deserve it. Whoever despises the meritent meprise poor is himself despicable. Whoever speaks to you, lui-meme meprisable do not answer. Whoever (may presume to ask) you repondez ose Jaire any questions concerning that affair, pretend not quelque question, f. touchant Jeignez to know anything about it.* Of whomever you speak, de savoir rien parliez always speak the truth. To whomever you apply, dites vous vous adressiez every body (will tell) you the same thing. With tout le monde dira mvme chose, f. Avec whomever you be, always behave well. soyez comport ez-vous * Fiignez de n'en rien savoir. Itieii facing a negative pronoun, it takes the place of pas or point ; and so do all negative pronouns and negative adverbs. 134 PRONOUN. Observations upon Qui que ce sort, qui que cefut, quoi que ce soil, quoi que cefut, when attended by the negation ne. 1 . These expressions, when attended by the negation ne, are Englished different ways ; such as, nobody, no one, no man living, nobody "whatever ; nothing, nothing at all, nothing whatever. 2. Qui que ce soit, qui que ce Jut, are not to be used indiscriminately. I say the same of quoi que ce soit, quoi que cefut. Their different applications offer, when they are objects of the verb, a certain difficulty. If proper attention be paid to the following rule, the difficulty will vanish. RULE 11. Qui que ce soit and quoi que ce soit are to be used whenever the verb to which the pronoun is joined is either in the present, future, imperative, preterit indefinite or future past. When the verb is in any of the other tenses, qui que cefut and quoi que cefut must be used. Ex. Je ne vois qui que ce soit, I see nobody whatever. Je ne croirai qui que ce soit, I shall believe no man liv- ing. Neparlez mat de qui que ce Speak ill of nobody what- soit, ever. Je n'ai parle d qui que ce I have spoken to no one of soit de ce que vous me what you told me yes- dites hier, terday. Je n'aurai vu qui que ce I shall have seen nobody soit, quand vous revien- whatever when you re- drez ; turn. H ne ma parle de quoi que He has spoken to me of ce soit, nothing whatever. // nejit de mal a qui que ce He did no harm to any fut, body whatever. Je ne m'occupois de quoi I applied to nothing at all. que cefut, Sifetois roi usurpateur, je Were I a king and a ne mejierois a qui quece usurper, I should not Jut; trust to any man living. PRONOUN. 135 EXERCISE. I spoke to nobody whatever. Charity bids us ai parle ordonne (to speak ill) of nobody, and to do harm to no de mcdire personne de Jaire de mat man living. Never speak to any body whatever of parlez what I have told you. He acquainted nobody in the ai dit Jit part world with his projects. My brother was so honest, de projet, m. ctoit that he mistrusted nobody at all. Cromwell sc deficit de would trust his life to nobody whatever. My voulut confer vie, f. brother enjoys (so good a state of health), that jouit d'une si bonne "<>> ^ * sante, f. (for these) three years he (has never complained). depuis ne s'estjamais plaint He is so lazy that he applies to nothing whatever. s applique You may go and take a walk in the garden, pouvez aller "* vous promener dans but do not touch any thing whatever. Whoever "" touchez As soon as, Lorsque, 1 When DCS que, j Quand, J which never precede a preterpluperfect, unless the verb expresses a custom or habit. RULE 6. We must also use the preterite anterior defi- nite when the adverb bientot, soon, precedes or follows the verb was or had, to express an action or thing as done and accomplished. Ex. L'affhirefut ziE^TOTjaite, The business was soon over. J'eus BIEXTOT^/ de man- I had soon done eating. ger> Preterpluperfect. RULE 7- The preterpluperfect is used, as well as the above tense, to express an action past before another which is past also ; but with this difference, that the action expressed by this tense is the principal object of the per- son who speaks ; and the following sentence is subordinate to that expressed by the preterpluperfect. So that, though the time of that subordinate sentence be defined, that of the principal sentence is not the less indeterminate, because the former has no influence on the latter. As when we say, Nous AVIONS DINE lors- We had dined when he qu'il arriva, arrived, our principal object is to express the action of dining as past, without determining at what time, but only before an action which is past also, without, however, the latter being a consequence of the former ; for, we do not mean to say that he stayed, or waited, till we had dined, to arrive. ' Observation. This tense is used instead of the condi- tional past, when this conditional is preceded by si, if, expressing a condition. Ex. 160 VERB. Je sorfirois avec vous, si I would go with you, if j'avois dine, I had dined. Future Past, or Compound. The name of this tense seems at first to convey a con- tradiction : what is meant by it is, not that an action can be future and past at the same time, but only that the action, which is to come, will be past when another action will happen, or even before it will happen. Ex. Je SERA i PARTI quandvous I shall be gone when you reviendrez, come back. Qtiand vous AUREZ FINI When you have done your vos affaires, vous viendrez business, you shall come me trouver, to me. In the first sentence, / shall be gone, which is a future" time with respect to the present we speak in, will be a past time with respect to the time when you will or pur- pose to arrive, &c. Conditional Past. The conditional past expresses that a thing would have been done in a time past, if the condition on which it depended had been fulfilled. Ex. Je vous AUROIS ECRIT il y I would have written to a un mois, si j'eusse su you a month ago, if I votre adresse; had known your direc- tion. TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONJUNCTIVE MOOD. The subjunctive expresses no affirmation, but generally depends upon a verb that does express it. The present and the future are expressed in the sub- junctive by the same tense ; that is to say, by the present. The meaning alone of the sentence distinguishes them. Ex. Vous avez Pair malade, You look ill, though jiou quoique vous vous FOR- are well. TIEZ bien; Je suis desole de vous voir si I am sorry to see you so. indispose; Adieu! je much indisposed; adieu! desire que vous vous POK- I wish you better. * VERB. 161 In the first example, the verb portiez, which is in the present of the subjunctive, expresses the present state of the person ; in the second sentence, the same verb, which is in the same tense, expresses the future. RULE 8. 1. When the verb which precedes the con- junction is in the present or future of the indicative, and when we do not mean ta express by the second verb an action past, we must put this last verb in the present of the subjunctive mood. Ex. Je souhaite que vous KEUS- I wish you may succeed in SISSIEZ dans votre entre- your undertaking. prise, J'attendrai qiiil VIENNE, I will wait till he come. 2. When the verb which is before the conjunction is in some of the past tenses, or in the conditional, and we wish not to designate by the second verb a past time more distant than the first verb's, we must put this second verb in the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. Alexandre ordonna que tons Alexander ordered that all ses sujets /'ADOHASSENT his subjects should wor- comme un dieu, ship him as a god. Je voulois que vous ECRI- I wished you to write to VISSIEZ a votre sceur, your sister. II souhaiteroit que vous He would wish you to take PRISSIEZ des mesuresplus more becoming raea- convenables, sures. 3. The preterite of the subjunctive mood is used when we speak of an action past and accomplished, with regard to the tense of the verb which precedes the conjunction; and this tense is generally the present, preterite, indefinite or future of the indicative. Ex. Je doute quaucun philo- I doubt whether any phi- sophe AIT jamais bien losopher has ever well COXNU lunion de I'ame understood the union of avec le corps, the soul with the body. // a Jallu que ,/AIE CON- I was obliged to consult all SULTE tous les n/cdecins, the physicians. Je me garderai bien d'y I shall by no means go thi- alter que je M'AIE RECU ther till I have received qudque assurance d'etre some assurances of being bien accueilli, welcome. 163 VERB. 4. After the imperfect, preterite, preterpluperfectof Che indicative, or one of the two conditionals, we use the preter* pluperfect of the subjunctive mood; likewise after the con* junction if when it precedes a compound tense. Ex. J'ignorois quevouszussiEZ I did not know you had EMBRASSE cette profes- embraced that profession. sion-la* Vous n'aviez pas cru queje You did not believe I FUSSE ARRIVE avant should havearrivedbefore vous, you. Nous aurions eteflches qne We should have been sorry vous vous FUSSIEZ if you had applied to any ADRESSE a d'autres qu'd others but us. nous, J*aurois agide la mcmema- I should have acted in the niere, si feusse etc a vo- same manner, had I been ire place; in your place. Numbers and Persons. A tense contains both numbers ; the singular and the plural. That there are three persons has already been observed under the personal pronouns ; we have only to remark that some of these three persons are always joined to the verb as its subject ; therefore the verb must agree with that subject in number and person. Ex. Jefais, I do. Nous faisons, we do. Tujais, thou dost. Vousjaites, you or ye do. Ilfoit, he does. Us font, they do. The pronoun vous, you, denotes the second person singular and plural, with this difference, that when we speak to one person only, the attribute, or qualifying noun, must be put in the singular. Ex. Vous etes marie, and not You are married. maries, Vous etiez general de Var- You were general of the mee, and notgenerau.r, army. But we must say maries and gtneraujc, if we speak to more than one. When the verb has two or more nouns or pronouns as its subjects, it must be put in the plural, though all these subjects be in the singular ; because two or more nouns in VERB. 163 the singular are equivalent to a plural, with regard to verbs as well as to adjectives. Ex. Monfrere et ma sceur SONT My brother and sister are partis, gone. This has already been mentioned on the adjectives. RULE 9. If the verb has for its subjects one pronoun ofthejirst person and one of the second, the pronoun nous must be added to them, and the verb is to be put in the Jirst person plural ; and if one *of the subjects is of the second person, and the other of the third, the pronoun vous must follow them ; and the verb is to be put in the second person plural. Ex. Vousetmoi, NOUS PARTI- You and I shall set off to- RONS demain ; morrow. Vous et votre frere, vous You and your brother have me /'AVEZ promts ; promised it to me. Observations. 1. The person spoken to is always to come first, the person spoken of comes next, and the per- son who speaks is placed the last. 2. In sentences in which the above pronouns, instead of being subjects of the following verb, are governed by c'est, c'etoit, ce sera, &c. and followed by the pronoun gut, this pronoun takes the place of the additional pronouns mentioned in the above rule ; yet the verb is still put in the person which would be commanded by the additional pronoun. Ex. C'est vous et moi qui I'avons It is you and I who have fait, done it. Ce nest ni vous ni ma sceur It is neither you nor my qui I'avez dit, sister who said it. OF THE NUMBER OF CONJUGATIONS. There are four conjugations in the French language. They are distinguished by the termination of the present of the infinitive. The first ends in er, as donn-er, to give. The second in ir, as pun-zr, to punish. The third in evoir, as rec-evoir, to receive. The fourth in re, as rend-rc, to render. 164 VERB. The learner should be well acquainted with the manner of conjugating the two following verbs, on account of the frequency of their occurrence in sentences, and in forming the compound tenses of all other verbs. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB avoir, tO have. Infinitive Mood. Present. Preterite. Avoir, to have. Avoir eu, to have had. Participle active. Participle past. Ayant, having. Ayant eu, having had. Participle past. ]'.!<, had. Indicative Mood. Present, Singular. Plural. J'ai, I have. Nous avons, we have. Tu as, thou hast. Vous avez, you or ye have. // a, he has. Us oat, \ ., u Elk a, she has. EUes ont, / the y have ' Imperfect, Sing. Plural. J'avois, I had. Nous avions, we had. Tu avois, thou hadst. Vous aviez, you had. Ilavoit, he had. Ils avoient, they had. Pret. defin. Sing. Plural. feus, 1 had. Nous eumes, we had. Tu eus, thou hadst. Vous eutes, you had. // eul t he had. Ils eurent, they had. Future, Singular. J'aurai, I shall or will have. Tu auras, thou wilt, $-c. have. II aura, he will, %c. have. Plural. Nous aurons, we shall, <^rc. have. Vous aurez, you will, %c. have. Ils auront, they will, $c. have. Conditional Present, Singular. J'aurois, I should or would have. ^ Tu aurois, thou wouldst, $c. have. II aitroit, he M'ould, $c, have. VERB. IG5 Plural. Nous aurions, we should, Sfc. have. Vous aurieZj you would, Sfc. have. 7/5 auroient, they would, Sfc. have. Compound Tenses. They are formed by adding the participle past eu t had, to the preceding. Ex. Pret. Indefinite. J'ai en, I have had, fyc. Pret. ant. def. .feus ei(, fyc. I had had, SfC. Preterpluperfect. J'avois eu, Sfc. I had had, fyc. Future past. J'aurai cu, fyc. I will, or shall have had, Sfc. Cond. past. Taitrois ett^ fyc. I would, or should have had, Sfc. Imperative Mood. Present, Singular. Aie, have thou. Qu'il ait, let him have. Qu'elle ait, let her have. Plural. Ayons, let us have. Ayez, have ye, or you, Qu'ils or quelles aient, let them have. Subjunctive Mood. Present, Singular. Quefaie, that I have, or may have. t u aies, thou mayst have. Quit ait, he may have. Plural. Que nous ayons, that we may have. vous ayez, you may have. Qu'ils aient, they may have. 166 VERB. Imperfect, Singular. Quejcusse, that I might have, or had. tu fusses, theu mightst have. Qu'il cut, he might have. Plural. Que nous eussions, that we might have. vous eussiez, you might have. Qu'ils (itssent, they might have. Compound Tenses. They are formed by adding the participle past eu t had, to the preceding. Ex. Preterite. Quej'aie eu t S$c. that I may have had. Preterpluperfect. Quefeusse eu y fyc. that I might have had. The learner ought to conjugate the preceding verb with a negation. Ex. Je n'ai pas, I have not ; Nous n'avons pas, We have not ; always placing ne before the verb, and pas after it. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB etre, to be. Infinitive Mood. Present. Preterite. tre, to be. Avoir etc, to have been. Participle active. Participle past. Etant, being. Ayant cte, having been. Participle past. Etc, been. Indicative Mood. Present, Singular. Plural. Je suis, I am. Nous somntes, we are. * TU es, thou art. Vous t-tes, you are. // est, he is. Us sont, they are. VERB. 16* Imperfect, Sing. Plural. J'etois, 1 was. Nous tlions, we were. Tu etois, thou wast. Vous etiez, you were. Iletoit, he was. //* f-toient, they were. Pret. defin. Sing. Plural. Jefus, I was. Nous fumes, we were. Tufus, thou wast. VousJ&tes, you were. II Jiit, he was. Iltjurent, they were. Future, Singular. Je serai, I shall or will be. TM seras, thou wilt, 8fc. be. // sera, he will, <$T. be. Plural. Nous serons, we shall, <$-c. be. FOMS ^ere^r, you will, Sfc. be. 7^j seront, they will, tioaed to me ? > VERB. 185 Non,je ne les ai pas encore No, I have not yet; bought achetes, them, understood. Ne devroient-ils pas faire Ought they not to let their savoir a leurptre que leur father know that their Jrere est dans la dttresse? brother is in distress ? Certainewent, Us devroient Certainly, they ought; to le luijaire savoir ; let him know it, under* stood. EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. Indicative Mood. PRES. I play sometimes,- but I ne- jou-er, v. quelquefois, adv. mats, c. ne ja+ ver win. How much does your brother mais t adv. gagn-er, v. Combien, adv. ** give* for his board? We do not command; donn-ef, v. pension, f. command-er, _v. we entreat. You always borrow; you prier, v. toujours, adv. emprunt-er, v. never lend. You are always speakingf when pret-er, v. quand, adv. I write. Why do you not grant tcrisy v. Pourquoi, adv. **> accord-er, v. him that favour ? What doj they ask you ? grace, f. demand-er, v. IMP. I was desiring them to sing a song. She pri-er, v. de chant-er, v. chanson, f. was not speaking to you. Were we not joking ? badin-er, v. Were you not scolding them when I came ? Yes, I grond-cr, v. vins, v. was. They were eating fish. mang-er, v. poi.ison y m. PRET. I spoke to them (a long while). Did not long-terns, adv. the king forgive them ? No, he did not. We roi, m. pardonn-er, v. leur wept for joy when we found her Why pleur-er, v. dejoie, f. trouv-er t v. * See Rule JO, page 173. f See note*, page 1 80. See Observation 7, on do and did, Part 1, page 179. 186 VERB. did you not play on Friday last? They *" Vendredi, m. dernier, adj. fastened the man to a tree, and then robbed li-er, v. eubre, m. ensuite, adv. vol-er,v* him of his watch, gold ring, and all the money he lui ***" montre, f. baoue, f. had in his pocket. The 2 soldierss first 1 pillaged* poche, f. d'abord pill-er, v. the town, and then slaughtered without pity the ensuite egorg-er, v. pitie, f. (old men) women and children. vieillard, m. Fux. I will buy a watch the first time I go ac/iet-er, v. f l> ^> f- irai, v. to London. Will not your father send you to envoyer, v. school this winter ? What shall we give him ? &cole y f. -hiver, m. Will you not take the children to the play? men-er, v. eJant^ m. comedie, f. They will empty the bottle if you do not take it vid-er, v. bouteille t . emport-er t v. away. 0> COND. PRES. I would lend them money if they pret-er, v. were not so idle. Would not your mother paresseux, adj. despise such 1 a 1 conduct? Why should we mepris-er, v. tel, adj. conduite, f. send them thither? 1 am sure you would marry sur, adj. epous-er, v. her, if she were rich. Would they not pay us, riche, adj. paye r t v if they had money ? Imperative Mood. Bridle my horse, and bring him to me.- Erider, v. cheval, m. amen-er, v. Give a chair to that lady. Let her not (come up,) chaise, f. dame,?. mont-er,v. for I unengaged. Let us carry those peaches to occupe, p. p. peclift f VERB. 1ST Mrs. D. Do not neglect your affairs. neglig-er, v. affaire, f. I promise that I will not. Let them hunt. promets, v. chasser, v. Subjunctive Mood. PRES. That I may help you. Though* he aid-er,v. Quoique, c. do not approve of my plan. Provided* we approuv-er, v. **" plan, m. Pourvu que, C. avoid their company. That you may try evii-er, v. compagnie, f. eprouv-er t v. that gun. That they may not command. IMP. That I might change my opinion. That chang-er, v. opinion, f. he might eat an apple. That we might not fall pomme, f. tomb-er t T. into their hands. That you might encourage dans, p. main, f. encourag-er, v. the industrious. That they might exercise their industrieux, adj. exerc-er, v. talents. talent, m. Promiscuous Exercises on the Compound Tenses. I have forgotten to bring your penknife. He has oubli-er, v. de can if, m. not yet spoken to us. Has she brought her work encore, adv. ** with her? Yes, she has Have we not gained our gagn-er, v. cause ? Why have you not yet begun your commenc-er, v. exercise ? You had taken the mustard away. theme, m. moutarde, f. You would have judged more favourably of juger, v. fovorablement, adv. him. Stay here till* we have dined. Rester, v. id, adv. jusqud ce que, c. din-er, v. * These conjunctions require the subjunctive mood, as will be seen here- after'. 188 VERB. " ' -Could we not have assisted that family? They aid-er, v. Jamille, f. have broken all the panes of glass in their casser, v. carrcau, m. vitre, f. de, p. windows, because they had not illuminated Jenetre, f. parceque, c. illumin-er, v. as it had been ordered. 1 shall have dined comme t adv. ordonn-er, v. soon. We would have sent them to prison, lientot, adv. envoy-er, v. en prison, f. if they had resisted."" That we may have denied the resist-er, v. ni-er, v. fact. Had you not imitated their manners ? They fait t m. imil-er, v. manure, f. had not executed his commands. Had I not execut-er t v. cnmmandement, m. lighted the fire? They would have taken him to allum-er, v. Jeu, m. mene the concert, if I had not hindered them (from it). empech-er, v. We have accepted of his offers. Have you ? accept-er, v. ^ offre, f. SECOND CONJUGATION. Infinitive Mood. Present. Pun-z>, to punish. Participle active. issant, punishing. Participle past. i, m. ie, f. punished. ., Compound Tenses. Preterite. Avoir puni, to have punished. Part. past. Ayantpuni, having punished. Indicative Mood. Present, Singular. Je pun-Av, I punish, I do punish, or I am punishing. Tu is. 11 it. Plural. Nous issons, we punish, &c. Vou& issez. Us issent. VERB. 189 Imperfect, Singular. Je pun-zssozs, I did punish, or I was punishing, &c. Tu issois. II issoit. Plural. Nous issions, we did punish, &c. Vous issiez. Us issoient. Preterite, Singular. Je pun-zs, I punished, or I did punish. T^l is. II it. Plural. Nous imes, we punished, &c. Vous ttes. Us irent. Future, Singular. Je pun-zra/, I shall or will punish. Tu iras. II ira. Plural. Nous irons, we shall. or will punish. Vous irez. Us iront. Conditional Present, Singular. Je pun-zroz's, I should or would punish. Tu irois. II iroit. Plural. Nous irionsj we should, &c. punish. Vous iriez. Us iroient. Compound Tenses. Pret. indefin. J'ai puni, I have punished. Pret. ant. def. J'eus puni, I had punished. Preterpluperf. J'avois puni, I had punished. Future past. J'aurai puni, I shall, &c. have punished. Cond. past. J'aurois puni, 1 should, &c. have pu- nished. 190 VERB. Imperative Mood. Present, Singular. Pun-z's, punish thou. Quil isse, let him punish. Plural. mows, let us punish. issez, punish ye. Qu'ils issent, let them punish. Subjunctive Mood. Present, Singular. Que je pun-isse, that I may punish, or I punish. tit ' isses- il isse- Plural. nous isxions, that we may punish. vous issiez. Us issent. Imperfect, Singular. Queje p\in-isse, that I might punish, or I punished. in isses. il it. Plural. nous isstonSy that we might punish. vous issiez. ils issent. Compound Tenses. Preterite. Quej'aie puni, that 1 may have punished. Preterplu. Quej'eusse puni y that 1 might have punished. After the same manner are conjugated about two hun- dred regular verbs ; the following are excepted, as being irregular : Acquerir, to acquire. Faillir, to fail. Assaillir, to assault. fair, to flee, to avoid. Bouillir, to boil. Mentir, to lie. Courir, to run. Moiirir, to die. Cueillir, to gather. Off^rir, to offer. Dormir, to sleep. Ouvrir, to open. VERB. 191 Partir, to set out. Sottffrir, to suffer. Se repentir, to repent. Tenir, to hold. Sentir, to smell. Venir, to come. Servir, to serve. Vetir, to clothe. Sortir, to go out. And their compounds. EXERCISES UPON THIS CONJUGATION. Indicative Mood. PRES, I always finish my work before tovjours, adv. fin-ir, v. ouvrage, m. avant, p the others. Your friend does not succeed in ami, m. reuss-ir, v. dans, p. his undertaking. Do we not furnish arms entreprise, f. journ-ir, v.'arme, f. against ourselves? Why do you hate him? contre, p. nous-mcmes ^ ha-ir, r. They cure the diseases of the body and not guer-ir, v. maladie, f. corps, m. those of the mind. IMP. I was building my house when you bat'ir, v. maison, f. quand, adv. demolished yours. Was he not enjoying a good demol-ir, v. jou-ir de, v. estate ? We hated him, because he did not act . bien, m. pttrceque, c. fg-ir> v kindly towards us. On what were you honnctement, adv. envers, p. Sur, p. reflecting ? The mountains were resounding with reflech-ir,v. muntagne,f. retent-ir, v. de their cries. cri, m. PRET. I warranted them very good. Did not garant-ir, v. your master accomplish his promise ? We (leaped ncconipl-ir, v. promesse, f. franchir, V. over) the ditch, and seized the guilty. Why fosxe, m. sais-ir, v. cuupable, adj. did you not applaud that pretty actress ? applaud-ir, v. <2 jWi, adj. actrice, f. 192 VERB. I did* with all my might. Did not the soldiers cfe P- forces, f. soldat, m. obey the commands of their general ? obe-ir, v. au commandement, m. PUT. When shall 1 banish all these thoughts bann-ir t v. tout, adj. penste, f. from my mind ? This plant will soon blossom if plante, f. Jleur-ir, v. you water it often. We shall warn your arroser, v. souvent, adv. avert-ir, v. relations of it.- Shall you not enjoy, as parent, m. jou-ir, de comme, adv. we do, the pure* pleasures 1 of the country? Her pur, adj. children will bless her for it. ben-ir, v. COND. PRES. I would choose this cloth, if I chois-ir, v. drop, m. were in your place. Would he not blush if he acted roug-ir, v. so ? We would not punish them, if they were dili- ainsi, adv. gent. Would you not act with less severity ? avec, p. moins, adv. serentc, f. They would furnish us with arms and troops, if we *"> troupe, f. wanted any. avoir besoin, v. en. Imperative Mood. Do.not fill the glasses. Let him enjoy the rempl-ir, v. verre, m. du fruit of his labours. Well ! let him,f I do not travail, m. Eh bien, int. hinder him from it. Let us reflect on what we empecher, v. have to do. Let them define the question. a Jaire t v. defin-ir t v. * I did applaud (to) her, Je Itti apphntJis, &c. % + Let lain enjoy them, qu'il en jouisft, &c. t . VERB. 19$ Subjunctive Mood. PRES. That I may not perish. 1 wish he per-ir, v. souliaiter, v. may succeed. That we may not (bear hardships). reuss-ir, v, pat-ir t v. That you may not hate us.- Provided they do not (grow tall). grand-ir, v. IMP. That I might refresh my memory. rafraich-ir, v. ntemoire, f. That she might not roast the meat. That we might rot-ir, v. (become younger). That you might punish the idle. rajeun-ir, v. That they might not (grow old). vieill-ir, v. Compound Tenses. I have filled my cellar with good wine. Has rempl-ir, v. cave, f. de he not leaped over the ditch? We had finished our work.* They would have seized him. We should ouvrage, m. have perished without any assistance. When shall I sans, p. secours, m. have built my house ? 1 have (very much) but-ir, v. bcaucoup, adv. weakened his courage. Though they have affbibl-ir, v. Qitoigne, c. subj. adorned their gardens to dazzle the vulgar, embell-ir, v. jardin, m. pour ttblou-ir, v. vulgaire,m. they have not succeeded. THIRD CONJUGATION. Infinitive Mood. Present. llec-evoir, to receive. Part, active. evant, receiving. Part. past. *u, m. uc, f. received. * Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which -terminates in c, require for the softening of their sound, that a cedilla he added to the c (f) whenever it is followed by o or u. K 194 VERB. Compound Tenses. Preterite. Avoir refit, to have received. Part, past, Ayant refu, having received. Indicative Mood. Present, Singular. Je re$-ois, I receive, I do receive, or I am receiving. Tu ois. II oit. . Plural. Nous evons, we receive, &c. Vous evez. Us oivent. Imperfect, Singular. Je rec-evais, I did receive, or I was receiving. Tu evois. II evoit. Plural. Nous evions, we did receive, &c. Vous eviez. Us evoient. Preterite, Singular. Je re$-us, I received, or I did receive. Tu us. II ut. Plural. Nou$ ' Ames, we received, &c. Vous utes. Us urent. Future, Singular. Je rec-evrai, I shall or will receive. Tu evras. II evra. Plural. Nous evrons, we shall or will receive. Voifa evrez. Us ewont. VERB. 195 Conditional Present, Singular. Je rec-evrois, I should or would receive. Tu 11 evrois. evroit. Plural. Nous evrions, we should, &c. receive. Vous evriez. Us evroient. Compound Tenses. Pret. indefin. J'ai refu, I have received. Pret. ant. def. J^eus regu, I had received. Preterpluperf. J'avois regu, I had received. Future past. J'aurai repi, I shall, &c. have received. Cond. past. J'aurois regu, I should, &c. have received. Imperative Mood. Present, Singular. Reg-o/s, receive thoti. Qtt'il oive, let him receive. Plural. evons, let us receive. evez, receive ye. Qu'ils oivent, let them receive. Subjunctive Mood. Present, Singular. Que je re$-oive, that I may receive, or I receive. tu il nous vous Us oves. oive. evez. oivent. Plural. that we may receive. Imperfect, Singular. Que je reg-usse, that I might receive, or I received. tu. usses. U ut. x2 196 VERB. Plural. Que nous re$-ussions, that we might receive. vous ussiez. Us ussent. Compound Tenses. Preterite. Que j'aie recu, that I may have received. Preterplu. Quefeusse repu, that I might have received. Recevoir des nouvelles de To hear from somebody. quelqifun, After the same manner are conjugated seven verbs only; the following are irregular : Asseoir, to sit down. Pouvoir, to be able. Dechoir, to decay. Sayoir, to know. Falloir (verb impersonal), Valoir, to be worth. to be needful. Voir, to see. Mouvoir, to move. Vonloir, to be willing. Pleuvoir (v. imp.), to rain. And their compounds. EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. Indicative Mood. PEES. I entertain great hopes from his con- conc-evoir, v. esptrance, f. con- duct. I am to write to your brother to-morrow, duite, f. * ecrire, v. to let 1 him 1 know that your father is arrived. pour faire, v. lui savoir, v. A commander ought to be intrepid in the midst commandant, m. d-evoir y v. au milieu, m. of dangers. He is to go and breakfast aller, v. ^ dejeuner, v. at my uncle's next* Sunday 1 , and he is to come c/iez, p. venir, v. and sup with us. We sometimes* entertain 1 souper, v. quelquefois, adv. O" * When the verb to be is used in the present or imperfect tenses of the indicative mood, and precedes another verb in the infinitive mood, denoting a futurity in the action, it is to be rendered in French by the same tenses of the vrb devoir, and not by elre. Ex. Je dois aller aw pare, I am to go to the park. Nova devious lui &rire, We u-ere to write to him. VERB. 197 a hatred for (persons who) deserve our de la /mine, f. des personnes qtii mcriter, v. friendship. Do you not perceive a mountain amitic, f. apperc-evoir, v. beyond that tree ? Yes, I do. We are to derriere, p. remit him the value in goods or in remettre, v. lui valeur, f. en, p. marchandise, f. money. Are you not to dine with my father and mother to-morrow ? Men commonly owe demain, adv. d-evoir, v. their virtues or their vices to education (as much as) to autant que, c. nature.- 'Are these young ladies to go to the oiler, v. ball ? No, they are not. bal, m. IMP. I owed four guineas to your aunt when she guince, f. died. Was not your brother to receive that money mourut, v. last* Thursday J ? We received his tiresome Jeudi, m. ennuyant, adj. visits, because we were obliged to it. Were you not obliger, v. (to let) them know it sooner? They were not to fairc, v. leur savoir, v. stay above six weeks. rester, v. plus, adv. PRET. I received yesterday, with (a great deal) bien, adv. of pleasure, the books you sent me. As soon as envoy er, v. we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. They avert ir, v. heard yesterday from your brother.* .Fur. I shall entertain a bad opinion of you, conc-evoir mauvais, adj. if you do not avoid Mr. R.'s company. We shall iviter, v. * Turn the sentence thus : They received yesterday some news from, $c. 198 VERB. owe him nothing more after this month.' I hope apres, p. you will receive all my letters during my absence, and pendant, p. that they will hear from their father in (a short dans, p. pen, adv. time). Observations on SHOULD* and OUGHT. COND. PRES. I should answer your brother's repondre, v. a letter, but I have not time. Ought not your sister to terns, m. give 1 your* mother* an account* oft all 6 her? rendre, v. a votre ** compte, m. actions 8 ? She would soon perceive the danger, if bicntot, adv. she knew the consequences of it. Children should savoit, v. (every 3 day) learn 1 something by heart. tous les jours apprendre, v. cceur t m. You should not despise the advice that he gives you. mtpri&er, v. avis, m. Should they, after what they have done, ^apres, p. fait, p. p. expect to receive favours? Grammar, geography, sattendre, v. a history, music, are sciences and arts which ladies should never neglect. * When the word should expresses a duty or necessity, or can with pro- priety bp turned into ought, it is rendered in French by the conditional present of the verb dtvoir. Ex. Je devrois uller le rotr, I should, or might to go and see him. fous devriez If secourir dans set You ihotild, or ought to help him in misers, &c. his misery, &c. The word should, or cwght, when joined to the verb to nave, immediately followed by a participle past, must be rendered by the conditional past of the above verb, with the participle past turned into the present of the infinitive mood. Ex. J*aurois dA Colliger a rester id, I should or might to have obliged % him to stay here. Nous aurions du revenir plutot, We should or aught to have come back sooner. VERB. 199 Imperative Mood. Receive this small present as a token of my friend- marque, f. ship. Subjunctive Mood. FEES, and IMP. Though I perceive ships Quoique, c. \>aisseau,m. (afar off), I cannot distinguish them. He de loin, adv. ne saurois, v. wrote to us by the first post, that* we might ecrivit, v. ordinaire, m. a/in que receive his orders (in proper time). a terns, adv. Compound Tenses. I have not yet received his answer.' You encore, adv. rf-ponse, f. should have (been making) your theme this morning Jiiire, v. matin, m. instead of playing. He has entertained the hope of au lieu, p. dejouer living here all his life. She ought to have vivre, v. id, adv. vie, f. thanked him for the good advice he gave her. renter tier, v. de, p. lui When did you hear from your sister ? { We have not heard from her since her departure, Your uncle depuis, p. depart, m. oncle, m. should not have obliged him to pay one-half of the a la moitie, f. expenses. We should have owed him one hundred Jrais,m. pi. livres. 1 beg your pardon, : I ought not to livre, f. demander, v. have made you wait so long. Ought Jaire,\. attendre,v. si long-terns, adv. not we to have employed our time better than (we employer, v. nous * That, meaning in order that, must always be translated by afin que. f See the note * at the end of page 197. $ Say, / to you beg pardon, 8fC. 200 VERB. did) the 1 last 3 three 1 months* we were in ne I'avons fait que nous France ? FOURTH CONJUGATION. Infinitive Mood. Present. Vend-re, to sell. Part, active. ant, selling. Part. past. u, m. lie, f. sold. Indicative Mood. Present, Singular. Je vend-s, I sell, I do sell, or am selling. Tu vend- s. II vend. Plural. Nous ons, we sell, &c. Fous ez. Us ent. Imperfect, Singular. Je vend-ozs, I did sell, or was selling. Tu ois. II oit. Plural. Nous ions, we did sell, &c. Fous iez. Us oient. Preterite, Singular. Je -vend-/s, I sold, or did sell. Tu is. II it. Plural. Nous inies, we sold, &c. , Fous ties. Us irent. Future, Singular. Je vend-rni, I shall or will sell. Tu ras. II ra. VERB. Plural. Nous vend-rows, we shall or will sell. Votts rez. Us row/. Conditional Present, Singular. Je vend-row, I should or would sell. Tu rots. II roit. Plural. Nous rions, we should, &c. Vous riez. Us roient. Compound Tenses. Pret. indefin. J'ai vendu, I have sold. Preterpluperf. J'avois vendu, I had sold. Pret. ant. def. J'eus vendu, I had sold. Future past. J'aurai vendu, I shall, &c. have sold. Cond. past. J'aurois vendu, I should, &c. have sold. Imperative Mood. Present, Singular. Vend-*, sell thou. Qu'il e, let him sell. Plural. ons, let us sell. ez, sell ye. Qu'ils enl,]et them sell. Subjunctive Mood. Present, Singular. Qite je vend-e, that I may sell, or I sell. tu il nous VOUS Us es. e. Plural. tons. iez. ent. 202 VERB. Imperfect, Singular. Que je vend-me, that I might sell, or I sold. . tu isses. il U. Plural. nous issions. vous issiez. ils issent. Compound Tenses. Preterite. Quefaie vendu, that I may have sold. Preterplu. Quej'eusse vendu, that I might have sold. After the same manner are conjugated about forty verbs. The following are irregular. Absoudre, to absolve. Faire, to make, to do. Battre, to beat. Frire, to fry. Boire, to drink. Lire, to read. Circoncire, to circumcise. Meltre, to put. Conclure, to conclude. Moudre, to grind. Conduire, to conduct. Na'itre, to be born. And all the verbs ending Paitre, to graze, to feed. in uire. Plaire, to please. Con/ire, to preserve. Prendre, to take. Connottre, to know. Rire, to laugh. And all those ending in Siiffire t to suffice, to be oitre. sufficient. Coudre, to sew. Suivre, to follow. Craindre, to fear. Se taire, to hold one's And all those ending in tongue. indre. Traire, to milk. Croire, to believe. Vaincre, to conquer. Dire, to tell. Vivre, to live. Ecrire, to write. And their compounds. Observation. Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which terminates in p, as romp-re, corromp-re, &c. take a t after the p in the third person singular of the present tense indicative mood. Ex. Je romps, tu romps, it rompt : the rest are, conjugated as vcndre. VERB. 203 EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. Indicative Mood. PRES. I do not mean to wronjr him. prttend-rc, v. ** Jaire tort, v. lui, pro. Is your mother coming down? We expect descend-re, v. attend-re, v. our friend Mr. A. Do not you forbid her to dcfend-re, v. de go there ? They sell bad fruit. alter, v. mauvais, adj. IMP. Did I not interrupt him, while he interromp-re, v. pendant-que, c. was answering them? She was melting into repond-re, v. letir fond-re, v. en, p. tears, when you arrived. Were we not losing larme, f. arriver, v. perd-re, v. our time? You were not spreading your nets. terns, m. ctend-re, v. jilety m. Did they corrupt our manners ? corromp-re,v. mceurs, f. pi. PRET. (As soon as) I had received my money, I DCS que, c. returned them what they had lent me. Did he rend-re, v. leur prcter, v. not hear you ? We (waited for) them a entend-re, v. attend-re, v. les month.- (For how much) did you sell it them?- tnois t m. Combien, adv. They spilled all the wine. rcpand-re, v. Fur. I shall shear my flock (in the) month tond-re, v. troupeau, m. au of May. If you do not take care,*- the dog Mai, m. ne prencz, v. garde, f. will bite you.- Shall we not lose, if we play ? mord-re, v. You will melt it, if you put it into the fire. fond-re, v. mettcz, v. dans ) p. . * After the conjunction ', meaning unless, we suppress pas and point. 204 VERB. No, I will not. They 1 shall 3 not* hears entend-re parler$ t v. of 6 me 7 (any* more). plus, adv. COND. PRES. Should I not do him the justice rend-re, v. he deserves? Would he not interrupt you?- 'We meriter, v. would defend them if we could.- Why would you defend-re, v. pouvions, v. not answer, if I were speaking to you ? Your rcpond-re, v. liens would (lay eggs) every day, if they were not so poule, f. - pond-re, v. tons les jours * fat. gras, adj. Imperative Mood. Give 1 God* thanks 2 . Let her not come Rend-re, v. Dieu, m. grace, f. down. Let us (give in) our accounts faithfully. rend-re, v. conipte, m.Jidelement, adv. Do not lose my book. Let them hear the voice of voix, f. the Lord. Seigneur , m. Subjunctive Mood. PRES. and IMP. Speak loud, that * I may hear haul, adv. what you say. She plays upon the harpsichord, diteSf v. clavecin, m. though you forbid her to da it.- He wrote quoique, c. defaire, v. ccrivit, v. to us, that we might not expect him. Compound Tenses. I have lost my book ; have you found it ? perd-re, v. trouver, v. She has broken her fan. Have you not inter- romp-re, v. cventail, m. rupted me several times? 1 had not then alors, adv. * That is to say, in order that, AFIN QUE. VERB. 205 answered his letter. If they (had gone) there, ttoient attts, v. y would they not have lost their time ? Yes, they would. He says he would have sold us very good wine. dit, v. Had you not forbidden her to speak?- That they might lid de have waited (for us.) nous RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. Indicative Mood. FRES. I love attentive scholars, but I punish attentif, adj. ecolier, m. mats, c. severely laziness and inattention. Your severement, adv. paresse, f. brother does not receive this news with pleasure. nouvelle, f. Do we not expect your mother to-day ? We hope esperer, v. (that) you will succeed in your undertaking. Why do you not fulfil your promise ? Pourquoi, adv. accomplir, v. promesse, f. Are you to expect the least favour from your parents Devez g^ace^ f. and friends ? They perceive the danger, and appercevoir, v. they do not endeavour to shun it. tiicher, v. de cviter, v. IMP. I was speaking of your aunt when you (came in), tante, f. cntrer, v. and was doing her the justice she deserves. Mr. N. rendre, v. meriter, v. did not act towards your son with much tenderness. agir, v. Jtls, m. tendresse, f. Mr. P. and I were answering your letters when a you arrived. You undoubtedly entertained great arriver, v. sans doute, adv. 206 VERB. Jbopes from his last voyage. They were dernier, adj. spending their money in trifles, instead of depenser, v. en, p. bagatelle, f. au lieu de, ad. buying books. acketer, \. FRET. I built this house in one thousand seven hun- dred and seventy-nine. Your father received yesterday agreeable news. She burst into tears after fondre, v. en apres que, c. your cousin was gone. We sent him a great deal of fut parti, p. p. money unknown to your mother. Why did you not d I'insfu, p. de finish your work sooner? (As soon as) they perceived D2s que, c. us, they (ran away). prirent lajuite FUT. I will (give in) my accounts (at the) beginning rendre au ' of next 1 week 1 . My friend Mrs. R. will dine prochain, adj. semaine, f. with me next* Wednesday 1 We shall seize the first Merer ediy m. saisir, r. opportunity to thank him for his kindnesses. occasion, f. pour remercier, v. de bonte, f. You will soon entertain a better opinion of him. bientot, adv. concevoir Will not your sister (come down stairs) to-day ? de&cendre, v. COND. PRES. I would lay two guineas your uncle gager, v. is not yet arrived. - . If my father were rich, he encore ar river, v. would rebuild his country a -house j . Should we rebdtir, v. maison de Devoir, v. not express our gratitude toward those who exprimer, v. reconnaissance, f. envers do *. us good ? If you would, you could render Jbnt,v. bien, m. vouliez,v. pourriez rendre, v. VERB. 207 great services to your country. 1 am certain (that) pays, m. they would reward you, if you deserved it. rtcompenser, v. merit er t v. Imperative Mood. Discharge with equity the duties of your Remplir, v. tquite, f. devoir, m. office. Let him receive the punishment due to charge, f. punition, f. du, p. p. his crime. Let us give God thanks for the good rendre, v. a grace, f. de news we received yesterday. Imitate the great actions hier, adv. of your ancestors. Let them enjoy the fruit of anceires, m. jouir, v. du their labours. Subjunctive Mood, PRKS. Write to me by the first post, that Ecrivez, v. ordinaire, m. afin que, c. I may receive your letter before my departure from avant, p. depart, m. London. Though he hear what you say, Quoique, c. entendre, v. dites, v. yet* he does not understand you. ~ She is never comprendre, v. pleased, though we obey her in (every thing). content, adj. lui en, p. tout. I will tell it to you, provided you do not speak dirai, v. pourvu que, c. of it to your sister.- He will pay them, provided they les wait a little longer. attendre, v. un pen-plus long-terns, adv. IMP. I wrote to your father (some time ago) ecrivis, v. ily a quelque terns that he might engage Mr. W. to come and spend afin que, c. i ' ' **! passer, v. the holidays with us. That she might reflect on vacance, f. pi. * Yet, meaning however, is to be rendered into French by cependant or ndanmoins. 208 VERB. her own conduct, and not on that of others. propre, adj. He would not come to see us, lest we should voulut, v. de peur que, c. perceive his bad designs. -Your uncle desired ordonner, v. that you might sell his two horses to Mr. B. 1 should be very sorry if they fell into bad hands. gue, c. tomber, v. en de Promiscuous Exercises on the Compound Tenses. I have spoken to my father of it, but he has not nfa yet (given me any answer). Have I not encore, adv. repondu faithfully executed your orders ? Has your sister succeeded in her undertaking ? Yes, she has, and I have reussi congratulated her (upon it) We have not yet feliciter, v. en received any remittance from America. Mrs. N. de remise, f. told me you had already sold half of your deja, adv. moitie, f. goods. 'Why did you not pay those poor marchandise, f. people? He would have been punished, if I had gens, m. el f. pi. not defended his right. They have sold him four cause, f. lui dozen of handkerchiefs at an exorbitant 2 price 1 , but they mouchoir, m. prix, m. have warranted them fine and well worked. We garantir, v. travailler, v. thought you would have brought your brother with you. croyions, v. amener Have we not been obliged to (wait for) Miss A.? de attendre, v. If you had trusted them with your goods, they m coiifier, v. leur ** VERB. 209 would have stolen the greatest part of them. It partie, f. Ce, pro. is for that reason my father has not (thought fit) to juger, v. a-propos send them to you. Mr. D. had represented to him all the danger of it. Mrs. F. has gained her cause, gagner, v. but she has lost all her wealth. Had I not perdre, v. bien, m. finished my work when she came in? You ouvrage, m. entrer, v. would have received your money (a month ago), if the il y a un mois mail had not been robbed. Mrs. P. told me she malle, f. voler, v. would have paid you (some time ago), if she had sold ily a quelque temps her goods. marchandise CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. Verbs passive are very easily conjugated. The partici- ple past of the verb, which is to be conjugated, is merely to be joined to the auxiliary verb fore, to be, through all its moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. It is to be observed, that in French this participle varies according to the gender and number of the noun or pronoun which stands as subject to the verb. Ex. Infinitive Mood. M. F. i'avois blesse, I had hurt myself, II s'a fait mal, He has hurt himself, EU-e s'avoit moquee de moi, She had laughed at me, 4-.. expressions too commonly made use of by many English people, who speak without knowledge of the principles of the language ; whereas we must say, VERB. Je me suis achete un cheval. Je wz'etois blesse* II s'e&tfait mat. Elle s'etoit moqu.ee de moi. Nous nous sonnnes informes, Us se sont promenes, II s'est passe d'etranges cJioses depuis votre de~ part, //Vest passe bien des an- nees depuis que fed ou'i parler de cette affaire, We have inquired. They have walked. Strange things have hap- pened since your de- parture. Many years have elapsed since I heard of that af- fair. It must be owned, that, in the compounds of most part of these verbs, the verb etre is but the substitute of the verb avoir; but it is impossible to use avoir as auxiliary to a verb which has for its object a conjunctive pronoun that relates to the principle of the action of that verb, and which precedes the auxiliary ; for, though we say, II a voulu se tuer, He would kill himself, yet, if we change the place of the pronoun, we must say, II s'est voulu tuer. CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERBS. The conjugation of the following verb may serve as a model for all the reflected or reciprocal verbs. Infinitive Mood. Present. Sepromener, to walk. Part. act. Se promenant t walking. Part. past. M. sing. promen-e, F. ee, walked. Part. past. M. plur. promen-es, F. ees, walked. Pretevite. Compound Tenses. S'etre promene, to have walked. Part. past. S'etant pro-went, having walked. VERB. 219 Indicative Mood. Present, Singular. Je me promdne, I walk, or do walk, or am walking. Tu te promtnes. II sepromdne. Plural. Nous nous promenons, we walk, &c. Vous vous promenez. Us se promcnent. Imperfect, Singular. Je me promenois, I did walk, or walked, or was walk- Tn te promenois. ing. 7/5 se promenoit. Plural. JVo? nous promenions, we did walk, &c. FOMS vous promeniez. Us se promenoient. * Preterite, Singular. Je me promenai, I did walk, or walked. Tu te promenas. II se promena. Plural. Nous nous promenamesy we did walk, &c. Fo5 vouspromendtes. Us se promenerent. Future, Singular. 7e me promenerai, I shall or will walk. TM te promeneras. Us se promenera. Plural. Nous nous promencrons, we shall or will walk. Fo? vous promenereZ' Us se promeneront. Conditional Present, Singular. Je me promenerois, I would or should walk. Tu te promenerois. II se promeneroit. L 2 2SO VERB. Plural. Nous nous promenerions, we would, &c. walk. Vous vous promeneriez. Us se promeneroient. Compound Tenses. Pret. indefin. Je me sitis promen-e, ee, I have walked. Pret. ant. def. Jemefuspromen-t,ce, I had walked. Preterpluper. Je m'etois promen-e, ee, I had walked. Future past. Je me serai promen-e, ee, I shall or will have walked. Concl. past. Je me serois promen-e, ee, I should, &c. have walked. Imperative Mood. Present, Singular. Promene-toi*, walk thou. Qu'il se promene, let him walk. Plural. Promenons-nous*, let us walk. Promenez-vous* , walk ye. Qu'ih se promenent, let tliem walk. Subjunctive Mood. Present, Singular. Quejc me promene, that I may walk. tu te promenes. il se promene. Plural. wotw nous promenions, that we may walk. TOKS vous promeniez. Us se promenent. Imperfect, Singular. Que je me promenasse, that I might walk. / te promenasses. il se promendt. * When the verb is conjugated with a negation, these three prououns are puUbefore the verb. Ex. Ne vous pramenes pas, do not walk ; and tot is chaD5ed 'nto te ; ne te promene pat. VERB. 221 Plural. Que nous nous promenassions, that we might walk. vous vous promenassiez. Us se promenassent. Compound Tenses. M. F. Preterite. Que je me sois promen-l, te, that I may have walked. Preterpluperf. Queje mejlisse promen-e, ce, that I might have walked. The learner may here be again reminded, that it is necessary to conjugate this verb with a negation and inter- rogation. Ex. Je ne me promene pas, I do not walk. Vous promenez-vous ? Do you walk ? Ne se promene-t-il pas ? Does he not walk ? Compound Tenses. Me suis-je promene ? Have I walked ? or did I walk ? Ne vortx (tes-vous pas Have you not warmed chauffe? yourself? or did you not warm yourself? 21/ow cousin s'est-il inform e ? Has my cousin inquired? or did my cousin in- quire ? Votre frere ne s'est-il pas Has not your brother re- repenti ? pented ? or did not your brother repent ? Observation 1. We say in French, Se promener a cheval, en To take a ride, an airing carosse, on horseback, in a coach. Se promener sur I'eau, sur To go upon the water, on la riviere, the river. ^informer des nouvelles de, To inquire after. 2S2 VEKB. EXERCISES UPON THE REFLECTED VERBS. Observation 2. Verbs marked thus are irregular : see the irregular verbs. Indicative Mood. PRES. I rise (early) every Se lever, v. de bonne heure, adv. tons Us morning. - Does not your brother remember to matin, m. se ressomxnir, v. hare seen me ? - My sister* is not well, the ru, p. p. ttPii r, f. applies herself (too much) to study. - We iappltquer, v. trap, adv. rejoice at the good news he has brought se rejouir, v. de novoeUe, f. apporte, p. p. us. When do you intend to go and see se proposer, v. de otter, v. "" roir, T. Mrs. H. ? - Do you not repent of what you se repentir, v. dip have done to her ? - 1 believe your brothers are fait, p. p. croire, v. not well ; f for I have not seen them this week. car, c. vu, p. p. temaine, f. IMP. I was riding on horseback in the park,J when parcyia. quand, c. I met hhn. Was he not warming himgelf remcontrer, v. - se chauffer, v. when you (came hi) ? - We did not imagine he enlrer, v. s*imagincr t v. would succeed so well. - Tou were boasting too reussir, v. se winter, v. much of -what you have done for him.-pr* - They did fait, p. p. not expect (that they should) meet us. :; s'atlendre, v. a PRBT. I inquired after you yesterday.|| - Did *' 'informer, v. de hier, adv. * When we mean to exprac the state of a pecpa's health, instead of the rob itrty we most use the reflected one tepmtet: M* tm*r me te porte jmt biat, Mj sbter u Dot well. t See*tbe abore note *. | SeetbeaboreOfaserratioa VERB. 223 not my son behave well in the last K comporter, v. dernier, adj. war ? Corn was sold yesterday for twelve guerre, f. se vendre, v. shillings a bushel. We saw ourselves surrounded Se voir, v. entourt, p. p. by more than twenty persons in an instant. Did you de en, p. not find yourselves obliged to go there ? se t roarer, v. oblige, p. p. de alter, v. They did not stop one minute. s'arreter, v. FUT. I will not complain of you, if you pro- se plaindre, v. pro- mise me to behave better. Will your bird mettre, v.$ de mieujc, adv. oiseau, m. (grow tame) ? Shall we submit ourselves to sapprrcoiser, v. se soumetire, v. his judgment? You will ruin yourselves if you jugement, m. se miner , v. continue (gaming). Will they not perceive. continuer, v. dejouer, v. apercevoir, r. it (as soon as) they come into the room. des que, c. entrer, v. COXD. PRES. If I were in your place, I would not etois a vex myself. Would she not (make her escape) I se ctiagriner, v. s'echapper, v. We would embark (this day) if the weather sembarquer, v. aujourd'hui, adv. terns, m. (would permit). Would you so soon? Why le permettoit, v. tot, adv. would you expose yourselves to their fury ? They s'erposer, v. Jureur^ f. would agree very well, if they were not so s'accorder, v. biea, adv. proud. orgueilhux, adj. Imperative Mood. I give you leave to go out, but do not donner, v. permission, f. de sortir, v. mats, c. overheat yourself. Let him amuse himself scchaiiffer, v. t'amustr, v. 224 VERB. a little in my garden. Let us remember un peu, adv. jardin, m. se ressouvenir de, v. J what we are to do.- Endeavour to please your Jaire,\. S'effbrcer, v. de plaire, v. d master, and do not so often mistake in the tenses, maitre, m. se tromper, v. numbers, and persons of the verb. Let them (fall asleep). s'endormir t v. Subjunctive Mood. PRES. I must apply myself to the French Ilfaut que s'appliquer, v. language. 1 will hide it, lest she should langue, f. cacher, v. depeur quc, c. perceive it. Provided we remember to apercevoir, v. le, pro. Pourvu que, c. de ask him how his mother does.- demander, v. lui comment, adv. se porter, v. (In order that) you may not boast (so much).- Afin que, c. se vanter, v. tant, adv. I have told them who you are, that they may dit, p. p. leur afin que, c. behave better another time. fois, f. IMP. That I might not ruin myself. That he might se miner, v. not meddle with my affairs. That we might excuse se meter, v. de s'excuser, v. ourselves. That you might not go away.; That s'en alter, v. they might not repent too late. se repentir, v. trap tard, adv. Compound Tenses. I have inquired after you and your sister. j- He s'iiiformer, v, de says you have not been well while you were in dit, v. pendant que, c. a the country. Has not your cousin laughed campagne, f. courin, m. se moquer, v. at me ? Did we not get up at six (o'clock) ? de se lever, v. d heure, f. * See the note in the exercises upon the third conjugation, page 1,96. t Say, I have inquired nfymir news and ofthute of, i(c. VERB. 223 They have perceived the trick, but it was too s'apercevoir du tour, m. late. Did you remember me ? 1 had not se ressou-cenir, v. de applied myself enough. ' Had not your sister s'appliquer, v. assez, adv. imagined that they would have found themselves simaginer, v. se trouver, v. obliged to go to France? (Many 3 things) have 1 oblige, p. p. de Bien des choses on been said (of them 8 ) which are not true. We had a dit, v. d'eux thought ourselves able to resist them, se croire, v. capable, adj. de register, v. but we were deceived. Did you not mats, c. nous nous etions trompes, v. hide yourselves in order to surprise them ? se cacher, v. de surprendre, v. When I (shall) have walked five or six minutes in the Quand, adv. garden, I will rest myself. Why have you exhausted se reposer, v. s'epuiser, v. yourself as you have done? Our sailors would have I'avez .fait, p. p. behaved with more resolution. Would you not have excused yourself? When they have repented s'excuser, v. se repentir, v. (of) their faults, I will forgive them. If I had been de leur in your place, I would not have meddled with their d se meler, v. de ' affairs. Your friend would not have complained of se plaindre, v. 3*ou, and you never would have fallen out for so small se brouiller, v. peu a matter. de chose, f. ._.. __------ CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. These are called irregular, because their conjugation deviates from the general rule, either by their termina- tions, or the want of some of their moods, tenses, persons, or numbers. L 5 226 VERB. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. VERB OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. ALLER, to gO. Infinitive Mood. Present. Aller, to go. Part. act. Allant, going. Part. past. Alle, ee, gone. Indicative Mood. Present. Vais, vas, va, I go, or am going. Allans, ' allez, vont. Allois, Imperfect. allots, alloit t I did go, or was going. alliez, alloient. Preterite. alias, alia, I went, or did go. Allai, Alldmes, alldtes, allerent. Second Preterite. fusy Jut, I went, or did go. Fus, Fumes, Jutes, furent Future. Irai, Irons, Irois, Irions, tras, irez, ira, I shall, or will go. iront. Conditional Present. iroit, I should or would go. iroient. trots iriez Imperative Mood. Sing. Va, go thou ; qu'il aille, let him go. Plur. Allans, allez, qu'ils aillent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que * Aille, ailles, aille, that I may go. Allions, alliez, aillent. VERB. 227 Imperfect. Que que que Sing. Allasse, aliasses, allat, that I might go. Plur. Allassions,allassiez, allassent. Observation. Among the compound tenses of this verb, it is to be remarked, that those which are formed by the participle alle, signify that we are or were yet in the place mentioned at the time we are or were speaking. Whence it follows, that the first and second persons of the preterite indefinite, Je suis alle, I have gone, &c. Tu es alle, Sfc. can seldom be used in discourse ; for we cannot, naturally say that we are still in a place which can only be men- tioned in a past time, after we have left it ; therefore we make use of the compound tenses of the verb etre , as J'ai etc, tu asete; for when we say, II est alle a Londres, He is gone to London, we give to understand, that he is still in London, or is on his way, going to London : on the contrary, II a etc a Londres, He has been or gone to London, means that he has gone to London, but is returned. The above verb is also conjugated as a reflected one, with the particle en. Ex. S'en aller, to go away. Je ?w'en vais, I go or am going away. Tu fen vas, thou goest or art going away. II s'en va, he goes or is going away. Nous nous en allons, we go or are going away. Vous vous en allez, you go or are going away. Us s'en vont, they go or are going away. Negatively. Je ne w'en vais pas, I am not going away. line s'en vapas,he is not going away. Nous ne nous en allons pas, we are not going away. Vous nevous en allezpas, S$c. you are not going away, &c. 228 VERB. Interrogatively. S'en va~t-il ? is he going away ? Vous en allez-vous, Sfc. are you going away ? &c. Ne s'en vont-ils pas ? fyc. are they not going away? &c. The imperative mood is thus conjugated : Singular. Fa-J-en, go thou away. Quil s'en aille, let him go away. Plural. Allons-nous en, let us go away. Allez-vous en, go away. Qu'ils s'en aillent, let them go away. Its compound tenses are, Indicative Mood. Je m'en suis alle, I have gone away. Je m'enfus alle, I had gone away. Je nz'en etois allc, I had gone away. Je m'en serai alle, I shall have gone away, c. Je m'en serois alle, I should have gone away, &c. Subjunctive Mood. Qtieje i'en sois alle, that I may have gone away, &c. Queje m'enjksse alle, that I might have gone away, &e. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION- ACQUERIR, to acquire. Infinitive Mood. Present. Acquerir, to acquire. Part. act. Acqucrant, acquiring. Part. past. Acquis, acquired. Indicative 'Mood. Present. Sing, dcquiers, acquiers, acquiert, I acquire," or am Plur. Acgucrons, acqiterez, acquicrent. acquiring. VERB. 229 Imperfect. Sing. Acquerois, acquerois, acqueroit, I did acquire, or Plur. Acquerions, acqueriez, acqueroient. was acquiring. Preterite. Sing. Acquis, acquis, acquit, I acquired, or did Plur. Acquimesy acquites, acquirent. acquire. Future. Sing. Acquerraiy acquerras, acquerra, I shall or will ac- Plur. Acqutrrons, acquerrez, acquerront. quire. Conditional Present. Sing. Acquerrois, acquerrois, acquerroit, I should or would Plur. Acquerrions, acquerriez, acquerroient. acquire. Imperative Mood. Sing. Acquiers, acquicre, acquire thou. Plur. Acquerons, acquerez, acqutirent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Acquire, acquieres, acquicre, that I may acquire. Plur. Acquerions, acqueriez, acquierent. Imperfect. Sing. Acquisse, acquisses, acquit, that I might acquire. Plur. Acquissions, acquissiez, acquissent. QUERIR, to fetch. The primitive of the above verb is never used but in the present of the infinitive mood with the verbs aller, to go ; venir, to come ; and envoyer, to send. Ex. Envoyez-moi querir, Send for me. CONQUERIR, to conquer; REQUERIR, to require ; are con* jugated like ACQU'ERIR. 230 VEHB. BOUILLIR, to boil. Infinitive Mood. Present. Bouillir, to boil. Part. act. Bouillant, boiling. Part. past. Bouilli, ie, boiled. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Bous, bous, bout, I boil, or am boiling. Plur. Bouillons, bouillez, bouillent. Imperfect. Sing. Bouillois, bouillois, bouilloit, I did boil, or was Plur. Bouillions, bouilliez, bouilloient. boiling. Preterite. Sing. Bouillis, bouillis, bouillit t I boiled, or did boil. Plur. BouillimeSf bouittites, bouillirent. Future. Sing. Bouilliraiy bouilliras, bouillira, I shall or will boil. Plur. Boiiillirons, bouillirez t bouittiront. Conditional Present. Sing. Bouillirois, bouillirois, bouilliroit, I should or would Plur. BouillirionSybouilliriez, bouiUiroient. boil. Imperative Mood. Sing. Bous, bouitte, boil thou. Plur. Bouillons, bouittez, bouillent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Bouille, bouilles, bouille, that I may boil. Plur. Bouillions, bouilliez, bouillent. Imperfect. Sing. "Souillisse, bouillisses, bouittit, that I might boil. Plur. Bouillissions, bouillissiez, bouittissent. VERB. 231 Observation. This verb, as well as its compound rebouil- lir, to boil again, is but seldom used, except in the third person singular or plural, and its infinitive mood, which is commonly joined to the verbfaire. The same observation is to be applied to rotir, to roast. Ex. Faites bouillir cette viande, Boil that meat. Faites rotir cette volatile, Roast that fowl. Present. Part. act. Part. past. Sing. Cours, Plur. Courons, Sing. Courois, Plur. Courions, Sing. Courus, Plur. Cour times, Sing. Courrai, Plur. Courrons t Sing. Courrois, Plur. Courrions, Sing. Plur. Courons, COURIR, to run. . 'Infinitive Mood. Courir, to run. Courant, running. Count, 116) run. Indicative Mood. Present. cours, court, I run, or am running. courez, courent. Imperfect. courois, couroit, I did run, or was couriez, couroient. running. Preterite. courus, courut, I ran, or did run. courutes, coururent Future. courras, courra, I shall or will run. courrez, courront. Conditional Present. courrois, courroit, I should or would courriez, courroient. run. Imperative Mood. Cours, coure, run thou. eourez, courent. VERB. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qite Sing. Coure, Plur. Courions, que coures, couriez, que coure, that I may run. courent. Imperfect. Sing. Courus&e, courusses, courut t that I might run. Plur. Courussions, courussiez, courussent. The compounds of this verb are, Accourir, to run to. Recourir, to have recourse Concourir, to concur. to. Discourir, to discourse. Secourir, to succour, to Encourir, to incur. assist. Parcourir, to run over. COUVRIR, to cover. See OUVRIR, to open. CUEILLIR, to gather. Infinitive Mood. Present. Cueillir, to gather. Part. act. Cueillant, gathering. Part. past. Cneilli, ie, gathered. Present. Sing. Cueitte, cueilles, cue'dle, I gather, or am ga- Plur. CueillonSy cueillez, cueUlent. thering. Imperfect. Sing. Cueillois, cueillois, cueilloit, I did gather, or Plur. Cueillions, cueilliez, cueilloient. was gathering. Preterite. Sing. Cueillis, cueillis, cueillit, I gathered, or did Plur. Cueillimes, cueillites, cueillirent. gather. Future. Sing^Cueillerai, cueitteras, cueillera, I shall or will ga- Plur. Cueillerons, cueillerez, cueilleront. ther. VERB. 233 Conditional Present. Sing. Cueillerois, cueillerois, cueilleroit, I should or would Plur. Cueillerions, cueilleriez, cueilleroient. gather. Sing. Plur. Cueillons, Imperative Mood. CueiUe, cueille, gather thou. cueillex, cueillent. que cueille, that I may gather. cueillent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que Sing. Cueille, cueilles, Plur. Cueillions, cueilliez, Imperfect. Sing. Cueillisse^ cueillisses, cueillil, that I might gather. Plur. Cueillissions, cueillissiez, cueillissent. The compounds of this verb are, Accueillir, to make welcome. Recueillir, to gather toge- ther. Present. Part. act. Part. past. Sing. Dors, Plur. Dormons, Sing. Dormoix, Plur. Dormions, Sing. Dormis, Plur. Dortnimes, DORMIR, to sleep. Lifinitive Mood. Dormir y to sleep. Dormant, sleeping. Dor mi, slept. Indicative Mood. Present. dors, - dort, I sleep, or am sleeping-. dormez, dorment. Imperfect. dormois, dormoit, I did sleep, or was dormiez, dormoient. sleeping. Preterite. dormis, dormit, I slept, or did sleep. dormltes, dormirent. 234 VERB. Future. Sing. Dormirai, dormiras, dormira, I shall or will sleep. Plur. Domiironsy dormirez, dormiront. Conditional Present. Sing. Dormirois, dormirois, dormiroit, I would or should Plur. Dormirions, dormiriez, dormiroient. sleep, Imperative Mood. Sing. Dors, dorme, sleep thou. Plur. Dormons, dormez, dorment* Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que gue Sing. Dorme, dormes, dorme, that I may sleep. Plur. Dormions, dormiez, dorment. Imperfect. Sing. Dormisse, dormisses, dormit, that I might sleep. Plur. Dormissions,dormissiez, dormissent. The compounds of this verb are, Endormir, to make sleep. Se rendormir, to fall asleep S"endormir t to fall asleep. again. EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND THEIB COMPOUNDS. Where are you going ? I. am going to the play. Ou, adv. comedie, f. I would' go with you, if I had time. Why are fen auois le temps they going away so soon ? Will not your father be tot, adv. angry if you go there without him ? We were fache,. adj. going to Miss D.'s, when we met you. chez, p. rencontrer, v. These men went yesterday from house to house. en, p. Believe- me, sir, do not go to see them. Your Croire, v. voir, v. VERB. 285 father told me, you will go to France and Italy as soon dire, v. as the war (be over). My sister and I went last 1 serajlnie dernier, adj. Wednesday 1 to Vauxhall.* If you had gone (thither) au an hour sooner, you would have heard fine music. plutot, adv. entendre, v. Your uncle has acquired a great name in America. nom, m. My father went to pay your uncle a visit last 1 ^ rendre, v. ^ week 1 , and he did not welcome him as a friend. Did refut en, p. * he not ? I am sorry for it. Mr. Dubois, the king's silversmith, has brought the watch : it now* argentier, m. maintenant, adv. goes 1 very well. Go and fetch me the letter I left in my room. Boilf this chicken and roast laisser, v. poulet, m. rotir, v. that goose. At last we have conquered. This oie, f. Enfoi, adv. water will soon boil. Boil that meat again, it is bientot, adv. not done enough. Do not run so fast, you will cuit, p. p. vile, adv. be tired.- -They always run when they go to see their fatigue, p.p. aunt. Your brother runs faster than I. When tante, f. he heard that his friend was in danger, he ran apprendre, v. instantly to him. Let us not discourse any more aussitot, adv. on that subject. 1 would assist him with all my heart, sujet, m. de if I could. This gentleman is a great traveller : he pouvoir, v. voyageur, m. * See the observation at the top of page 78. . f- See the observation at the eud of the conjugation of bouillir, p. 231. 236 VERB. has run over* all Europe. ; Let him go away, for I car, c. do not wish to speak to him.- If you do it, you **** veux, v. Jaire, v. will incur your father's displeasure. That/would concur deplaisir, m. to the public 1 good 1 . When children are guilty, Men, m. coupable, adj. they generally have recourse (to some) falsehood. avoir recours an mensonge, m. For whom are you gathering those charming flowers ? I four, f. gather them for my mother. -Why do they not gather some roses ? Mrs. P. would have gathered some, rose, f . but the gardener told her he would gather them him- jardinier, m. self. Of all nations none has welcomed the poor French clergy better than the English. Do not make clerge, m. Jaire, v. any noise, for my sister (is asleep). 1 hope she will car, c. dormir sleep better to-night. She would sleep much better, if ce soir, m. she were in her bed. If I do not walk a little, lit, m. se promener, v. I shall fall asleep. My mother, sister, brother, and If, went yesterday to Croydon to see Miss Keen. hier, adv. Mademoiselle, f. Did you go thither on foot? No, my mother and sister a went in a coach, and my brother and I on horseback.^ en, p. ^ a cheval, m. * See the compounds of courir,y. 232. fr See the observation after Rule 4, on the Personal Pronouns, p. 78. J Say, my brother ami I we went, $c, ; see the observation at the top of page 78. VERB. 237 , to run atvay, to shun, to avoid, tojlee. Iiifinitive Mood. Present. Fuir, to flee. Part. act. Fuyant, fleeing. Part. past. Fui, ie, fled. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Fids, Juis t Juit, I flee. Plur. Fuyons, Jliyiez, fuient. Imperfect. Sing. Fuyois, fuyois, Juyoit, I fled, or did flee. Plur. Fuyions, Jiiyiez, fuyoient. Preterite. Sing. Jefuis, tufuit, ilfuit, I fled, or ran. away. Plur. Nousfaimes,vousfuttes, ilsjuirent, they fled, &c. This tense is also conjugated with the verb prendre, and the substantiveyiaVe, preceded by the article la. Ex. Je pris la fuite, IJIed, or ran away. Future. Sing. Fuirai, fuiras, fuira, I shall or will flee. Plur. Fuirons, Juirez, fmront. Conditional Present. Sing. Fuirois, Jidrois, Jidroit, I should or would Plur. Fuirions, jiiiriez, fuiroient. flee. Imperative Mood. Sing. Fuis, fide, flee thou. Plur. Fuyons, fuyez y fuient. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Fuie, fuies, fuie, that I may flee. Plur. Fuyions, fuyiez, fuient. 238 VERB. Imperfect. Je prisse la fuite, &c. that I might Jlee. Sing. Jefuisse, tufuisses, ilfuit, that I might run away. Plur. Nousfuissions^ousfuissiez, ilsfuissent, that they, &c. MENTIR, to lie. Infinitive Mood. Present. Mentir, to lie. Part. act. Mentant, lying. Part. past. Menti, lied. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Mens, mens, ment, I lie. Plur. Mentons, mentez, mentent. Imperfect. Sing. Mentois, mentois, mentoit, I did lie, or was Plur. Mentions, mentiez, mentoient. lying. Preterite. Sing. Mentis, mentis, mentit, I lied, or did lie. Plur. Mentlmes, mentites, mentirent. Future. Sing. Mentirai, mentiras, mentira, I shall or will lie. Plur. Mentions, mentirez, mentiront. Conditional Present. Sing. Mentirois, mentirois, mentiroit, I would or should Plur. Mentirions, mentiriez, mentiroient. lie. Imperative Mood. Sing. Mens, mente, lie thou. Plur. Mentons, mentez, mentent. VERB. 239 Que Sing. Mente, Plur. Mentions, Subjunctive Mood. Present. que que mcntcs, mcnte, that I may lie. mentiez, mentent. Imperfect. Sing. Mentisse, mentisses, mentit, that I might lie. Plur. Mentissions, mentissiez, mentissent. The compound of this verb is Dementir, to give one the lie, to belie, to contradict. Present. Part. act. Part. past. Sing. Meurs, Plur. Mourons, Sing. Mourois, Plur. MourionS) Sing. Mounts, Plur. Mourumes, Sing. Mourrai, Plur. Mourrons, Sing, Mourrois, Plur. Mourrions, MOURIR, to die. Infinitive Mood. Mourir, to die. Mourant, dying. Mort t died or dead. Indicative Mood. Present. meurs, meurt, I die, or am dying. mourez. meurent. Imperfect. mourois, mouriez, mouroit, I was dying. mouroient. Preterite. mourns, mourut, I died. mourutes, moururent. Future. mourras, mourra, I shall or will die, mourrez, mourront. Conditional Present. mourrois, mourroit, I should or would mourroient. die. 240 VERB. Sing. Plur. Mourons, Que Sing. Meure, Plur. Mourions, Imperative Mood. Meurs, meure, die thou. mourez, meurent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que gue meures, tneure, that I may die. mouriez, meurent. Imperfect. Sing. Mourusse, mourusses, mourut, that I might die. Plur. Mourussions, mourussiez, mourussent. Semourir, to be dying. OFFRIR, to offer. Infinitive Mood. Present. Qffrir, to offer. Part. act. Offrant, offering. Part. past. Qffert, erte, offered. Sing. Offre, Plur. Offrons, Sing. Offrois, Plur. Offrions, Sing. Offris, Plur. Offrimes, Sing. Offrirai, Plur. Offrirons, Sing. Offrirois, Plur. Offririons, Indicative Mood. Present. offices, offr^t I offer, or am offering. qffrez, offrent. Imperfect. offrois, ojfroit, I did offer, or was offriez, offroient. offering. Preterite. qffris, offrit, I offered, or did offer. offr'des t qffrirent. Future. qffriras, offrira, I shall or will offer. nffrirez, offriront. Conditional Present. qffrirois, offriroit, I would or should offririez, offriroient. offer. VERB. 241 Imperative Mood. Sing. 0^''> offi-e, offer thou. PJur. Ojfrons, offrez t ojfrent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qtie qne qne Sing. Offre, nffres, offre, that I may offer. Plur. Offrions, offriez, offrent. Imperfect. Sing. Offrisse, offrisses, ( Imperfect. Sing. Tenois, tenois, tenoit, I did hold, or was Plur. Teutons, teniez, tenoient. holding. Preterite. Sing. Tins, tins, tint, I held, or did hold. Plur. Tinmes, linies, tinrent. Future. Sing. Tiendrai, tiendras, tiendra, I shall or will hold Plur. Tiendrons, iiendrez, tiendront. Conditional Present. Sing. Tiendrois, tiendrols, tiendroit, I should or would Plur. Tiendrions, tiendriez, tiendroient. hold. Imperative Mood. Sing. Tiens, lienne, hold thou. Plur. Tenons, tenez, tiennent. 246 VERB. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Tienne, tiennes, tienne, that I may hold. Plur. Tenions, leniez, tiennent. Imperfect. Sing. Tinsse, tinsses, tint, that I might hold. Plur. Tinssions, tinssiez, tinssent. The compounds of this verb are, S'abstenir, to abstain. Appartenir, to belong. Contenir, to contain. Detenir, to detain. Entretenir, to keep, to en- tertain. Maintenir, to maintain. Obtenir, to obtain. Retenir, to retain, to keep. Soutenir, to maintain, to hold, to support. -TRESSAILLIR, to start, to leap for. Infinitive Mood. Present. Tressaillir, to start. Part. act. Tressaillant, starting. Part. past. 'Tre&sailli, ie, started. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Tressaille, Plur. Tressaillons, tressailles, tressailleZy tressaille, I start. tressaillent. Sing. Tressaillois, Plur. Tressaillions, Imperfect. tr'essaillois, tressailliez, tressaiUoit, I did start. tressailloient. ' - t : A- '- > f : ' Preterite. Sing. Tressaillisy Plur. Tressaillimes, tressaillis, tressaillites, tressaillit, I started. tressaittirent. Future. Sing. Tressaillirai, Plur. Tressaillirons, tressailliras, tressaillirez, tressaillira, I shall or tressailliront.vfillstert. VERB. 247 Conditional Present. Sing. Tressaillirois, tressaillirois, tressailliroit, 1 should or would start. Plur. Tressaillirions, tressailliriez, tressailliroient* Imperative Mood is wanting. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Tressaille, tressailles, tressaille, that I may Plur. Tressaittions, tressailliez, tressaillent. start. Imperfect. Sing. Tressaillisse, treuailliuet, tressaillit, that I might Plur. Tressaillissions, tressaillissiez, tressaittissent. start. ASSAILLIR, to assault, is conjugated as above. SAILLIR, to jut, or jet out (term in architecture), is conjugated like TRESSAILLIR, but is only used in the third person of some tenses and its infinitive mood. Observation. SAILLIR, to gush out (speaking of any liquid), is regular, and conjugated like Puhir. VENIR to come, And its compounds, Convenir, to agree, to be- Provenir, to proceed ; come, to fit, to suit; Revenir, to come back, to Contrevenir a, to infringe; return ; Devenir, to become ; Se souvenir, to remember ; Disconvenir, to disagree ; Se ressouvenir t to recollect; Intervenir, to intervene ; Subvenir, to relieve, to Parvenir a, to attain to ; assist ; Prevenir, to prevent, to Survenir, to befal, to hap- prejudice, to anticipate, pen unexpectedly, to to prepossess ; come to ; are conjugated like Tenir. 248 VERB. Observations on BEVENIR, to becomes and FAIBE SOUVE- NIR, to remind. This verb, in English, is most generally accompanied by the preposition of, governing a noun or pronoun ; but it must be observed, that, in French, the preposition is sup- pressed, and the noun or pronoun becomes nominative to the verb devenir. Ex. Ne vous informez point de Do not inquire about what ce que je deviendrai, will become of me. Quedeviendra votre cousin, What will become of your sisonperel'abandonne? cousin, if his father for* sake him ? Si celaarrivoityjene saisce Should that happen, I que nous deviendrions ; know not what would become of us. When the verb TO REMIND governs in English a noun or pronoun without the help of a preposition, that verb must be translated by Jaire se rappeler de; and the verb Jaire is put in the same tense, number and person, in which the verb to remind is in English. Ex. Faites moi me rappeler de Remind me to call upon passer chez votre tante ; your aunt ; that is, make me remember to, Ac. Oui, je vous ferai vous en Yes, I will remind you of rappeler ; it. ...".-; VETIR, to clothe* This verb is seldom used but in the present of the infi- -nitive mood, and participle past, vctu, clothed; there- fore the conjugation of its compound revefir, to invest with, to give other clothes, will be given in Henof iL. Infinitive Mood. Present. Revetir, .to invest, to give other clothes. Part. act. Revctant, investing. Part. past, fiewtitf. ue,. invested. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Revets, Revetons f Revetois, Revet ion s f ' Revetis, Revet hues, Revclirai, Revet irons t Revetirois, Revetirions, Revctons, VERB. Indicative Mood. Present. revets, 249 revft, I invest. revctent. Sing, Plur. Sing. Plur. Qite Revete, Revetions, Revetisse, Revetissions, revetez, Imperfect. revctois, revctoit, I did invest. revetiez, revctoient. , Preterite. revetis, revttit, I invested, or did revetites, revttirent, invest. Future. revetiras, revctira, I shall or will in- rewtirez, revetiront. vest. Conditional Present. revetirois, revetiroit, I should or would revctiriez, revctiroient. invest. Imperative Mood. Revets, revile, invest thou. revet ez, rcvetent. Suljuncti-ve Mood. Present. qiie que revctes, revet e, that I may invest. revetiez, revetent. Imperfect. revetisses, revettt, that I might invest. revetissiez, revctissent. EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. Your friend Mr. H. does not serve me well. Shall ami, m. ^ I help you to a little bit of lamb, or awing ^ morceau, m. agneau, m. aile, f. M.5 250 VERB. of that chicken? We would ^erve him with all our poulet t m. heart, if we could. 1 shall go out in half an hour. pouvoir, v. If we go to-day to Richmond, we will make use aujourd'hui, adv. se servir of your coach. My sister went out this morning carro$se, m. matin, m. at nine o'clock, acd is not yet returned. Nobody knows what we suffered in our last voyage. If I savoir, v. voyage, m. were as ill as yeu, I would not go out of my malade, adj. room. Why do not you serve your friends, chambre, f. Pourquoi, adv. since you may do it? Should they puisque, c. pouvoir, v. "* forsake* you, what would become of you ? f abandonner, v. I would make use ofyour horse, if you (were so kind as to) aviez la bonte de lend it to me. The more we are above au-dessus de, p. others, the more it becomes us to be modest and humble. convient My aunt and I came yesterday to see you, but you tante, f. were not at home. < I hope that you will keep your word, and comef to-morrow. 1 assure you parole, f. dcmain, adv. assurer, v. x that Mr. R.'s father holds the first rank in the town, rang, m. but the son will never (attain to) his father's reputation. obtenir Men acquire, by long labours, knowledge which often travail, m. lumiere, f. becomes fatal to them. 1 maintain, and will funeste, adj. * Say, if titty were to forsake you, S'ILS VOUS-ABANDONNOIEMT. j- See the observations, page 248. J Say, and that you will come. VERB. 251 always maintain, that you will not be happy without heureux, adj. sans, p. virtue. We were coming to see you, but you have anticipated all our designs/ She leaped for joy when . de she saw her. At last she has agreed to pay her an Enfin, adv. * de annual 3 pension 1 of twenty pounds. Her mother started up at these words, and became furious. d, p. parole, f. Jiirieux, adj. Come on Friday morning at nine o'clock. -This t/0r> Vendredi,m. house will belong to me after her death. You will apres, p. mart, f. obtain leave to go out another time, if you come permission, f. de fois, f. back soon. This box contains all my jewels. lientbt, adv. bijoux, m. pi. I agree that Miss N. is the prettiest of the family ; but she is so proud, that I know not what will become of her. Who knows whether they will remember it or not? savoir, v. si, c. They assaulted the town (in the) middle of the night, au milieu, m. and all their officers, even the general, agree that mcme, adv. they have acquired much glory. Remember that, if you infringe the law, you will incur the punishments contrevenir d peine, f. decreed by the law. Your illness proceeds from portt, p. p. d'une great heat. The first time you come to see me, I chaleur, f. fois, f. (by the fut.) will keep you two or three days.- Mr. B. desired retenir prier, v. me to tell you that he will not come back to-day. > de \ i * See the neuter verbs for the formation of the compound tenses. ' 252 When the surgeon had opened his vein, the chirurgien, m. ut la ventc, f. blood gushed out with an extraordinary* impetuosity 1 - sang, m. That poor man will bless you, if yon ghre bin benir, v. other clothes. He is so prepossessed against me, that contre, p. he will not agree he is in the wrong.* We vouloir, v. convenir should certainly have come back yesterday, had certainement, adv. hier, adv. ive had time.f You will become a great man, if you continue to study with the same assiduity. continuer, v. de assiduiie, f. He (would have) come to see us last 3 week', if it had seroit scmaine, f. not rained. The first time I go out, remind me plu, p. p. fois, f. (by the fut.) to call J on your brother. That hat would de passer, v. ckez, p. suit you very well, if you were a little taller. Do not pen go out to-day, you will suffer much if you do. beaucoup, adv. foire y v. I should not suffer (so much) if it were fine weather. tant, adv. Jaisoit, v. Why do you not abstain from drinking ? The boire, v. king has invested that nobleman with all his authority. revetir seigneur, m. de You may set out this morning, but remember pouvoir t v. to come back this evening. Were I in your place , I de ce soir, m. a place, f. would detain him here a little longer ; for, he retenir, v. peu long-terns, adv. cor, c. always keeps himself (shut up) in his house. I tient se enfermc, p. p. * To be in the wron, avoir tort. + Say, if we had had time for it, si NOL ? S EN AVIONS ED JLE TEMFS, J See the observation on the verb to remind, page 248. Turn the sentence thus ; If I were in, &c., Siftfoi* a. VERB. 253 do not think that colour suits your sister.- croire, v. (by the subj.) a votre When will she return from the country? She Quandy adv. wrote she will come next* Saturday 1 , if the weather s'il foit beau be fine. temps VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. ASSEOIR, to sit down. Infinitive Mood. Present. Asseoir, to sit down. Part. act. Asseyant, sitting down. Part. past. Assis, ise, sat down (or seated). Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Assieds, assieds y assied, I sit down. Plur. Asseyons, asseyezy asseyent. Imperfect. , Sing. Asseyoisy asseyois, asseyoit, I did sit, or was Plur. Asseyions t asseyiez, asseyoient. sitting down. Preterite. Sing. Assisy assis, assit, I sat down. Plur. Assimes, asntes t assirent. Future. Sing. Assicraiy assieras, assiera, I shall or will sit Plur. Assicronsy assierez, assieront. down. Or, J'asseieraiy tu asseieras, fyc. Conditional Present. Sing* Assieroisy assieroisy assicroity I should or would Plur. Assicrionsy assieriez t assiiroient. sit down. Or, J'asseierois, tu asseicrois } fyc. 54 VERB. Imperative Mood. Sing. Assieds, asseie, sit down. Plur. Asseyons, asseyez, asseient. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Asseie, asseies, asseie, that I may sit down. Plur. Asseytons, asseyiez, asseient. Imperfect. Sing. Assisse, assisses, assit, that I might sit down. Plur. Assissions, assissiez, assisscnt. Asseoir is most generally conjugated as a reflective verb, which may easily be done, by the learner adding a double pronoun to the different tenses, and forming the compound ones by the verb etre, as in se promener. Ex. Je m'assieds, tit t'assieds, il hassled. Nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ih &' asseient. Imperative Mood. Asaeds-toi, qu'il s'asseie, assey&ns-nous, asseycz-vous, qu'ils s'asseient. Compound Tenses. Je me suis assis, tu t'es assis, %c. Nous nous somntes assis, vous vous etes tfssis, Sfc. The compound of this verb is, Se rasseoir, to sit down again. SEOIR, to be seated, is obsolete ; however, the participle seant is sometimes used, as well as the adjective scant, seante. Ex. La cour royale de Paris scant d Versailles. SEOIR, to Jit well, to become, to Jit, is never used in the infinitive, except in the participle active, which is seyant. It has the following tenses, but only the third persons sin- gulaiv and plural. VERB. 255 Indicative Mood. Present. // sled, Us sitent, it becomes, they become, &c. Imperfect. // seyoit, ils scyoient, it was becoming, &c. Preterite wanting. Future. // siera, ils sicront, it or they will become. Cond. Pres. // sicroit, ils sieroient, it or they would be- come. Subjunctive Mood. Pres. Qu'il siee, qu'ils sieent, that it may become, &c. The other tenses are never used. Surseoir, to supersede, to put off, a compound of seoir, is only used in law, and is thus conjugated : Part. act. Sursoyant. Part. past. Sursis, ise. Indicative Mood. Present. Je sursois, fyc. nous sursoyons, $c. Imperfect. Je sursoyois, fyc. nous sursoyions, f$c. Preterite. Je sursis, Sfc. nous sursimes, $c. Future. Je surseoirai, fyc. nous surseoirons, SfC. Conditional Present. Je surseoirois, fyc. nous surseoirions, SfC. Imperative Mood. Sursois, <^c. sursoyons, rc. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Queje surseoie, %c. que nous sursoyions, $c. Imperfect. Que je sursissc, fyc. que nous srtrsissions, SfC. 256 VERB. DECHOIR, to decay, to decline. Infinitive Mood. Present. Dechoir, to decay. Part. act. wanting. Part. past. Dechu, ue, decayed. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Dechois, dtchois, dechoit, I decay. Plur. Dechoyons, dechoyez, dechoient. Imperfect. Sing. Dechoyois, dechoyois, dechoijoit, I decayed. Plur. *Dechoyions, dechoyiez, dechoyoient. Preterite. Sing. Dcchus, dechus, dcclmt, I decayed, or did Plur. DtchumeSy dechutes, dechurent. decay. Future. Sing. Decherraiy deckerras, decherra, I shall or will de- Pi ur. Decherrons, decker rez, decherront. cay. Conditional Present. Sing. Dt'dierrois, decherrois, decherroit, I should or would Plur. Dccherrions,dccherriez, decherroient. decay. Imperative Mood. Sing. Dechoie, guil dechoie, decay, &c. Plur. Dechoyons, dechoyez, quih dechoient. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Dechoie, dechoies, dtchoie, that I may decay. Plur. Dechoyions, dechoyiez, dechoient. Imperfect. Sing. Dechusse, dechusses, dtchut, that I might decay. Plur. Dechussions, dcchussiez, dechussent. CrtpiR, the primitive of the abore verb, has only the infinitive and the part, past, chu, chue. VERB. 257 liCHOiR, to Jail out, to change, is conjugated like Dechoir, with this exception, that it is only used in the third per- sons. Its part. act. is cchcant. Present. Part. act. Part. past. Sing. Meus, Plur. MouvonSy Sing. Mouvoisy Plur. Mouvions, Sing. Mus, Plur. Mumes, Sing. Mouvraiy Plur. Mouvronsy Sing. Mouvrois, Plur. Mouvrions, Sing. Plur. Mouvons, MOUVOIR, to move. Iiifinitive Mood. Mouvoir, to move. Mouvant, moving. Mu, ue, moved. Indicative Mood. Present. metis, meat, I move. mouvezy meuvent. Imperfect. mouvois, tnouvoity 1 did move. mouviezy mouvoient. Preterite. mus, muty I moved, or did move* mutes , murent. Future. mouvras, mouvra, I shall or will move. mouvrezy mouvront. Conditional Present. mouvrois, mouvroit, I should or would mouvriezy mouvroient. move. Imperative Mood. meuve, move thou. mouvez, meuvent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qiie que qne Sing. Meuvey meuvesy meuve, that I may move. PJur, MouvionSy mouvifz t meuvent. 256 VERB. Imperfect. 'Que. que que Sing. Musse, musses, mut, that I might move. Plur. Mussions, mussicz, mussent. The compound of this verb is, Emowooir t to stir up, to move. , to be able, to have in one*sj)&toer. Infinitive Mood. Present. *,w Pouvoir, to be able. Part. act. Pouvant, being able. Part. past. Pu, been able. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Puts arpeux,peux, pent, I am able, I can or Plur. Pouvons, pouvcz, pewoent. may. Imperfect. Sing. Pouvois, pouvois, pouvoit, I was able, or I Plur. Pouvions, pouviez, powwicnt. . could. Preterite. . Pus, pus, put, I was able, or I could. Plur. PumeSf piites, parent. Future. Sing. Pourrai, pourras, pourra, I shall or will be Plur. Pourrons, pourrez, pourront. able. Conditional Present. Sing. Pourrois, pourrois, pourroit, I should be able. Plur. Pottrrions, pourriez, pourroient' Imperative Mood wanting. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sragv Puisse, puisses, puisse, that I may be able, Plur. Puissions, puissiez, puusent. or I may. FERB. 239 Imperfect. Que que que Sing. Pusse, pusses, put, that I might be able, or Plur. Pussiont, ^pussiez, pussent. I might. RULE 10. 1. When the words can, may, could, 'or might, express an absolute or permissive power, or a possibility of doing a thing, can and may are rendered by the present tense of the indicative of this verb. Ex. Je puis vous vendre un bon I can sell you a good horse, cheval, s'il vous en fold if you want one. un; Vous pouvez oiler au bal, You may go to the ball, maif revenez <5 dix heures; but come back at tea o'clock. 2. May, expressing a wish, is rendered by the present tense of the subjunctive. Ex. Puissiez-vous etre heureux ! May you be happy ! 3. .Could is rendered by one of the following tenses, viz. the imperfect, preterite definite, or indefinite, or con- ditional present : and might by the last tense. Ex. Je ne pouvois pas mieux I could do no better. faire, II ne put pas venir avec He could not come with us nous la semaine passee, last week. Vous pourriez vous tromper You might mistake as well aussi bien que lui, as he. 4?. Could or might, being joined to the verb to have, im- mediately followed by a participle past, must be rendered by the conditional past of the above verb, with the partici- ple turned into the present of the infinitive mood. Ex. J'aurois pu vous le dire hier I could have told it to you au soir, last night. Vous auriez pu le faire en You might have done it in trois jours, three days. SAVOIK, to knoiv something. , ~^- Infinitive Mood. Present. Savoir, to know. Part. act. Sachant, knowing. Part. past. Su, ne, known. 260 VERB. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Sais, Plur. Savons t Sing. Savois t Plur. Savions 9 sais t sait, I know. . .-5 savez, savent. Imperfect savois, savoit, I did know, or knew. saviez, savoient. Sing. SMS, Plur. Sing. Saiiral, Plur. Sing. Saurois,* Plur. Saurions t Sing. Plur. Sac/ions, Que Sing. SacAe,f Plur. Sachions, Sing. Plur. Suasions, Preterite. SMS, sirf, I knew, or did know, sates, surent. Future. sauras, saura, I shall or will know. saurez 9 sauront. Conditional Present. saurois, sauroit, I should or would sauriez, sauroient. know. Imperative Mood. Present. Sache, sache, know thou. sachez, sachent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que que saches, sache, that I may know. sachiez, sachent. Imperfect. susses, sut, that I might know. sussiez, sussent. * This tense, conjugated negatively, is often Englished by cannot. Ex* Je ne saurois vous le dire, I cannot tell it to you. + We sometimes employ the present of the subjunctive of this verb in- stead of the indicative : but it is never to be used without the negation pas, and most commonly in answering a question. Ex. JLe rot ira-t-il a la comJdie ? Will the king go to the play ? Pas queje sache, Not that I know of. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Present. Part. act. Part. past. Vaux, Valons, Valois, Valions, Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Valus, Volumes, VERB. VALOIR, to be "worth. Infinitive Mood. Valoir, to be worth. Volant, being worth. Vain, been worth. Indicative Mood. Present. vaux, vaut, I am worth. valez, valent. Imperfect. valois, valoit, I was worth. valiez, valoient. Preterite. valus, valut, I was worth. volutes, valurent. Future. Vaudrai, vaudras, vaudra, I shall or will be Vaudrons, vaudrez, vaudront. worth. Conditional Present. Vaudrois, vaudrois, vaudroit, I should or would Vaudrions, vaudriez, vaudroient. be worth. The Imperative Mood is wanting. Subjunctive Mood. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Quc Vaille, Valions, que que vailles, vaille, that I may be worth. valiez, vaillent. Imperfect. Valusse, valusses, valut, that I might be worth. ValussionSy valussiez, valussent. 208 VERB. The compound of this verb i, Prevaloir, to prevail, which is conjugated as Valoir ; but we say much better in the present tense of the sub- junctive, v Queje preval-e, es, e; ions, iez, ent. Present. Part. act. Part. past. VOIR, to see. Infinitive Mood. Voir t to see. Voyant, seeing. Vuy ue, seen. Indicative Mood. Present. vois, voity I see. voyez, voient. Imperfect. voyois, voyoit, I did see. voyieZy voyoient. Preterite. vis, vit, I saw, or did see. vtteSy virent. Future. verrasy verra, I shall or will see. verrez, verront. Conditional Present. verroit, I should or would see. Sing. Plur. VoyonSy Sing. Voyois, Plur. Voyions, Sing. Vis, Plur. VimeSy Sing. Verrai, Plur. Verrons, Sing. Verroisy Plur. Verrions, verriez, verroient. Sing. Plur. Voi/ons, tx Imperative Mood. Vois, voie, see thou. voient. Plur. VoyionSy Subjuar'ive Mood. Present. que que votes, voify that I may see. voyiez, voient. VERB 26$. Imperfect. Que que que Sing. Visse, visses, vtt, that I might see. Plur. Fissions, vissiez, vissent. Entrevoir, to have a glimpse Prcvoir, to foresee. of. Pourvoir, to provide. Revoir, to see again. PREVOIR differs from voir in the future. Ex. Sing. Prevoirai, prevoiras, privoira. Plur. Prevoirons, prevoirez, prevoirontj And, Conditional Present. Sing. Prevoirois, prevoirois prevoiroit. Plur. Prevoirions, prevoiriez, prevoiroient. POUR VOIR makes in the preterite, Sing. Paurvus, pourvus, pourvut. Plur. Pourvumes, pourvutes, pourvurent. Future. Sing. Pourvoirai, pourvoiraS) pourvoira. Plur. Pourvoirons, pourvoirez, pourvoiront. Conditional Present. Sing. Pourvoirois, pourvoirois, pourvoiroit. Plur. Pourvoirions, pourvoiriez, pourvoiroient. Subjunctive Mood. Imperfect. Sing. Pourvusse, poitrvusses, pourvut. Plur. Pourvussions, pourvussiez, pouroussent. VOULOIR, to be luilling. Infinitive Mood. Present. Vouloir, to be willing. Part. act. Voulant, being willing. Part. past. Voulu, ue, been willing. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Veur, veux, vent, I am willing, or I will. Plur. Voulons voulez veulenf. 264 VERB. Imperfect. Sing. Voulois, voulois, vouloif, I was willing, or I Plur. Voulions, vouliez, vouloient. would. Preterite. Sing. Voulus, voulus, voulut, I was willing, or I Plur. Voulumes, voulutes, voulurent. would. Future. Sing. Voudrai, voudras, voudra, I shall be willing, or Plur. Voudrons, voudrez, voudront. I will. Conditional Present. Sing. Voudrois, voudrois, voudroit, I should be will- Plur. Voudrions, voudriez, voudroient. ing, or I would. Imperative Mood.* Plural. Veuillez, be ye willing ; be so kind as. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Veuille, veuilles, veuille, that I may be will- Plur. Voulions, vouliez, veuilknt. ing. Imperfect. Sing. Voulusse, voulusses, voulut, that I might be will- Plur. Voulussions, voulussiez, voulussent. ing. RULE 11. 1. When the words luill or would signify a will, choice, or deliberation in the agent, and can be ex- pressed by choose or chose, WILL is rendered in French by the present of the indicative mood, or future, of this verb. Ex. Je veux y aller, et luipar- I ivill, or choose to, go ler moi-meme, there, and speak to him myself; II ne veut pas manger y He ivill not eat, or does not choose to eat; Je leferai quandje voudrai, I will do it when I please ; * We give to this verb the second person plural of the imperative on tbe authority of most excellent writers. VERB. 265 2. And would is to be rendered by one of the following tenses, viz. the imperfect, preterite, definite or indefinite, or conditional present. Ex. Sije voulois, je vous dirois If I would, or chose, I could oH elle demeure, tell you where she lives. 7/voulut absolument partir He would absolutely, or hier, absolutely chose, to set out yesterday. Que voudriez-uoMS que je What would you have me fsse ? do ? 3. When tuould is joined to the verb to have immediately followed by a participle past, they are to be rendered by the preterpluperfect or conditional past of the above verb vouloir with the participle past turned into the present of the infinitive mood. Ex. Sifavois voulu lui parler, If I would have spoken to> him, or had I chosen to speak to him. Vous n'auriez pas voulu You would not have taken prendre les armes, si, fyc. up arms, if, &c. Nous aurions pu I'arreter, We could have stopped si nous eussions voulu, him, if we would, or had chosen. EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND THEIlt:,.,, COMPOUNDS. Why do not you sit down, sir? You Pourquoi, adv. come to see me very seldom. Let us sit down upon. rarement, adv. the grass. Do not make (so much) noise, I cannot herbe, f. faire, v. tant, adv. learn my lesson. Do you know what has apprendre, v. est happened to her ? No, I do not.* As soon as he arriver, v. Aussitot que, c. saw he could not make her hear reason, he went entendre, v. sen away.- -We went there ourselves, and soon aller, v. nous-memes bient6t, adv. knew what she asked. See the letter she wrote me. ecrire t v. * See the observation, p. 184. 866 VERB. We will not sit down till you have determined que ne se determiner , v. to set out The first time 1 saw your sister, she a fois, f. pleased me.' I would sit down upon the grass, if it plaire, v. were not so damp. Mrs. P. desired me to tell you bumide, adj. prier, v. dire, v. she could not come to see you this week, but pouvoir, cond. semaine, f. she would certainly come at the beginning certainement, adv. commencement, m. of next month. Cannot you lend* me three or four mois, m. preter, v. guineas ? If I would, I could soon know whether guinee, f. bientot, adv. si, c. Mrs. D. has seen your aunt or not. The last time I tante, f. non was in the park, I could not distinguish her on account of d cause, p. the trees that were between her and me ; (I had only a) je ne fis que glimpse of her. -This cloth is not worth five shil- drap, m. lings a yard, but its colour becomes you very well. Do you not see the defects of it ? When you know de/aut, m. (by the fut.) your lesson, come and repeat it to me.' Did you not ' an repcter, v. know that Mr. A. was to marry Miss B. ? 1 knew epouser, v. it, but. I was not willing to tell your brother of it. mais, c. parler, v. I believe you could learn your lessons apprendre, v. much better, if you would. Could you beaucoup, adv. lend me your horse for two or three days ? If pr&er, v. jour, m. your brother come with me, will he be able to follow avec, p. pouvoir sui-ore, v. ^Observe that the verbs pouvoir and voulobr always govern the follow- ing verb without the assistance of any preposition . VERB. 267 me?* What will you lay that he will not come parier, v. without his sister ? This room can contain about environ, p. a hundred people. Could they see so great an altera- personne, f. change- tion without being vexed (at it) ? It merit, m. sans, p. Jfiche, p. p. en, pro. (is better) to be unfortunate than criminal. valoir mieux malheureux, adj. He is incapable of commanding others, who cannot command himself, f His best coat was not se commander a lui meme habit, m. worth two-pence when he arrived from Germany. sou, m. Allemagne, f. We saw them yesterday. -They did not foresee what hier, adv. would happen to them. We ought to make a arriver, v. devoir, v. Jaire, v. judicious choice (of those) friends, to whom we judicieux, adj. choix, m. des intend to give our confidence. Do you know vouloir, v. confiance, f. where Miss B. lives ? Yes, I do (know it), and I see ou, adv. demeurer, v. her (every day) at her window. Why will you not tons les jours fenetre, f. tell it me ? She wouid marry him in spite of voulut epouser, v. en, p. depit, m. all her relations. It is for this reason her father parent, m. Ce, pro. says he will never see her again. 1 have spoken of dire, v. your wine to two friends of mine : one has money, but he will not buy; the other would buy, but he has no veut voudroit money. Some told me that your brother could not pay me, others told me that he would not We regu- * Read the note on vouloir and pouvoir, p. 266. f Say, that is incapable to command to others, who cannot^ om.nafdto himself; CELUI-LA EST, &c. N 2 268 VERB. larly pay all that we owe, but he says that he will pay nobody. All the finest talents united are not worth reunir, v. one virtue. Virtue is a quality which we cannot on, pro. praise (too much) Severity and rigour may excite louer, \. trap, adv. Severite, f. rigueur, f. fear, but not love. You saw with what goodness crainte, f. amour, m. bont6, f. she received him. 1 would not tell her what I think recevoir, v. about it, 'for fear of giving her the least subject of efevp. complaint.- If you foresee the danger, why do you not plainte, f. endeavour to avoid it ? They were willing to withdraw, tdcher, v. de eviter, v. se retirer, v. but your brother hindered them from it, and desired empccher, v. en prier, v. them to sit down again. You can speak to Mr. B. de purler, v. whenever you please, but I may not take that quandy adv. vouloir, v. prendre, v. liberty. Why may you not ? Ydu know the savoir esteem and friendship that I have for him : you know estime, f. that his father is one of my oldest friends ; you ancien, adj. know yourself the merit of both. He would not connoitre, sell me these buckles under four guineas. vendre, v. boucle, f. d mains de, p. I will not see your brother (any more), but I will plus, adv. see you again as soon as I can. Every body (by the fut.) thinks that, if they would have pursued the enemy poursuivre, v. briskly, they might have ended the war on that vigour eusement, adv. Jinir, v. *" day. c^- Should we see ourselves reduced to so great ' v. VERB. 269 difficulties ? * If (I would have) believed him, he j'avois voulu croire, v. would have persuaded me to go to Italy with him. de He could have done his work in less -than ten mi- auroit pu Jaire, v. en, p. de nutes, if he had not amused himself in reading. ctoit s'amuser, v. a lire, v. If you want that book, you may take it, it is at avoir besoin de a, your service. If he sold all his horses now, the vendoit best of them would not be worth ten guineas. We x von might have danced till f (twelve o'clock) if that jusgu" d, p. minuit, m. had not happened. Oh! my children, may you be happy, J and never bewail the moment of your Jieurettx, adj. pleurer, v. birth ! 1 spoke to her (a long while), but could not naissance, f. long-terns, adv. persuade her to come with me. May I go and see de ** him ? Yes, you may, but come back as soon as le pouvez aussil6t que t C. you can. le (by the fut.) VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. ABSOUDRE, to absolve, to acquit. Infinitive Mood. Present. Absoudre, to absolve. Part. act. Absolvant, absolving. Part. past. Absous, oute, absolved. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Absous, absous, absout, I absolve. Plur. Absolvons, absolvez, absolvent. * See the observation on should, page 1 98. } See Rule 10, part 4, page 259. j: See Rule 10, part 2, page 259. *TO VERB. Imperfect. Sing. Absolvois, absolvois, absolvoit, I did absolve. Plur.;; Absohions, absolviez, absolvoient. Preterite is wanting. Future. Sing. Absoudrai, absoudras, absoudra, I shall or will Plur. Absoudrons, absoudrez, absoudront. absolve. Conditional Present. Sing. 4bsoudrois, absoudrois, absoudroit, I should, 8fc. Plur. AbsoudrionSf absoudriez, absoudroient. absolve. Imperative Mood. Sing. -^-^T p*^ Absous, absolve, absolve thou. Plur. Absolvons, absolvez, absolvent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Absolve, absolves, absolve, that I may absolve. Plur. Absolvions, absolviez, absolvent. Imperfect is wanting. SODDRE, to solve (the primitive of this verb) is used only in the present tense of the infinitive mood. The other compounds are, Dissoudre, to dissolve. Resoudre, to resolve. Dissoudre has the same tenses wanting as absoudre. Resoudre has its participle past, resolu, resolue t when it means determined, and resous, when it denotes the transition of one thing into another. Ex. Le soleila resous le Lrouillard, The sun has turned the fog en pluie, into rain. Resous admits of no feminine. Preterite. \ Sing. Resolus, resolus, resolut. Plur. Rcsoltimes, resolutes, resolurent. VERB. *Tl Subjunctive Mood. Imperfect. Sing. Resolussc, resolusses, resolut. Plur. Re&olussions, resolussiez, rfoolussent. ASTREINDRE, to oblige; ATTEINDRE, to reach, to hit, to attain, to overtake, and AVEINDRE, to reach, to fetch out, are conjugated like CRAINDRE. ASTREINDRE and AVEINDRE are nearly obsolete. BATTRE, to beat. Infinitive Mood. Present. Batlre, to beat. Part act. Battant, beating. Fart past. Battu, ue, beaten. Indicative Mood, Present. Sing. Bats, bats, bat, I beat, or am beating. Plur. Battons, battez, battent. Imperfect. Sing. Battois, battois, battoit, I did beat, or was Plur. Battions, batliez, battoient. beating. Preterite. Sing. Battis, battis, battit, I beat, or did beat. Plur. Batttrnes, battites, battirent. Future. Sing. Battrai, battras, battra, I shall or will beat. Plur. Battrons, battrez, battront. Conditional Present. Sing. Battrois, battrois, battroit, I should, Sfc. beat. Plur. Battrions, battriez, battroient. 272 VERB. Imperative Mood. Sing. Plur. Buttons t Que Sing. Batte, Plur. BattionSf Bats, battez, batte, beat them. battent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que que battes, batte, that I may beat, battiez, battent. Imperfect. Sing. Battisse, battisses, battit, that I might beat. Plur. Battissions, battissiez, battisscnt. The compounds of this verb are, Abattre, to pull down, to Se debattre, to struggle. throw down. Rabat t re, to abate, to beat Combattre, tb fight. down. Dtbattre, to debate. Rebatftfy to beat again. BOIRE, to drink. Infinitive Mood. Present. Boire, to drink. Part. act. Buvant, drinking. Part. past. Bu, ue, drunk. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. BoiSy bois, boit, I drink, or am drinking. Plur. Buvons, buvez, boivent. Imperfect. Sing. Buvois, buvois, buvoit, I did drink, or was Plur. Buvions, biiviez, buvoient. drinking. Preterite. Sing. Bus,, bus t but, I drank, or did drink. Plur. Bumes, biite&> burent* VERB. 273 Sing. Boirai, Plur. Boirons, Future. boiras, boira, I shall or will drink. boirez, boiront. Conditional Present. Sing. Boirois, boirois, boiroit, I should, 8$c. drink. Plur. Boirions, boiriez, boiroient. Imperative Mood. Sing. Bois, boive, drink thou. Plur. Buvons, buvez, boivent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Boive, boives, boive, that I may drink. Plur. Buvions, buviez, boivent. Imperfect. Sing. Busse, busses, but, that I might drink. Plur. BussionSy bussiez, bussent. Boire dans quelque chose is, To drink out o/'something. Imboire, to imbibe ; we have preserved only its parti- ciple imbu. BRAIRE, to bray. This verb is seldom used, except in the present tense of the infinitive mood, and the third person singular and plural of the present, future, and conditional, of the indi- cative mood. Infinitive, Braire, to bray. Present, indicative, // brait, Us braient. Future, // braira, Us brairont. Condi- tional, II brairoit, Us brairoient.This verb expresses the braying of an ass. BRUIRE, to roar t to make a great noise. This verb is used only in the present of the infinitive mood, and in the third persons of the imperfect of the in- K 5 874 VERB. dicative : il bruyoit, Us bruyoient. Its participle active, bruyant, is more commonly used as an adjective. CEINDRE, to gird, and its compound, ENCEINDRE, to enclose, to encompass, are conjugated like CRAIXDRE. CIRCONCIRE, to circumcise, is conjugated like CONFIRE, but has its participle past ending in is, ise, instead of it. CONCLURE, to conclude. Infinitive Mood. Present. Conclure, to conclude. Part. act. Concluant, concluding. Part. past. Conclu, tie, concluded. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Conclus, conclus, conclut, I conclude. Plur. Concluons. concluez, concluent. Imperfect. Sing. Concluois, concluois, concluoit, I did conclude. Plur. Conditions, concluiez, concluoient. Preterite. Sing. Conclus, cpnclus, conclut, I did conclude, or Plur. Conclumes, conclutes, conclurent. concluded. Future. Sing. Conclurai, concluras, conclura, I shall or will Plur. Conclurons, conclurez, concluront. conclude. Conditional Present. Sing- jConclurois, conclurois, concluroit, I should,, fyc. Plur. *onclurions, concluriez, concluroient. conclude. VERB. 2T5 Imperative Mood. Sing. Conclus, conclue, conclude thou. Plur. Concluons, concluez, concluent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Conclue, conclues, conclue, that I may conclude. Plur. Concluions, concluiez, concluent. Imperfect. Sing. Conclusse, conclusses, conclut, that I might con- Plur. Concessions, conclussiez, conclussent. elude. CONDUIRE, to conduct, to lead, to carry. Infinitive Mood. Present. Conduire, to conduct. Part. act. Conduisant, conducting. Part. past. Conduit, te t conducted. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Conduis, conduis, conduit, I lead, Sfc. Plur. Conduisons, conduisez, conduisent. Imperfect. Sing. Conduisois, conduisois, conduisoit, I did lead. Plur. Conduisions, conduisiez, conduisoient. Preterite. Sing. Conduisis, condttisis, conduisit, I led. Plur. Conduisimes, conduisites, conduisirent. Future. Sing. Conduirai, conduiras, conduira, I shall or will lead. Plur. Conduirons, conduirez, conduiront. Conditional Present. Sing. Conduirois, conduirois t conduiroit,Ishou\d,SfC.leSid. Plur. Conduirions, conduiriez, conduiroient. 276 Imperative Mood. Sing- Conduis, conduise, lead thou. Plur. Conduisons, conduisez, conduisenf. Que Sing. Conduise, Plur. Conduisions, Subjunctive Mood. Present. gue que conduises, conduise, that I may lead. conduisiez, conduisent. Imperfect. Sing. Conduisisse, conduisisses, conduisit, that I might Plur. Conduisissions, conduuissiez, conduisissent. Its compound is Reconduire, to lead again. lead. CONFIRE, to preserve. Infinitive Mood. Present. Confire, to preserve. Part. act. Confisant, preserving. Part. past. Confit, te, preserved. Sing. Confis, Plur. Confisons, Sing. Confisois, Plur. Confisions, Sing. Plur. ConfimeS) Sing. Plur. Con/irons, Indicative Mood. Present. confis, confit, I preserve^ confises, confisent. Imperfect. confisois, confisoit, I did preserve, confisiez, confisoient. Preterite. confis, confit, I preserved. confTtes t confirent. Future. confirasy confira, I shall or wfll confirez t confiront, preserve. VERB. 21 -J Sing. Confirois, Plur. Confirions, Sing. Plur. ConfisonSy Que Sing. Confise, Plur. Confisions, Sing. Confisse, Plur. Conjissionsy Conditional Present, confiroisy confiroit, I confiriez > conjiroient. should, fyc. preserve, Imperative Mood. Confis, confise, preserve thou,. conjisez, confisent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que gue conjisesy cmifise, that I may pre* conjisiez, conjisent. serve, Imperfect. confisses, con/it, that I might pre- confissiez, confissent. serve. CONNO1TRE, to ^wotw, to be acquainted i>oiih t somebody* Infinitive Mood. Present. Connottre, to know. Part. act. Connoissant t knowing. Part. past. Connu, ue, known. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Connois, connois, connoit, I know* Plur. Connoissons, connoissez, connois&ent. Imperfect. Sing. Connoissois, connoissois, connoissoit, I did know, Plur. ConnoissionSy connoissiez, connoissoient. Preterite. Sing. Connus, connus, connut, I knew* Plur. ConnunteSf connutes, connurent. Future. Sing. Connoitrai, connoitras, connoftra, I shall; Plur. Connoitrons, connoitrez, conno'itront* 2T8 VERB. Conditional Present. Sing. Connoitrois, connoitrois, connoitroit, I should, fyc* Plur. Cojinottrionsjconnoitriez, connoitroient. know. Imperative Mood. Slag. Connois, connoisse, know thou. Plur. Connoissons, connoissez, connoissent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que que Sing. Connoisse, connoisses, connoisse, that I may Plur. Connoissions, connoissiez, connoissent. know. Imperfect. Sing. Connusse, connusses, connut, that I might know Plur. Connussions, connussiez, connussent. The compounds of this verb are, Meconnottre, to take for Reconnoitre, to acknowledge, another. to know again. CONSTRUIBE, to construct, to build, is conjugated like CONDUIRE. CONTRAINDRE, to constrain, to compel, to force, is conjugated like CRAINDRE. COUDRB, to sew, to stitch. Infinitive Mood. Present. Coudre, to sew. Part. act. Cousant, sewing. Part. past. Cotwi/, ue t sewed. Indicative Mood. Present. couds, coud, I sew, or am sewing. cousez, consent. VERB. 279 Sing. Consols, Plur. Cousions, Sing. Cousis, Plur. CousimeSy Sing. Coudrai, Plur. Coudrons, Sing. Coudrois, Plur. Coudrions, Sing. Plur. Cousons, Que Sing. Couse, Imperfect. cousois, cousoit, I did sew, or was cousiez, cousoient. sewing. Preterite. cousis, cousit, I sewed. cousites, cousirent. Future. coudras, coudra, I shall or will sew. coudrez, coudront. Conditional Present. coudrois, coudroit, I should, fyc. sew. coudriez, coudroient. Imperative Mood. Couds, cousez, couse, sewthou. consent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que que couse, that I may sew. Plur. Cousions, cousiez, consent. Imperfect. Sing. Cousisse, cousisses, cousit, that I might sew. Plur. Cousissions, cousissiez, cousissent. Its compounds are, Decoudre, to unsew. Recoudre, to sew again. EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. I know * several persons in this country who plusieurs, adj. p ays, m. speak as good French, as if they had been (brought up) bien, adv. eleve, p. p. * Speaking of persons, the verb to know can never be translated by w- wrir, but by connottre. 80 VERB. in France. Do you know Mr. A. ?- Yes, we Out, adv. know him very well ; and though he is rich, I assure you he is not the more charitable for it.- He has been beaten (soundly).- If you knew the question, you would re- comme HJaut. connoitre question, f. solve it in two words. 1 will soon conclude, if you mot, m. think as your brother does. We should beat them, if comme, adv. > Jaute, f. We ran for above two hours, but at last pendant, p. plus de, adv. enfin, adv. your brother overtook him, and brought him back. ramener, *o> You would never see him again, if you knew him. He struggled a long while, but he was soon obliged to terns ', m. (cry for) mercy. This mortification has pulled de demander, v. grdce, f. down his pride, I assure you : however, the judge cependant, adv. has acquitted him of the accusation falsely Jaussementy adv. brought against him. -Mr. R. told me some time intentt-, p. p. contre, p. ago, that he would build a ship on a new plan. What construire will you drink ? 1 will drink nothing but water. Do ne que not drink (so much). If your father were here, you .tant, adv. etoit would not drink (at all). Let us fill our glasses, and du tout. verre, m. drink our friend's health. We beat them because our santt, f. '- parceque t c. troops were better disciplined thaa theirs. disciplinc } p. p. VERB. 881 Come with us, we shall see whether she will know you si, c. again or not.*- If you knew her, I am certain she would please you.- 'The English drink as much plaire, v. autant, adr. tea as the Venetians drink coffee. After tea we the, m. Venetien, m. cafe, m. conducted the ladies to the concert. . When they had explained to us all that had passed, we acknow- se passer, v. ledged we (were in the wrong). Your brother's avoir tort. coat was torn ; but our tailor sewed it up again dechirer t tailleur, m. so skilfully, that his father did not perceive adroitcmcnl, adv. s'apercevoir it. Unsew that gown.- I will sew it to-morrow. en. The Jews and the Mahometans circumcise their chil- Juify m. Mahometan, m. dren (a few) days after their birth. Why do not pcu, adv. de naissance, f. you preserve some fruits this year ? He would not annee, f. know you if he saw you now. Did you ask him whe* d present, adv. hit, si, c. ther he (was acquainted with) any of these ladies ? connoitre I know Mr. Y., but I do not trust to him. You will sejier, v. force your father to punish you, if you do not behave (1 se comporter, v. better. The last time we went to Vauxhall, we drank three bottles of (Champaign wine). The enemy beat vin de Champagne. us on the eighteenth, but we beat them two days after. Ol What will you drink, ladies ? We shall willingly madame, f. volontiers, adv. * WhttJ the vctb is understood after not, this negation is to be ren- dered by nan* 232 VERB. drink some wine ; for we have not drunk any since depnis, p. our departure from France. Drink, said she to me> depart, m. (out of) that cup, the only token which d coupe, f. seul, adj. marque % f. your father has left us of his love. Virtue laissee, v. affection, f. in indigence is like a traveller whom the wind dans, p. comme and rain compel to wrap himself up in his cloak. pluie, f. de envelopper, v. <<>> de manteau, m.- I would have preserved some fruits this year, but sugar is too dear. Thence we concluded you would trop, adv. De Id, adv. not come to-day. I know nobody in this neighbourhood. voisinage, m. .. i .1 knew your sister again as soon as I saw her. Though you {should take) three dozen of them, I Quand, c. prendriez douzaim, f. could not abate a farthing. The wind was so great, that pourrois Hard, m. vent, m. fort, it threw down one or two trees in our garden*. GRAIN DRE, tojear, to be afraid. Infinitive Mood. Present. Craindre, to fear. Part. act. Craignant, fearing. Part. past. Craint, ainte, feared. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Grains, crains, craint, I fear, or am afraid. .Plur. Craignons, craignez, craignent. Imperfect. Sing. Craignois, craignois, craignoit, I did fear, or Plur. Craignions t craigniez, craignoient. was afraid. Preterite. Sing. Craignis, craignis, craignit, I feared. Plur. Craignimes, craignites, craignirent. VERB. Future. Sing. Craindrai, craindras, craindra, I shall or will Plur. Craindrons, craindrez, craindront. fear. que craigne, that I may fear. craignent. Conditional Present. Sing. Craindrois, craindrois, craindroit, I should, fyc. Plur. Craindrions, craindriez, craindroient. fear. Imperative Mood. Sing. Cretins, craigne, fear thou. Plur. Craignons, craignez, craignent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qtte que Sing. Craigne, craignes, Plur. Craignions, craigniez, Imperfect. Sing. Craignisse, craignisses, craigmt, that I might fear. Plur. Craignissions, craignissiez,craignis$ent, CROIRE, to believe. Infinitive Mood. Present. Croire, to believe. Part. act. Croyant, believing. Part. past. Crue, ue, believed. Indicative Mood. Present. crow, croit, I believe. croyez, croient. Imperfect. croyois, croyoit, I did believe. croyiez, croyoient. Preterite. crus, crut, I believed. crutes, crurent. Future. croiras, croira, I shall or will be- croirez. croiront. lieve. Sing. Crow, Plur. Croyons, Sing. Croyois, Plur. Croyions, Sing. Crus, Plur. Grumes, Sing. Croirai, Plur. Croirons, 284 VERB. Conditional Present. Sing. CroiroiSy croirois y croiroity I should, tye. be- Plur. Croirions, croiriez t croiroient. lieve. Imperative Mood. Sing. Crow, croie, believe thou. Plur. Crayons , [croyez, croient. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que Sing. Croiey croies, Plur. Croutons, croyiez t que croie, that I may believe. croient. Imperfect. Sing, Crusse, crusses, crut, that I might believe. Plur. Crussions, crussiez t crussent. CROITRE, to grow. And its compounds, ^ccroUrCy to accrue, Recroitre, to grow again. Decrottre, to decrease, to grow less., are conjugated like CONNOITRE. CUIRE, to bakey to boil, often Englished by to do t and its compound RECUIRE, to boil again , DEDUIRE, to deduct, to abate, and DETRUIRE, to destroy / are conjugated like CONDUIRE. DIRE, to say, to tell. Infinitive Mood. * Present. Dire, to say. Part. act. Disant, saying. Part. past. Dit t te, said. Sing. Dis, Plur. Disons, Sing. Disois, Plur. Disions, Sing. Dis, Plur. Dimes, Sing. Dirai, Plur. Ditons, Sing. Dirois, Plur. Dirions, Sing. Plur. Disons, Que Sing. Zh'se, Plur. Disions, VERB. Indicative Mood. 285 Present. cfo, rf/V, I say, or am saying. disent. Imperfect. cfoozV, I did say, or was say- disiez, disoient. ing. Preterite. dites, diras, direz, dit, I did say, or said. dirent. Future. dira t I shall or will say. diront. Conditional Present. dirois, diroit, I should, Sfc. say. diriez, diroient. Imperative Mood. Dis, disc, say thou. dites,* disent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que discs, disiez, dise, that I may say. disent. Imperfect. Sing. Disse, disses, dit, that I might say. Plur. Dissions, dissiez, dissent. The compounds of this verb are, Contredire, to contradict. Interdire, to interdict, to Se dedire, to unsay, to re- forbid, tract, to recant. Prcdire, to foretel. * AH the above compounds (Redire excepted, which is conjugated like its primitive) make isez instead of iles; unAMaudire doubles its * through the whole verb. Ex. A'oiw maudissons, vousmauditsez, Us maudissent, 5cc. 286 VERB. Medire de, to slander, to Redire, to say, or tell speak ill of. again. Maudire, to curse. ECLORE, to hatch, to open, to come to life. This verb is seldom used but in the infinitive mood, present tense, in the participle past, and in the third per- sons of the following tenses. Infinitive Mood. Present. Eclore, to open, to hatch, to come to life. Part. past. Eclos, ose. Indicative Mood. Sing. 11 eclot. Plur. Us eclosent. Future. Sing. // eclora. Plur. Us ecloront. Conditional Present. Sing. 11 ecloroit. Plur. Us ecloroient. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Sing. Qu'il eclose- Plur. Qu' Us eclosent. It is only used when speaking of oviparous animals or of flowers. The primitive of the above verb is Clore, to shut, to surround, and another compound, Enclore, to shut, to surround, with walls, hedges, or ditches. to write. Infinitive Mood. Present. crire, to write. Part. act. bcrivant, writing. Part. pass. JEcrit, ite, written. VERB. 287 Sing. JLcris, Plur. Ecrivons, Sing, 'envois, Plur. Ecrivions, Sing. Ecrivis, Plur. licrivimes, Sing. Ecrirai, Plur. Ecrirons, Sing. / crirois, Plur. f-cririons, Indicative Mood. Present. ecrw, &nV, I write, or am writing. ecrivez- ecrivent. Imperfect. ecnvois, ecriviez. ecrivoit, I did write, or was ecrivoient. writing. Preterite. ecrivis, ecrivit, I wrote, or did write. ecrivties, ecrivirent. Future. ecriras, tcrira, I shall or will write. ecrirez, ecriront. Conditional Present. ecrirois, ieriroit, I should, 8$c> write. ecririez, ecriroient. Sing. Plur. Ecnvons, Imperative Mood, Acris, ecrivez, ecrive, write thou. ecrivent. gue tcrive, that I may write. ecrivent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que Sing, ficrive, ecrives, Plur. Ecrivions, ecriviez, Imperfect. Sing. Acrivisse, ecrivisses, ecrivit, that I might write. Plur. Ecrivissions, ecrivissiez, ecrivissent, The compounds of this verb are, Decrire, to decribe. Proscrire, to proscribe, to Inscrire, to inscribe. outlaw, to banish. Prescrire, to prescribe. Souscrire, to subscribe. Transcrire, to transcribe. ( VERB. ENDUIRE, to do over, is conjugated like CONDUIRE. , to put out, is conjugated like CRAINDRE. EXCLURE, to exclude, is conjugated like CONCLURE. Its participle past is exclus, excluse, and exclu> exclue ; the first of these participles is very little used. FAIRE, to make, to do. Infinitive Mood. Present. Faire, to make. Part. act. Faisant, making. Part. past. Fait, te, made. Sing. Fats, Plur. Faisons Indicative Mood. Present. fais, foit, I make, or am making. Jaites, Jbnt. Imperfect. Sing. Faisois, Jaisois, Jaisoit, I did make, or was Plur. Faisions, Jaisiez, Jaisoient. making. Preterite. Jis, Jit, I made, or did make. files, Jirent. Future. feras, fera, I shall or will make. Jerez, Jeront. Conditional Present. Jerois, feroit, I should, $c. make. Jeriez, Jeroient* Sing. Fis, Plur. Fzmes, Sing. Ferai, Plur. Ferons, Sing. Ferois, Plur. Ferions, Sing. Imperative Mood. Fais, fasse, make thou. Plur. Faisons, faites, fassent. VERB. 289 Subjunctive Mood. Present. -Que gue que Sag. Fosse, Passes, fasse, that I may make. m/ar. Passions, fassiez, fassent. Imperfect. Sing. Ftsses, fisses, fit, that I might make. Pfar. Fissions, jissiez, Jissent. The conapounds of this verb are, CoMirtfaire, to counterfeit, Refaire, to do, or make up to mimic, again. De/kirc, to undo, to de- Rede/hire, to undo again. foil. Satisfaire, to satisfy. Se tlffeurg, to get rid of, to Surfaire, to exact, to ask too pant with. much. to Jzign, to dissemble, to pretend, is conjugated like CRAINDRE. FRIRE, to fry. Thi* TCtl is more elegantly used in the present of the io&utive with the verb /hire, which is to be put in the same one auad person in whichyh/ is in English. Ex. Faitesfrire ce poisson, Fry that fish. Its participle past \sfrit, ite, fried. to induce; INSTRUIRE, to instruct; and INTRO- JMJEKE, to introduce, are conjugated like CONDUIRE. oin, and its compound, Enjoindre, to enjoin, are conjugated like CRAINDRE. XIRE, to read. Infinitive Mood. Present. Lire, to read. Part. act. Lisant, reading. Part. past. Lu, ue, read. Sing. Lis, Plur. Lisons, Sing. Lisois, Flur. Litions, Sing. Lits, Plur. L&mes, Sing. Lirai, Plur. Lirons, Sing. Lirois, Plur. Lirions, Sing. Plur. Lisons, Qe Sing. Z,i5(T, Plur. Lisions, Indicative Mood. Present. JiV, I read, or am reading. Imperfect. lisois, lisoit, I did read, or was lisoient, reading. Preterite. lus, luty I did read, or read. lurent. Future. liras, lira, I shall or will read. lirez, liront. Conditional Present. lirois, liroit, I should or would liriez, liroient. read. Imperative Mood. Lis, lisez, lise, read thou. lisent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. qut Use, that I may read. lisent. que tises, tisiez, Imperfect Sing. Luste, lusses, lut, that I might read. Plur. Lussions, lussiez, lussent. Its compounds are, Hire, to elect. Relire, to read again. LUIRE, to shine, and its compound Reluirc, to glitter, are conjugated like CONDUIRB ; but they take no t at the end of their participle past. VERB. METTRE,* to put. Infinitive Mood. Present. Meltre, to put. Part. act. Mettant, putting. Part. Past. Mis, mise, put. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Mets, Plur. Meltons, mets, met, I put, mettez, met lent. or anfputting. Imperfect. Sing. Mettois, Plur. Meltions, mettois, mettoit, I mettiez, meltoient. did ."put," or was putting. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Mis, Mimes, Mettrai, Mettrons, Preterite. mis, mit, I did put, or put. mites, mirent. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Mettrois, Mettrions, Mettons, mettras, niettra, I shall or will put. mettrez, mettront. Conditional Present. mettrois, mettroit, I should or would mettriez, mettroient. put. Imperative Mood. Mets, meltf, put thou. mettez, mettent. * Mettre, when conjugated as a reflective verb, expresses the besfmning'or continuation of an action or application; it is then constantly followed by the preposition a and the present of the infinitive. It is rendered, In English, by the rerb to begin. Ex. Toutts lesfois quilta voii, il se met Erery time he sees her,' he begins Jl rire. luugliing. II s'est mis tout de lion a 6tudier, He hat begun to study in earnest. o 2 VERB. Que Sing. Mette, Plur. Mcttions, Sing. Misse, r. Missions, Subjunctive Mood. Present. ^Mtf qne mettes, mette, that I may put. mcitiez, mettent. Imperfect. mit, that I might put. missent. misses, missiez, The compounds of this verb are, Admettre, to admit. Commeltre, to commit. Compromeltre, to compro- mise. Dcmettre, to turn out, to remove. Se demettre de, to resign. Omettrc, to omit. Permettre, to permit. Promettre, to promise.* Remettre, to deliver up, to" put back again, to re- collect, to put off, to defer. Soumettre, to submit. Transmettre, to transmit. MOUDRE, to grind. Infinitive Mood. Present. Moudre, to grind. Part. act. Moulant, grinding. Part. past. Moulu, ue, ground. Indicative Mood- Present. Sing. Mouds, ' mouds, moud, I grind, or am griud- Plur. Moulons, moulez, moulent. mg. The participle active of this verb (promising), when used adjectively and applied to the mental qualities of somebody, is rendered in French by quipromet, or promettoit, beatcoup, or dorU it y a, or ily awl, be. coup a esptrer.- Ex. Le Major A.ttoit tin officier would consent to that, if you would promise her to M here.' They were playing while you instructed You truly join what is useful to.' vraiment, adv. Vutilz agreeable Do not our soldiers join dexterity toi I'agrealle. adresse^ If you do not take great care of yoorflovcn^ prendre, v. the frost will destroy them. Mr.S. says he wfll fpetxM gefa, f. of his horse at the beginning of next a [monilL commencement, m. You would put out the fire, if, &c. Undo it up again before dinner, and never defer arant, p. <*. r>, morrow what you can do to-day Youx joins to the love of study the desire of surpasaicg her companions. <- Always virtuous, stilf 'IiiiinT|i!!i. compagne, f. tovjours, adv. she makes herself more enemies than friends ; but a * wUl come, when every body will do Lertke que, c. rendre, T* VERB. 297 she deserves. She reads the History of England every meriter t v. day from three o'clock till five. 1 will read depuis heure, f.jusqud, p. your letter as soon as I am dressed. The in- (bythefut.) habille, p. p. habitants of W. have elected Mr. V. W. for their representative in parliament. I was reading Marmon- rcprcsentant, m. an tel's Tales when you came in.. Mr. R. wrote to me Conte, m. entrer, v. some time ago, that when he was in London, the il y a quelque temps ft Earl of E. told him we should soon see a great Comte, m. Itti change in the ministry. He often writes to changement, m. dans, ministere, m. me, and always concludes his letters thus: (Be so kind as terminer ainsi Avoir la bonte to) send me some news, whatever it may be. Put de des soient these books in their places again. 1 believe he did it through spite.: ' Shall I put another trimming par, p. depit, m. garniture, f. to your gown ? 1 read last year a very good book, but I cannot remember the author's name. What grammar do you read ? Whatever merit a master has, he cannot succeed in teaching young people if he do not join prac- a, p. jeunes gens, tice to theory. 1 would put all your china in porcelain, f. that closet, if I had the key of it. You could not cabinet^ m. pourriez do it in ten days, if I did not help you. Why do aider r v. not you abstain from wine, since it hurts you ? puisque, c. faire mal, v. He promised to pay me the tenth of this month, but o 5 298" VERB'. he has now put me off to the third of December. He submitted to it with the greatest patience. - You pro- mise enough, but you seldom keep your word. rarement, adv. tenir, v. Mr. D. is a very promising young man.* - It is Ce t pro. he Who told me, that, before the invention of water and wind-mills, the ancients used to grind their avoir coutume, v. piler corn in mortars. - Will they not admit Mr. Z. ia grain, m. mortier, m. their society ? No, they told me that they will not. The English fleets have performed actions worthy to be faire, v. transmitted to posterity. Your brother promises me every day to amend, but, &c. - Were I their de se corriger r r. master, I would not permit them to go out to-day. - rv.'Ar. leur de I wta writing to you when your servant brought me your **- letter. KAITRE, to be bom, to rise. Infinitive Mood. Present. Naitrc, to be born. Part. act. Naissant, being bora, rising. Part. past. Nc, ce, been born. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Nats, nais, naif, I am born. PIur v Naissons, naissez, naissent. * See the note on Ibis verb, page 193. VERB. Sing. Naissois, Plur. Naissions, Sing. Naquis, Plur. Naquimes, Sing. Naitrai, Plur. Naitrons, Sing. Naitrois, Plur. Natirions, Sing. Plur. Naissons, Q.ue Sing. Naisse, Plur. Nuissions, Imperfect. naissois, naissoit, I was born. naissiez, naissoient. Preterite. naquis, naquit, I was born. naquites, naquirent. Future. naitras, nattra, I shall or will be naitrez, naiiront. born. Conditional Present. naitrois, naitroit, I should, fyc. be naitriez, nailroient. born. Imperative Mood. Nais, naisse, be thou born. naissez, naissent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. qtie que naisse, that I maybe born. naissent. nassez, Imperfect. nayuisses, naqutt, that I might be naquissiez, naquissent. Sing. Naquisse, Plur. Naquissions, The compound of this verb is Renaitre, to be born again, to revive. born. to hurt, is conjugated like CONDUIRE, but makes* in its participle past, nui. It does not take the feminine gender. OINDRE, to anoint. This verb is seldom used, except in speaking of sacred ceremonies, wherein oil is made use of. It is conjugated like CKAINDHE. 300 VERB. PAITRE, to feed, to grazt, PAROITRE, to appear, ft seem,, and its compounds, Comparoitre, to appear, to make one's evidence, Disparoitre, to are conjugated like PEIKDRE, to painty to draw ; PLAINDHE, to pnys PLAINDRE, to complain, are conjugated like CRAIB; PLAIRE, to please. Itjfnitive Mood.- Present. Plaire, to please. Part. act. Plaisant, pleasing. Part. past. Plu. pleased. Indicative Mood- Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Plats, Plaisons, Plaisois, Plaisions, Present. plais, plait. I please. plaisez, j)laiscnt. Imperfect. plaisois, plaisoit, I did please, plaisiez, plaisoient, was * Preterite. Sing. Plus, Plur. PMmes, plus, pint, I pleased, or SA pities, plurent* j**nar_ Future. Sing. Plairai, Plur. Plairons, plairas, plaira, I sbaH or v3 plairez, plairont* pleaK*. Conditional Present. Sing. Plairois, Plur. Plairions, plairois, plairoit, I shoaldorwaid plairiez, plairoicni. f ilcr. Sing. Plur. Plaisons, Imperative Mood. Plais, plaise, please plaise nt. VERB. 301 Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que gue Sing. Plaise, plaises, plaise, that I may please. Plur. PlaisiottSy plai&iez, plaisent. Imperfect. Sing. Plusse, plusses, plut, that I might please. Plur. PlussionSf plussiez, plussent. The compounds of this verb are, Ci>mplaire t to humour. Dtplaire, to displease. PRENDRE, to take. Infinitive Mood. Present. Prendre, to take. Part. act. Prenant, taking. Part, past. Pris, ise, taken. Sing. Prends, Plur. Prenons, Sing. Prenois, Plur. Prenions, Sing. Pm, Plur. Primes, Sing. Prendrai, Plur. Prendrons, JBing. Prendrois, JEtar. Prendrions, ,afliu Indicative Mood. Present. prends, prend, I take, or am prenez, prennent. taking. Imperfect. prenois, prenoit, I did take, or was preniez, prenoient. taking. Preterite. pris, prit, I took, or did take. prites, prirent. Future. prendras, prendra, I shall or will prendrez, prendront. cake. Conditional Present, prendrois, prendroit, I should or prendriez, prendroient. would take. 90S VERB. Imperative Mood. Sing. Prends, prenne, take thou. Plur. PrenonSy prenez, prennent, Subjunctive Mood. Que qne que Sing. Prenne^ prennes, prenne, that I may take. Plur. Prenions, preniez, prennent. <* Imperfect. Sing. Prisse, prisses, prtt, that I might take. Plur. Prissions, prissiez, prissent. The compounds of this verb are, Apprendre, to learn. Entreprendre, to undertake. des nouvelles, to Meprendre, to mistake, to hear of. be deceived. Comprendre, to apprehend, Reprendre, to take again, to to understand, to include. chide, to rebuke. Desapprendre, to unlearn. Surprendre, to surprise. PRODUIRE, to produce; REDUIRE, to reduce, to bring to, are conjugated like CONDUIRE. RESTREINDRE, to restrain, is conjugated like CRAIXDRB. HIRE, to laugh. Infinitive Mood. Present. Eire, to laugh. Part. act. Riant, laughing. Part. past. Hi, laughed. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. /?, ris, rit, I laugh, or am laugh - Plur. Rion$i riez, rient. ing. v Imperfect. Sing. Riois, riois, rioit, I laughed, or was Plur. Riiens, riics, naient. laugking. VERB. SO* Sing. Ris, Plur. Rimes , Sing. Rirai, Plur. Rirons, Sing. Rirois, Plur. Ririons, Sing. Plur. Riotis, Que Sing. Rie, Plur. Riions, Sing. Risse, Plur. Rissions, The compound Preterite. m, nV, I laughed, or did rftes, rirent. laugh. Future. riras, rira, I shall or will laugh. rirez, riront. Conditional Present. rirois, riroit, I should or would nnez, riroient. Imperative Mood. Ris, rie, laugh thou. laugh. Subjunctive Mood. Present. que que ries, rie, that I may laugh. riiez, rient. Imperfect. risses, rit, that I might laugh rissiez, rissent. of this verb is SOURIRE, to smile. BKDUIRE, to seduce, is conjugated like CONDUIRK ; IRE, to suffice, to be sufficient, is conjugated like CON FIRE ; but its participle past, is suffi. SUIVRE, tojotto'vo. Infinitive Mood. Present. Suivre, to follow. Part. act. Suivant, following. Part. past. SW, ie, followed. 304 VERB. Indicative Mood* Present. Sing. Suis, -suis, suit, I follow, or am fol- Plur. Suivons, suivez, suivent. lowing. Imperfect. Sing. Suivois, suivois, suivoit, I did follow, or Plur. Suivions, suiviez, suivoient. was following. Preterite. Sing. Suivis, suivix, suivit, I followed, or did Plur. Suivimes, suivites, suivirent. follow. Future. Sing. Suivrai, suivras, suivra, I shall or will Plur. Suivrons, suivrez, suivront. follow. Conditional Present. Sing. Suivrois, suivrois, suivroit, I should or Plur. Suivrions, suivriez, suivroient. would follow. Imperative Mood. Sing. Suis, suive, follow thou. Plur. Suivons, suivez, suivent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Que que gue Sing. Suive, suives, suive, that I may follow. Plur. Suivions, suiviez, suivent. Imperfect. suivisses, suivit, that I might fol- suivissiez, suivissent. low. The compounds of this verb are, S'Ensuivre, to follow from. Poursuivre, to pursue. Sing. Suivisse, Plur. Suivissions, SE TAIRE, to hold one's tongue, is conjugated like PLAIRE. VERB. 305 TEINDRE, to dye, is conjugated like CRAINDRE. TRADUIHE, to translate, is conjugated like CONDUIRE, TRAIRE, to milk. Infinitive Mood. Present. Traire, to milk. Part. act. Trayant, milking. Part. past. Trait t aite, milked. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Trais, Plur. Trayons t trais, trail, I milk, or am milking. trayez, traient. Sing. Trayois, Plur. Trayions, Imperfect. trayois, trayoit, I trayiez, trayoient. did milk, or was milking. Preterite is wanting. Future. Sing. Trairai, Plur. Traironsy trairas, fraira t I shall or will milk.. trairezy trairont. Sing. Trairois, Plur. Trairionsy Conditional Present. trairoisy trairoit, I frairiezy trairoient. should, fyc. milk. Smg. Plur. Trayons, Imperative Mood. Trais, traie, milk thou. trayezy traienf. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Sing. Traie, Plar. Trayions, que que traiesy traic, that trayiez, traient. Imperfect is wanting. I may milk. f 386 The compounds of this verb are, Abstraire, to abstract. Rentraire, to finedravr. Distraire, to distract. Soustraire, to subtract. Extraire, to extract. VAINCRE, to vanquish, to conquer. Infinitive Mood. Present. Vaincre, to conquer. Part. act. Vainquant, conquering. Part. past. Vaincu, ue, conquered. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Vaincs, vaincs, vainc, I conquer.* Plur. Vainquons} vainquex, vainqucnt. Imperfect. Sing. Vainquois, vainquois, vainquoit, I did conquer.f Plur. Vainquions, vainquiex, vainquoient. Preterite. Smg. Vainquis, vainquis, vainqttit, I conquered. Plur. Vainquimesyvainquites, vainquirent. Future. ii4- Sing. Vaincrai, vaincras, vaincra, I shall or vrill co* Plur. 'Vaincrons, vaincrez, vaincront. quer. Conditional Present, Sing. Vaincrois, vaincrois, vaincroit, I should, $c. con- Plur. Vaincrions, vaincriez, vaincroient. quer. . v t-, . Imperative Mood. Sing. Vaincs, vainque, conquer thou . Plur, Vainquons, vainquez, vainquent. * The singular of this tense is very little used. *- This tense is very seldom used. VERB. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Q,ue que que Sing. Vainque, vainqv.es, vainque, that I may conquer. Plur. Vainquions, vainquiez, vainqnent. Imperfect. Sing. Vainquisse, vainguisses, vainqttlt, that I might coa- Plur. Vainquissions, vninquissiez , vainquissent. quer. The compound of this verb is Convaincre, to convince. VITRE, to live. Infinitive Mood. Present. Vivre, to live. Part. act. Vivant, living. Part. past. V&cu, lived. Indicative Mood. Present. Sing. Vis t Plur. Vivons, Sing. Vivo is, Plur. Vivions, vis, vit, I live, or am living. vivez, vivent. Imperfect. oivois, vivoit, I did live, or was HT- viviez, vivoient. ng- Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Vecus, Vccumes, Vivrons, Vivrois, Vivrions, Preterite. vt'cus, vccut, I lived, or did lire. vec&tes, vecurent. Future. vivras, vivra, I shall or will lire. vivrex, vivront. Conditional Present. vivrois, vivroit, I should or would vivrien,. vivroient. live. 308 VERB. i Imperative Mood. Sing. Vis, vive, live thou. Plur. Vivont, vivez, vivent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qttc que que Sing. Vive, vives, vive, that I may live. Plur. Vivians, viviez, vivent. ... Imperfect. Sing. Vicussc, vtcusses, vecut, that I might live. Plur. Vecussions, vecussiez, vecussent. ' The compounds of this verb are, Revivre f to revive. Survivre, to outlive. EXERCISES OX THE FOREGOING VERBS AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. My brother was born in Paris, on the eighth of February, * Fevrier,m. one thousand seven hundred and eighty-one. Those who seem not to fear death when they are in good health, lorsque, adv. often dread it when they are sick. What does your redouter, v. sister complain of ? The swallows generally disappear hirondeUe, f. towards the end of autumn. You do not seem to pay automne, f. * <* nejaire,v. any attention to what I say to you. This man paints very well, I assure you. Why would you hurt him ? assurer, v. nuire lui he never did you any harm. 1 should pity and jaire, v. de mal, m. succour him, if it were not his fault. You shall ce, pro. disappear as soon as you have executed my orders, (by the fut.) VERB. 309 The last time I saw your sister she appeared to me thoughtful and melancholy. She is a lady that pleases penstf, adj. nitjancoli(jue,ad']. 2 every body. She appears quite young : how old is she ? Does she not learn drawing? Your brother has dessin, m. not included his tailor's bill in the account tailleur, m. memoire, m. which he has given me.- 1 see you do not complain of rendre, v. him without a cause. 1 1 reallyB am4 surprised(at* it,)but raison. en, pro. he always smiles at every thing I tell him. As Tout surprising as this seems to you, yet 1 it 1 is true. que cependant, adv. c'est At last the enemy surprised and defeated them in the Enfin. adv. dans space of twelve days. They might have* taken the espace, m. town three days sooner, but the soldiers were so exhausted epuise, p.p. with fatigue, that they could not even hold their de, p. meme, adv. guns. May these brave men long enjoy the glory jouir de which they have acquired. 1 sincerely wish they may. acquise Children seldom forget, when they conti- rarement, adv. lorsque y v. conti- nually exercise their minds to study. If my nuellment, adv. exercer, v. brother do come this week, as he promised me, if you Or> will, we will go and see him in the country. Does not tOl Mrs. H. appear much concerned at her daughter's death ? affl&i P- P- de When you see Mrs. B., I am certain she will (by the fut.) * See rule 10th part, the 4th page 259. 310 VERB. please you.- Did you never see her ? The children Avez vue who shall be born from this happy marriage, will be naitront de seront the delight of their father and mother. She joins delices, f. pi. to the qualities of the body those of the mind. Take some pears, and carry them to your brother.. Every time I see him, I take him for a foreigner. My sister etranger, m. and I learn French, and understand very well all that (is said) to us in that language. Though you should on dit Quand, c. learn all the rules, they would not (be sufficient) without apprendriez svffire t v. practice. 1 did not understand what you said. Do * t ai compris avez dit. not undertake to undeceive her; believe me you will lose de dtt romper, v. your time. Virtue procures and preserves friendship, obtenir, v. eonscroer, v. but vice produces hatred and quarrels. If you corn- wee, m. haine, f. qiterelle, f. plain to the master, I will complain to the mistress. Though you should undertake to prove the cootrary, she Quond de would not believe you. Why did you not take the same road as we ? He (is not pleased) in his situation, now que K se plaire, v. he sees all the dangers of it. He has suffered much, and none of his friends have pitied him.- The idea of idee, f. his misfortunes pursues him every-where. When did malheur, m. partout, adv. you hear of him?* Captain D. told my father that he Wiv^a Turn the sentence thus: when had you of his newsl Quand area- Toni en de ses noim-lks ? VSBB. 311 had seai him and spoken to him at Madras. We often mistake when we judge of others by appearances ; se meprendre, v. j"g er > v - and often a person displeases us by the very meme, adj. quality by which another has pleased us. The people gens, m. who often seem the most zealous are not always the most zett, adj. constant. Leave me that book a little longer, do Laisser, v.' not take it again. That apple-tree produces no fruit. pommier, m. We were reduced to the last extremity whea they retook Our ship. Go and speak to Mr.; but O" above all do not laugh. Would you not laugh, if you sur, p. were in my place ? We laughed much yesterday at i the play." He seduced her by his fine promises. Whatever he may undertake, he never will succeed, h* is toa much addicted to the pleasures of this world. adonne p. p. Yeang people tell what they do ; old people what gens, m. & f. vieillard, m. they have done, and fools what they intend to sot, m . se proposer, v. de do We learn much more easily the thiags Jacilement, adv. which we understand than those which we do not. If comprendre we go together to my brother's, shall you be able to chez, p. pouvoir follow us ? I will follow you step by step. - Why pas d pas, adv. do you follow me as you do? You may Bet out commc SIS VERB. when you please,* we will follow you. Hold your (futur) Taisez-vous tongue, you do not know what you say. What books do you translate ? My master says I shall soon trans- late Marmontel's Works. We should have conquered vaincre them if we had fought ; and, believe me, you might have done much better, if you had followed the advice whiclk he gave you. They have debated the question a long time without beiogf able to resolve it They ^jere pouvoir furent quite transported with joy, when they heard of the^iappy^ de,p. news of the peace. Every thing smiles in nature dans, p. at the return of the spring. As long as her retour, m. printems, m. Tant. gue, adv. father and mother live, they never will consent to her (by the fut.) marriage with Mr. R. You will not live long if drink so much. She lived about four years after environ, p. apres, f*. her husband's death. George IV., eldest* son* oF aiut', adj. George III:, was born on the twelfth of August, 176% - , and was proclaimed king of Great Britain and Ireland proclamer, v. Angleterre on the thirty-first of January, 1820. Let a man Jrre |0> in any country whatever,:}: he is sure to be respected and de * Say, when it will please you. f The preposition sans governing a verb, always govern* in tte present of the infinitive. \ Say, in whatever country that a man live, !fc+ Daos quelepe pj qu'un lionime demeure, &c. VERB. 31$ well treated every where, if his behaviour and manners be ruled by the principles of a sound policy, and rt-gler, v. ion, adj. politique, f. the laws of the country he lives in. qu'il habile. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. The impersonal verbs, as we have already said, are those which are never used but in the third person singular ; the pronoun z7, which precedes them, never taking the place of any noun. // tonne, It thunders. II plenty It rains. To wliich may be added several other verbs, that become impersonal when the pronoun il is employed in a vague sense. Ex. II vous convient d'vtre mo- It becomes you to be mo- deste, dest. II fait beau,froid, &c. It is fine, cold, 8fc. II semble, It seems. // b'ensuit que, It follows that. II vaut mieux que, It is better, fyc. These "verbs, like others, whether regular .or irregulai, have their different tenses, and are conjugated in the same manner as the personal verbs from which they are derived. I shall therefore only select one that is not derived, and show the manner of conjugating it, premising that the compound tenses are formed, like others, by joining the participle past to one of the tenses of the auxiliary verbt avoir, to hare. CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. Infinitive Mood. Present. Pleuvoir, to rain. Part. act. Pleuvant, raining. Part. past. Plu, rained, p 314 VERB. Indicative Mood. Affirmatively. Present. // pleut, it rains, it does rain. Negatively. Jl ne pleut pas, it does not rain. Interrogatively. Pleut-il ? does it rain ? Ne pleut-il pas ? does it not rain ? Imperfect. Ilpleuvoit, it rained, it was raining. Preterite. II plut, it rained. Future. Ilpleuvra, it shall or will rain. Cond. pres. Ilpleuvroit, it would or should rain. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qu'il pleuve, that it may rain. Imperfect. Qu'il plut, that it might rain. The following being of the first conjugation, I shall only give the third person, present time, of the indicative mood : the learner may easily find out the rest. 77 arrive, it happens ; from II bruine, it drizzles ; II tclaire, it lightens ; // gele, it freezes ; II grele, it hails ; II neige, it snows; ^, II tonne, it thunders ; // injporte, it matters, it concerns ; arriver, to happen. bruiner, to drizzle. eclairer, to lighten. geler, to freeze. greler, to hail. neiger, to snow. tonner, to thunder. importer, to concern. EXERCISES ON THESE VERBS. Does it rain? It rained just now,* \ but it does nol rain at present. maintenant, adv. Put the verb in the imperfect. tout-a-l'heure, adv. -Was it not raining when you VERB. 3f5 came? 1 advise you not to go out this morning, conseiller, v. de I think it will soon rain. 1 am sure it would rain bientot, adv. if the wind were not so high. Do you know what grand, adj. savoir, v. ,-v*dB happened to my cousin whilst he was in town? pendant que, c. I foresaw what would happen. The roads were prevoir, v. chemin, m. very slippery yesterday, because it drizzled the whole glissant, adj. 8 *** day. Did you observe how it lightened rcmarquer, v. comme, adv. last night ? If it did not freeze I would go to see voir, v. them to-day. It hailed this afternoon,* and it will apres-midi, m. certainly snow to-night. It thundered much beaucoup, adv. yesterday, and I think it will still thunder to-day. encore, adv. It matters little whether you do your exercise peu, adv. que subj. now or later, provided it be well done. It pourvu que, c. subj. greatly concerns children to avoid idleness, be- beaucoup, adv. aux de tviter, v. cause it is the parent of all vices and the destroyer mere, f. deslructrice, f. of all virtues. The verb AVOIR, to have, Conjugated impersonally with the adverb of place, Y. Observation. Though this verb admits the plural in English, it never can be used in French bat in the singular. Infinitive Mood. Y avoir, there be. * Put the verb in the preterite indefinite. r 2 316 VERB. Indicative Mood. Affirmatively. Present. // y a, there is, there are. Negatively. // riy a pas, there is not, there are not. Interrogatively. Y a-t-il? is there ? are there ? N*y a-t-il pas ? is there not ? are there not ? Imperfect. II y avoit, there was, there were. Preterite. // y cut, there was, there were. Future. II y aura, there shall or will be. Cond. pres. fly auroit, there should or would be. Imperative Mood. Qu'il y ait, let there be. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Qw'i/ y ait, that there may be. Imperfect. Q?>] ago. When did you see my father ? 1 saw him avez vu Je I'ai vu (a fortnight ago.) You do not seem so lively as you quinze jours paroitre enjoue were three years ago. 1 would have written to you a. Petiez month ago, if I had known your direction. 1 saw your savoir adrcsse, f. sister four months ago. My father was ill six weeks ago.- He was in London five years ago, and (it is said) he is now in Paris. on (lit RULE 14-. It often happens that neither the impersonal verb there is, it is, &c., nor the word ago is expressed in English-; but the word this or these is placed before the time specified ; and very often too these words are not introduced; yet in either case the verb y avoir must be used in French; and the words this aA tfa&e are noLtox be translated. Ex. II y a neufans que ma tante My aunt has been living- Jemeure dans ce voisinage, these nine years in this neighbourhood ; that is to say, // is nine years since my aunt is living, &c. II ri*y a pas plus d'une hettre We have not been above $ue nous pechons ici t an hour fishing here} VERB. 321 that is to say, // is not above an hour since me, Jish here. II y avoit deux ans que ma My sister had been two sceur etoit en France, years in France when I quandj'y allai, went there. N 'y avoit-il pas six mois qu y Had she not lived six elle demeuroit avec nous, months with us when she quand elle mourut, died ? // y aura six ans a Noel Your brother will have que votre Jrere est chez been at Mr. O.'s six years Mons. 0. at Christmas. N'y aura-t-il pas un an an Will not your sister have mois d'Aout prochain que been a year at Paris next votre sceur est d Paris ? August ? Observation. The English language differs so much from the French in the above sentences, and all others of the same kind, that we think it very proper to call the attention of the learners to the following rules. RULE 15. Whenever the verb expressing the principal action spoken of in the sentence is in the preterite indefi- nite, both the verb y avoir, and that expressing the principal action must be put in the present of the indicative mood, if that action is represented as still continuing. Ex. II y a quatre ans que mon My father has been in pere est en France, France these four years. (my father is still in France) RULE 16. If the sentence expresses the length of time elapsed, without the action spoken of having taken place, the verb y aroir must be put in the present of the indicative mood, and the verb expressing the principal action will be, in French, in the same tense as in English ; that is to say in the preterite indefinite. Ex. II y a trois ans qtieje n'aivu I have not seen the king le roi, these three years; that is to say, It is three years since I have not seen the king. f 5 RULE 17. Whenever the verb expressing the princi- pal action spoken of is in the preterite indefinite, and the principal action is represented as terminating in a past time at the same moment when another action took place ftlso, both the verb y avoir and that expressing the principal action are to be put in the imperfect of the indicative and the other verb must be put in the preterite definite. Ex. A T y avoit-il pas cinq ans que Had you .not been five vous demeuriez chez moi years with me when your quand votre pere mourut ? father died. RULE 18. If the verb expressing the principal action is in the future past ; that is to say, in the compound of the future, the verb y avoir must be put in the future (il y aura, there will be) and the verb expressing the action must be put in the present of the indica- tive. Ex. // y AURA six mois a. Noel Your brother will have que votre Jrere EST en been six months in Spain, Espagne, at Christmas. EXERCISE. There are people who have no pity on their poor desgens de (fellow-creatures.) Some people fancy semblables 11 y a des gens qui s'imaginent that they can learn a language without studying. pouvoir etudier My brother has been four years* at Mr. W.'s academy, and my father told him that he should stay there two rester years more. 1 had been three years in England when de plus that happened. I had not been three months in arriver, pret. def. France,t when my brother returned from America to London, where he fell ill and died. Mr. N. had only * ne-que learned' French seven months, when he wrote me a letter * See rule 14, page 320. f: See above, rule 17- VERB. 323 in that language.* Had not Mr. David been four years and a half in Spain when his sister (was married.) My se maria father and mother had not been gone out above a quarter sortir plus d'un of an hour when he arrived. We had been playing at cards for two hours when you came in. Thomas will carte, f. entrer have been at college two years the tenth of next month.f au The verb ETRE, to be, taken impersonally. RULE 19. The verb ctre, to be, being preceded in English by the pronoun it, becomes impersonal whenever it is followed by a pronoun personal, possessive or demon- strative ; then the pronoun / is to be translated by ce ; and though the verb be followed by pronouns in the plural number, it must be put in French in the singular, as it is in English. Ex. C'EST la loi QUI Vordonne. It is the law that prescribes it. C'EST moi QUI I'aifait. It is I who have done it. C'EST vou& t Messieurs, QUI It is you, Gentlemen, who foiles mon malheur. cause my misfortune. Observation. When the impersonal verb, it is, ttwas,&c. is followed by a noun or pronoun in the third person plural, it may be put either in the singular or plural ; yet if the sentence be interrogative, the singular is sometimes pre- ferred in order to give softness to the language. Ex. C'EST EUX, or CE SONT EUX It is they who have related QUI me I'ont rapporte? it to me ? SONT-CE la des signes d'opu- Are these proofs of opulence lence ou d'indigence? or indigence? EST-CE eux QUI I'ont fait ? Is it they who have done it ? Sont-ce eux qui I'ont fait, would be unpleasant to the ear. * Say, There were but seven months that Mr. N. learned French, &c. // n'y avoit que sept moit, Sfc. + See rule 18, page 322, and say, There will be two months, the tenth of the month next that T/toma* is, &c. VEBB. EXERCISE. It is prosperity which commonly makes men haughty prospcritc, f. generalement rendre and proud ; but it is adversity that makes them wise orgueilleux It was the custom among the Spartans to coutume, f. chez Spartiate, m. de inure their 4 children 5 early 1 to the fatigues endurcir de bonne lieure travail, m. pi. of war.- It is not I who occasioned the quarrel, it is querelle, f. you who began it. It was envy that caused avez commenced pret. def. envie, f. causer the first murder. Is it not you who wrote to Miss meurtre, m. avez ecrit A.? No; it is Miss Rose's sister. If you do not succeed, it will not be my fault. If you (were to lose) rcussir foute, f. perdiez the friendship of your parents, it would be the greatest misfortune that ever* could 1 happen to you. It malkeur, m. jamais put is my friend who told me that it was your father whom. dire we saw yesterday. Speak to my brothers, for it is they who have done it. Why do you not accuse my pourquoi sisters ? It is they who have done all the mischief. mat, m. You blame my aunts ; but is it they who have offended bldmer tante offenser you? Is it they who are in the wrong ? Is it those out fort gentlemen who have insulted you ? RULE 20. He, she, they, or those, taken in a general sense} ,and either immediately or not followed by ivho, zohom, or that, are often translated into French by the impersonal verb cest, which must be followed by the verb expressing the principal affirmation contained in the sen* VERB. 325 tence ; this verb is to be put in the present of the infinitive ; que de comes immediately after, and the next verb must also be put in the present of the infinitive. If the sentence is negative c'est ne pas is to be used. Ex. C'EST itre Jbu QUE DE He is a fool who loses his perdre le temps a des time in trifles ; that is to bagatelles, say ; it is to be a fool, &c. C'EST NE PAS gouter les Those who love nobody do douceurs de I'amilie quede not enjoy the pleasures of n aimer per sonne, friendship. EXERCISE. He is a blind man who does not perceive all the aveugle <<=H dangers which surround us in this deceitful 2 world 1 .' en-vironner trompeur Those who are satisfied with their lot are happy.* content de son sort, m. He does not know the court, who relies on the pro- connoilre cour, f. sejier aux raises which (are made) there. They are strangers to onjait the charms of society who shun company. They are fuir idle who do not know the value of time.- They connoitre prix, rn. obey the commands of God who love their neighbour, j- son prochain, m. sing. and do not reproach him with his small defects. He is lui T- ses not a Christain who seeks to hurt his neighbour, and d nuire & prochain speaks ill of him on all occasions. Those who neglect dans negliger study do not understand their own interests. J propre * The principal affirmation is this, those are happy ', therefore the sen- tence is to begin thus : c'e&t i-tre heureux, &c. f Prochain, meaning neighbour, is always used in the singular, in French as well as in English. $ The principal affirmation is this, those do not understand their own interests. Turn, therefore, the sentence thus to translate it into French : It is not to understand our own interest, &c, C'f ST > PAS CONKOtTBJB NOTK,....<2V7 DE, 326 VERB. ROLE 21. 1st. The verb etre, to be, becomes imper- conal, whenever it is followed by a noun adjective, which does not relate to any object mentioned before; in which case the verb is to be preceded by the pronoun il. Ex. IL est etonnant de vous voir It is surprising to see you si gai au milieu de tant de so gay in the midst of so sujets de chagrin, many causes of grief. 2dly. But if the adjective, without qualifying any pre- ceding noun or pronoun, relates to something mentioned before, the English pronoun it must be translated into French by ce or cela. Ex. Avez-vous ou'i dire que Mon- Have you heard that Mr. sieur Ricamier est ruine? Ricamier is ruined ? No; Non ; c?est presque in? it is almost incredible. croyable, ou cela est presque incroyable, Sdly. The verb to be, when used in English to denote the state of the weather, must be rendered in French by the third person singular of the verbjaire, to make, to do, which verb then becomes impersonal. Ex. II fait beau temps, It is fine weather. Nejait-ilpas chaud? Is it not hot ? EXERCISE. It is surprising to see you so lazy and inattentive after * etonnant de apres having been punished 2 severely 1 for these faults. It is severement always dangerous (to keep company with) people with- de frequenter des gens out any principle of religion. Do you know that Lord aucun principe savoir Liverpool (is not expected to live) ? Yes, I do ; and est mourant it is surprising, f for he was so well yesterday. Does se porter \ * The preposition apres govern$ (he following verb in the present of the itifixilive mood. f See the above Rule, Part 2. VERB. 327 it rain ? No, Sir ; it is fine weather. Is it not Monsieur very cold ? It is neither cold nor hot ; it is a high wind, froid? ni ni <& grand and I think it will soon 1 freeze 1 . It is not so cold as it penser bientot > was at the beginning of this month. Do you think o* commencement it is hotter in Italy than here? (subj.) FALLOIR, to be needful, to be necessary. Observation. This verb being impersonal in French, and therefore admitting no subject but the pronoun il, offers to the learners serious difficulties, which I shall endeavour to explain in the rules that will follow its conjugation. It is often translated into English by the verb must, pre- ceded by one of the personal pronouns, or by a noun ; but the French requires it to be changed into to be needful that, and the subject of must becomes that of the follow- ing verb, which is to be put in the subjunctive mood. In order to make this observation as intelligible as possible to the learner, I shall conjugate Falloir with an additional verb. THE IMPERSONAL VERB, FALLOIR, to be needful, to be necessary. Infinitive Mood. Pres. Falloir, to be needful. The part. act. is wanting. Part. past. Fallu, been needful. Indicative Mood. Present. Ilfaut quejefasse, I must do. Ilfaut que tu fosses, Thou must do. Ilfaut qu'ilfasse, He must do. Ilfaut que nousfassions, We must do. Ilfaut que vousfassiez, You must do. Iljaut qu' Us f assent, They must do. That is to say, it is needful that, &c. 328 VERB. Imperfect. Ilfattoit queje lefsse, It was necessary for me to do it. Ilfattoit que nous icrivissions, It was necessary for us to write. Preterite. Ilfallut gu'il partit, He was obliged to set out- put ure. Ilfaudra quil vienne, He shall be obliged to come, he must come. Conditional Present. Ufaudroit que nous allassions, It would be necessary for us to go, or we should go. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Quil faille, That it may be necessary. Imperfect. Qu'ilfallutj- That it might be necessary. Negatively. II nefaut pas quejefasse, I must not do. // ne faut pas que vous You must not do. fassiez, 11 nefaut pas que notisfas- We must not do. sions, II nefautpas qif Us par tent, They must not set off. Interrogatively. Faut-il quejefasse ? Must I do ? Faut-il que vous fassiez, Must you do ? Nefaut-ilpas que jefasse? Must I not do? Neyitut~il pas que vous fas- Must you not do ? siez? The compounds of this verb are formed by adding its participle past to the third person singular of the simple tenses of the verb avoir, to have; which must be preceded by the pronoun il. Ex. Ilafalluf ilavoitfattu; ileutfattu, &c. VERB. 329 RULE 22. 1. When the verb folioir t being followed by the conjunction que, is in the present, or in thefuture of the indicative mood, it governs the next verb in the present of the subjunctive. 2. When the \erbfolloir, followed by the conjunction que, is in the imperfect, preterite, or conditional present of the indicative mood, the verb it governs must be put in the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. Ilfaut queje fosse, I must do ? Ilfoudra que je fosse, I shall be obliged to do, or it will be necessary for me to do. II falloit, or ilfollut queje I was obliged to speak, or parlasse, it ; was necessary for me to speak. Ilfoudroit queje vendisse, I should be obliged to sell : EXERCISE. If you go to Coxheath to-day you must come aujourd'hui back to-morrow.*. You may go to London this revenir pouvoir morning, but remember that you must be back at de retour three o'clock. You must get up to-morrow morning heiires se lever at four o'clock.-^ Custom must not always prevail over sur reason. Shall I be obliged to carry them there ? folioir mener Must I not show you my work ? If he wished to montrer ouvrage, m. vouloit pay his debts, he would be obliged to sell all his dette, m. folioir property. If your brothers do not cease to quarrel, Lien, m. cesser de quereller, it will be necessary for them to part.t It is impossi- se separer ble for you to succeed in that undertaking;, all your qne reussir, subj. entreprise, f. friends oppose it. s'opposery * Read the observation page 32 7 t Say, it wijl be necessary that they part j ilfaudra yu'ih se 330 VERB. RULE 23. When the adjectives necessary, needful, NE"- CESSAIRE; good, BON; impossible, IMPOSSIBLE; difficult, DIFFICILE, being joined to the verb to be, ETRE, con- jugated impersonally, as well as these expressions, to be expedient, to be proper, ETRE 'A PROPOS, to be better, VA- LOIR MIEUX, are followed by the preposition for : this preposition is not to be translated, and the noun or pro- noun it governs becomes the subject of the following verb, which must be put. in the subjunctive mood. As to the. tense in which it is to be put, consult, and follow the Rule 22, page 325. Ex. 77 n'est pas Ion que vous It is not good for you to be restiez seul, left alone. Ilvauf mieux que vous ayez It is better for you to have la compagnie de quelques the company of a few amis, friends. EXERCISE. It is difficult for you to improve,* if you do not Jaire des progrcs, apply better to study. It is impossible for s'appliquer davantagc you to succeed, unless you take more* convenient' d mains que-ne, subj. convenable measures. 1 It would be expedient for you to read a propos que this book from the beginning to the end Be- depuis jusqu'a Jin, f. lieve me, it is better for you to go there to-mor- valoir mieux row, for it will soon snow. Will it not be better car bientot for me to be at school * too soon than too late ? tot tard. Would it not be better for him to go and speak to them himself than to send his servant ? It is good for us de domestique, m. or f. que to help one another in our troubles. s 'aider peine, f. * Sec Hale 22, page 825, as these modes of speaking lire a propos t ftre necestaire, Stre impossible, que, &c. follow the same rules as to the government of the following verb. VERB. 331 RULE 2t. If the verb must is used before the verb to have, and this is immediately followed by a noun substan- tive, MUST may be translated by falloir, without express- ing the verb to have. But, then, the noun or pronoun which stands as subject to must becomes its indirect object. If that sabject is a noun, it is to be placed after falloir, and be preceded by the preposition a ; if it is a personal pronoun, it is to be rendered by me, te, lui, nous, vous, or leur, according to its number and person, and be placed before the verb falloir. The verb to want, being immediately followed by a substantive, follows the same rule when translated by falloir. Ex. Ilfaut un chapeau neiif a Your brother must have, or votrefritre, "wants a new hat. // vousfaut des livres, You must have, or you want books. 77 mefaudra bientot du I must soon have some papier, paper. Observation. Should the verb to have be expressed in French, it must be put in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Ilfaut que votrefrere ait Your brother must have a un chapeau neuf, new hat. Ilfaut que vous ayez des You must have books. livres, The former mode of speaking is more elegant than the latter. EXERCISE. I shall want paper, pens, and ink. What do you falloir want ? I want nothing for the present, but I think I shall d penser soon want a French grammar. My brother has an old hat, and he will soon want a new one. If vieux nouveau you like to speak much, you must have (a good deal) of aimez a bien circumspection not to (speak ill) of others. Since retenue, f. pour nepas medire Puisque I cannot find my book, I must have another. We shall 332 VERB. want a (great deal) of patience to succeed in our under- beaucoup taking. My brothers have lost their buckles, they boucle, f. must hare others. ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN ON, when it is used in French to change into the active voice- verbs used in the passive voice in English. RULE 25. When the action expressed in English by a passive verb is mentioned in a vague, indeterminate way with respect to those who do, have done, or will do it, the English passive verb is changed in French into an active one, and the pronoun indefinite on, one, is given to the verb for its subject ; if the verb is not impersonal in Eng- lish, the noun or pronoun which stands as its subject will become its object in French. On, meaning one, governs the verb in the third person singular. Ex. On dit, It is said. On a rapporlCf It has been reported. On m'a dit t I have been told. On m'a permis de chanter, . I have been allowed to sing. On lui a dtfendu de sortir t He has been forbidden to go out. On a dit a votrefrere, ' Your brother has been told. On dira a nos enfans t Our children will be told. EXERCISE. In time of war peace is always spoken of.*. Where En is your brother ? It is not known ; for we have not heard le savoir of him these two years.f The death of the invincible mart, f. admiral Lord Nelson is daily lamented, and will tous les jours regretter be so a long time. J 1 was told yesterday that your la <* * Say, >>jie speaks always of peace. t Say, far we have not had of his news since two yean. J Say, one laments every day the death of, &c., and one will lament it long time. VERB. 333 brother has been punished for his idleness ; had your father de been told of it,* he would have been very angry with contre him. As soon as your book be printed, people (will Aussitot que (fut.) imprimer on be eager to) buy it, and it will be read with avidity. sempresser de Learned men are found in vilages as well as in large grand towns. It is reported on all sides that we shall soon. de cote, m. have peace; but the news has not yet been received, f though it is ardently (wished for), however, it is thought ardemment souhaiter that the secret expedition will sail in a few days. met Ire a la voile en <=s peu de RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE ON THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. There is no going out to-day, it rains in torrents. d verse. Do not make so much noise, there is no hearing one s'entendre *<> another. Is it cold this morning ? Yes, Sir, it is very <*>* cold ; however, I have been told it is not so cold as it was uOn *on yesterday. The weather is very inconstant in thig country : it was very hot yesterday, it is excessively cold pay*, m. ires to-day ; it froze this morning, it hailed at noon, it rained imperf. imperf. midi imperf. at four o'clock, and now it drizzles. It sometimes *<=>, heures quelquejbis lightens when it does not thunder, but as often as it toutes lesfois * Say, if one had told it to your father, &c. f- Say, but 1 out* has 5 not 3 - 6 yet' received* tlufl newt 10 (of* it.) J Say, though one wishes it ardently. Say one cannot go out &c. On ne sauroit sortir, &c. 334 VERB. thunders it lightens. If itbefine weather next week* I shall go to London, but if it be bad weather I shall stay at home. rester chez mol. It is (a pleasure) to see bees coming out of their amusant abeille, f. sortir hives when it is a sunny day. Had I known ruche, f. fait <> du soleil <&> you were returned from the continent,! I would have gone revenir to see you long ago. My father and mother were told you were in England ten years ago, but you neither saw nor wrote^to them.:j: Every body agrees there are fine convenir women in (Great Britain). It greatly concerns Angleterre beaucoup importe children to avoid bad company. If there were any aux de falter des real virtue in the world, should we (meet with) so many pi. . o trouver, cond. false friends ! If he behaved well, there would not se comporter be a man (in the world) that I should esteem more. au monde davantage. No object is more pleasing to the eye than the sight Pas cT o" plaire vue, f. of a man whom we have obliged, || (nor is any) music so et point de agreeable to the ear as the voice of a man who oreille, f. owns us for his benefactors. It is a sad thing to reconnoitre &>>& see unfortunate people, and be unable to relieve them. malheureux <&> de ne pcuvoir <& secourir Those who support the conduct of idle and obsti- encourager * Recollect that a future action expressed in English, with the assistance of the conjunction if, must be rendered into French by .the present of the indicative mood. -f Say, if I had known that. * Say, but you did not see them, and did not write to them. I) Say, no object that phases more. PAS D'OBJET QUI PLAISE PLUS. VERB. 385 nate scholars, make themselves contemptible.* se rendre ** meprisable. They are not acquainted! with the human heart, who *o* connoitre rely upon the promises of men.J You hare foirefond already been told that nobody in the world has prepos- dfjA sessed me against you ; how many times must I repeat it con Ire to you ? 1 was told yesterday that you were very ill ; but I am truly glad to see you so well to-day. fort de bien porlant There is no persuading you when you are resolved avez not to believe H what you are told. More* vir- de nepas <&> tue 3 (is requisite 1 ) to support prosperity than adversity. iljaut pour Much art and nicety are required to please delicatesse, f. pour every body. It little matters whether it be my servant (t <* peu importe que ce soil or your's who carries the letter to the post. You must porter paste, f. honour your father and mother if you will live long and vouloir happy. It is more glorious to conquer our passions de vaincre than to conquer the whole world. Sir, I want a de conquerir entier il mefaut pair of boots ; have you any in your shop that (will en boutique, f. suit) me ? It is reported that the Russians have conviennent Russe beaten the Turks ; it is said so, but it is not yet known Turc ; le, encore * See Rule 20, page 324, and read it attentively. t The verb acquainted being translated into French by the present of the infinitive mood, both parts of the negation ne pas are to be placed before the verb. Say, then, c'ett ne pas connoitre. J; See Rule 20, p. 324. || See the above note, t . 336 PARTICIPLE. for certain. It is thought that Sweden has declared war Suede, f. against France. It is true ; but it is much feared that vrai craindre the Swedes will be beaten, though they fight most Suedois ne soient battus se baltre,subj. ires courageously. Have the letters which were expected attendre yesterday been received ? * No ; but the mail is arrived, malle, f. and they will be delivered this morning, f OF PARTICIPLES. The participle is so called because it partakes of the nature of the verb and of the adjective : of the verb as it has its signification and object ; of the adjective as it ex- presses a quality. There are two participles, the participle active and the participle past. Of the PARTICIPLE ACTIVE and VERBAL ADJECTIVE. The participle active always ends in French with these letters, ant, and in English with ing. Ex. Parlant, speak- ing; punissant, punishing, &c. RULE 26. The participle active is always indeclinable: it admits of no variation as to gender or number. It gene- rally expresses either an action, as ecrivant, writing, merchant, walking, or an operation of the mind, as pen" sant, thinking, &c. Ex. J'ai souvent vu cette bonne I have often seen that mere CARESSANT son en- good mother whilst cares- Jant, adresser ses pritres sing her child, offer her nu del, prayers to heaven. Nous nous promenions, SDK- We were walking, thinking GEANT a nos malheurs, of our misfortunes. Observation. The verbal adjective, which is nothing- else but an adjective derived from the verb, the signi- * Say, has one received ike letters which one expected yesterday* t Say, and one will deliver them, &c. PARTICIPLE. S3T fication of which it expresses, is to be carefully dis* tinguished from the participle active, from which it only differs by being declinable, when, on the con- trary, the participle active is invariable : they may, therefore, offer some difficulties. Yet let the learner pay attention to the following rule, and they will soon vanish. RULE 27. 1st. The verbal adjective expresses either a quality belonging to the substantive it modifies, or an ap- titude or disposition to act rather than an action. Always acting as an adjective, it takes the gender and number of the substantive it qualifies. 2dly. The verbal adjective never governs a direct oil* ject. Ex. ISenfant que vous voyezfait The child whom you see,' le bonheur de cetle mere constitutes the happiness 'taressanle et aimante, of that caressing and lov- ing mother. 3dly. The participles ayant and ctant never can be- ytne verbal adjectives; they are, therefore always inva- fihlp. conie EXERCISE ON THE TWO LAST RULES 26 AND 27. (All the verbal adjectives shall be marked thus, adj.) The persons whom you saw with us are people fearing gens, pi. God and loving virtue. She met your father (as she eit was) coming here. - We were told (the day before yes- avant-hier terday) that your sister remembering the injuries received se ressouvenir from your brother refused to see him. - Brutus saw his two sons expiring by his orders. - He hears the ser- pents, and fancies he sees them creeping around him.' ' ramper That reflection perplexing the good man, he emiarrasser 338 PARTICIPLE. said* &c. He inherited all the property belonging to htriter de biens, pi. adj. his uncle. > He heard that several of his officers be- apprendre longing to families of the highest rank meditated treason. adj. mediter line trahison, f. Geography and chronology being the two eyes of history, (we should,) (in order to) study well the latter, be ilfaitt pour celte^ci ctre guided by the former. Will he desert that poor celles-la. unfortunate woman when she is dying on these burning Mal/ieurtuse *>* > " * adj. brulant, adj. sands ? 'Your aunt having given the necessary 2 orders 1 sable, m. to your cousins, set out immediately for London. - Look at those lambs which are skipping in that Regarder *&> agneaji,w. <** <* bondir meadow. Do you see th.os a,nimals languishing with prairie, f. adj. de thirst, and drinking (oil &) margin of that limpid* au bwd l Bl, brook'. ruisswH, m. On tfo Participle Active governed in English by 1 PREPOSITIONS, or the Article THE. RuLE-23. All prepositions that govern in English the verb in the participle active govern it in French in the pre- sent of the injinitive : the preposition en is the only one exeepted. It requires the verb to be put in French, as it is in English} in th participle active. Ex. Soriirai-je SANS lui PAR- Shall I set off without speak* LER ? ing to nmi ** // sera hettreux APRKS AVOIR He. will be happy after hav- rcmpTi ce devoir sacre, ing fulfilled that sacred duty. Je vous h dlrai EK votis I will tell it you on my leav PARTICIPLE. 3S9 Observation. The participle active is sometimes used in English as a substantive, and as such it is preceded by tlie article t/ie. In that case, if the French language has a corresponding substantive, it takes the place of the verb ; sometimes also the verb itself is used in the present of the infinitive, but the English article is to be suppressed. If there is not in the French language a substantive cor- responding to the verb used substantively in English, that verb must be put in French in the present of the infi- nitive. Ex. La LECTURE de lirres in- The reading of instructive structifs est un de ses books is one of his iu- amuscme.nsfo'voii?, vourite amusements. La. DEFENSE d'une laauraise The defending of a bad- caiise est pire que la cause cause is worse than the flk~mcme, cause itself. Or, DEFENDREMMeWflWWI/Stf cause est pire que la cause dle-mcme, EXERCISE. I assure you there is a great deal of pleasure in a teaching diligent scholars. We are told there will enseigner not be so much danger in travelling as there was u voi/ngcr que en cvoif before. There is a real advantage in being anparavant. a learned, but science must not create pride. Louis the savant itupircr Great had especially the superior and rare talent of kr.ow- surtout ing and choosing men of merit. He left the house with- out seeing his father, and even without speaking to his mime mother. He was hanged for having robbed Mr. D. Jut pcndre I should despise a man who would be capable of deceiv- mep riser ing his friends. After having (waited for) her a !o::g a'iendre *** Q 2 310 PARTICIPLE. while, she (sent me word) that she was not read}' to go m'envoya dire pret a out. She spends all her time in reading or writing. passer My mother takes an infinite pleasure in admiring the a situation of your house. The grace of God will situation, f. always keep us from sinning. 1 often admire the empicher pecker rising and setting of the sun. The defending of lever, m. coucher, m. soldi, m. defense a bad cause is worse than the cause itself. mauvais ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. The participle past may be conjugated either with the verb tire, to be, or the verb avoir, to have. THE PARTICIPLE PAST CONJUGATED WITH THE VERB ETRE. RULE 29. The participles past of d\ passive verbs, as well as those of neuter verbs, which are conjugated with the verb clre, to be, are declinable, and always take the gender and number of the nouns or pronouns that stand as their subjects. To this rule there is no exception. Ex. La timide verttt EST trap Timid virtue is too often sou-cent OPPRIMEE, oppressed. Tons les beaux arts SONT All the fine arts owe their KES Pombre des lois t birth to the protection of the laws. EUe EST AIM^E, She is loved. MesJ~reres SEKOXT PUNIS, My brothers will be pu nished. Mes sceurs SONT PARTIES, My sisters are gone. EXERCISE. I hare been told * your brother-in-law is gone to parti pour the continent: have I been told the truth ?** I have See Rale S5, page 332. PARTICIPLE. 341 not seen your mother since she arrived from France ; depuis que does she appear satisfied with her journey ? My bro- de voyage, m. thers are gone to Dover, and intend to pay you Douvres, se proposer de rendre a visit when they are (come back), The *<=> (by the future) revenir. houses which are built (in the) winter are not so wholesome en sain as those which are begun (in the) spring and finished (in the) an au middle of summer. The wicked are always tormented, mediant bourreler and the righteous are comforted by their own conscience. juste consoler Virtuous 2 people 1 are esteemed and respected by personne, f. de those who are so, and even (by the) wicked. 1 assure meme des you that Mr. Brown's wife is much afflicted at the death femme de of her husband, and her sons are as much affected (by it) tnari en ns she. We are at last come to that great empire which has swallowed all the empires of the universe, from which engloutir have sprung the largest kingdoms of the world. ctre sortir Observation. AM the reflected and reciprocal verbs are always conjugated in their compound tenses with the verb ctre, to be ; but as it is then used in the acceptation of the verb avoir, to have, their participles past are not always declinable : they follow the rules of the active verbs to which they belong. The PARTICIPLE PAST conjugated luith the Verb AVOIR, to have; or Kith the Verb ETRE, used in the Acceptation of the Verb AVOIR, to have. RULE 30. The participle past, when conjugated with the verb avoir, as well as that of the reflected and rect- 342 PARTICIPLE. procal verbs, whick is always conjugated with the vert* ttre, are declinable, and take the gender and number of tlieir dirccl abject whenever they are preceded by it. Observation 1. I beg of the learner to recollect that the direct object, when it precedes the participle, is always one of these pronouns me, te, se, le, la, le-; nous, vous, or qu?, and sometimes a noun preceded by qnel, combien' d<-, or que de, meaning combien de, how much, how many. The learner must also recollect that me, tc, se, nous, votis, may mean either me, thee, himself, us, you, and, if so, they are direct objects ; or to me, to thee, to himself, to us t to you, and, in that case, they are indirect objects. 2. The clearest idea must be formed of the direct and indirect objects, or the difficulties offered by the participle past can never be conquered. In order to throw proper light upon the subject, I shall say, the answer to the question whom for the person, and ivhat for the thhigr will invariably give the direct object. Take, therefore, the subject of the auxiliary verb, the auxiliary verb itself] and the participle, and asik r if the sentence allows it, the question ichom? where the object is expres- sive of a person, and Khat? when it represents a thing, the answer will point out the direct object. Observe, then, whether your answer is placed in French before, or after the participle. If it is placed before it, the participle is declinable, and must agree with it in gender and number; if it is placed after the participle, that participle is inde- clinable. Should it happen that you cannot ask the question m ? or tchat i or that you want the help of a prepo- sition to ask it, conclude immediately that the participle is indeclinable. Ex. Si Dicii sous a DISTINGUES If God has distinguished us des auires animaux, c j est from other animals, it is surtont par le dun de la most particularly by the parole, gift of speech. Lcsmeitieuresharangnessont The best orations are those celles QUE le cceur a Die- which the heart has dic- TE;S* tated. Our. DE SOLDATS or COM- How many soldiers I have BiEXDESOLDATS/'a/vcs seen in coining here. .en reliant id, PARTICIPLE. 343 Le cceur a DICTE LES MEIL- The heart has dictated th LEUHES HARANGUES, best orations. Combien dcsoldatsont PERI ! How many soldiers have perished ! Le roi xous a PA RLE, The king has spoken to us. Us se sont loucs, They have praised them- selves. Now let us ask the proper questions, and look for the direct objects in the above sentences. Sentence 1. God has cKttiugputkcd WHOM? nous, us. Nous, which is the answer to the question, precedes the participle, therefore it is declinable. 2. The heart lias dictated WHAT? les meillenres harangues, that is to say, qua, which, a pronoun relative that takes the place of the best orations : que precedes the participle, and makes it declinable. 3. / have seen WHOM ? soldiers. Soldats precedes the participle, therefore it is declinable. 4. The heart has dictated WHAT? les meilleures harangues. Your answer to -what comes after the parti- ciple, therefore it is indeclinable. 5. How many soldiers have perished. Can you ask this question, have perished^ whom? or what? No: con- clude that the participle peri is indeclinable. Besides the verb, peri is a neuter verb, and neuter verbs never govern, a direct object except when they are reflected. 6. The king has spoken. Can you ask this question, spoken, WHOM? or has spoken, WHAT? No: therefore the participle parle is indeclinable. Parler^ to speak, is a neuter verb, it cannot have a direct object. The question to be asked with the verb parler should be to whom, or of what, or of whom. In the above sentence it is to whom? and the answer must be to us, an indirect object. 7. They have praised WHOM? se, themselves. Se precedes the participle, therefore louts is declinable. See 3 on the subject and object of the verb, p. 71. EXERCISE. (Read attentively the last Rule.} I spoke to your brother this morning, and desired Ai parle him to come and dine with us to-morrow. - The reso- 844 PARTICIPLE. lution which she has taken of going into the country a - surprises me very much: I have spoken to her myself; etonner but I have not been able to learn the reasons which pouvoir have induced her (to it). Miss Farren was an excellent engager y actress ; I have seen her perform several times. 1 am net rice , f. very sorry for the trouble that affair has given to your Juche de peine, f. aunt. If you can come with me, I will shew you the tanle, f. montrer Jady whom I have heard sing. What stuff have you entendre chosen ? The letter which you have written to me in choisi French was tolerably well written ; I have shewn it to passablement your aunt, who is much pleased (with it). I have not yet ires content en received the goods which you sent me by the marchandise, f. pret. ind. ship Goodwill. Ladies, have you returned him vaisseau, m. rendre the letters which he had desired you to read ? Where prier did you buy those gloves? I bought them in France. avez-votis acheter pret. ind. r Alexander conquered Asia with the troops which troupe, f. his father Philip had disciplined. The faults which he Jiad committed greatly increased his prudence. He beaucoup augmentcr has spent all the treasures which his father had amassed" tresor, m. with so much care and labour. 1 shall never forget the fatigue oublier good senvices which you have done to my mother. service, m. rendre Of all the letters which my brother has received PARTICIPLE. 34$ to-day, there is not one (of them) for me. The aujourd'hui reasons which you have given us have satisfied us. satixfaire What books have you lost ? The fine actions your beau brothers have done in America, deserve great praises, faire mcriter (ouange, f. and ought to be transmitted to posterity. The three devoir country-houses 1 which your father is said to have maison de bought* are extremely fine and well situated. The situe soldiers whom they obliged to set out, are (come* back) soldat, m. revenir already 1 My sisters have quarrelled the 2 whole 1 day, 3 se qnerellcr but are now reconciled. Observation 1. Whenever the participle past, being conjugated with the auxiliary avoir, and preceded by a direct object, is immediatly followed by a verb in the infinitive, ask the questions specified in the 2d observation that follows rule 30 ; and the difficulty will soon vanish. You will immediately see whether the direct object is governed by the participle, or by the verb that follows it. If it is governed by the verb that follows the participle, that participle remains indeclinable. 2. If the participle is an active verb, and the verb in the infinitive a neuter one, there can be no difficulty ; as a neuter verb, conjugated with avoir, can not have a direct object. The participle is then declinable. 3. If on the contrary the participle is a neuter verb, and the verb in the infinitive an active one, the direct object is necessarily governed by the latter, and the participle is indeclinable. RULE 31. When a participle past, conjugated with the verb avoir, is preceded by a direct object, and immediately followed by a verb in the iiifinitwe, that participle is decli- nable, if it governs the direct object ; and indeclinable if the object is governed by the verb which is in the infinitive ; * Turu the sentence thus : Which one says thai ymr fatter hat lougkt. U 5 346 PARTICIPLE. which government is soon discovered by asking the ques- tion whom, or what ? Ex. 1. Plusieurs personnes se . soul presentees a la porle.^ la sent indie I.E.S a LA-lsslLss pnsscr, 2. La guerre ne se faisoit pus autrefais comme nous L'a-cons vn FA i HE sous le regne de Louis quatorze, 3. Je votis envoie les livres Q.UE vans avez pa.ru Ditei- REK, 4-. C'ert tine belle chanson ; jc i.'ai enlcndu CHANTER, C'est une excellente c/iati- tcuse ; je iSai ENTENDUE chanter phisienrsjbis, Mademoiselle D. QUE fai VL~E peindrece matin, &c. Les pat/sages QUE jai \u yeindre, Several persons came to the door ; the sentinel let them pass. War wa& not carried on formerly as we saw it done during the reign of Louis the fourteenth. I send you the books which you seemed to wish for. It is a fine soag ; I have heard it sung. She is mi excellent singer; I have heard her sing several times. Miss D. whom I saw painN this morning, &c. The landscapes which I kave seen drawn. APPLICATION nf the QUESTIONS WHOM and WHAT to the above examples. EXAPLKS. 1. La senfinelle a faissces WHOM? les, them; do WHAT, passer. Les is the direct object of the participle, and precedes it ; therefore it is declinable. Besides, passer being a neuter verb, it cannot have a direct object. 2. Nous avows vu WHAT? foire. Faire WHAT ? i- guerre ; that is to say, In, it, which takes the place of war. The answer to tvhat? \sfoire; therefore the direct object of the participle follows instead of pre- ceding it. Conclude that the pronoun la is governed by tlie vetbfaire, and that the participle is indeclinable^ 3. Vous avez par u WHAT? dcsirer WHAT? lesfivres ; that is to say que, which. The ans\ver to the first question, tvtial?^ is desirer ; it comes after the participle ; tlierefore it is indedinalle. 4. /*a* entendu \VHOii ? qudqiiun (which is in ellipsis) do WHAT? cAfl/i/er- WHAT ? la f \t ; that is to say, la ekan- PARTICIPLE. 347 son. The answer to loJiom? is quelquun ; it is in ellipsis after the participle; In, it, is the object of chanter-, there- fore the participle is indeclinable. 5. J'ai enlendue WHOM ? la, her. The answer to luliom ? is la, her, which is the direct object of entendite ; therefore that participle is declinable. 6. J'ai vue WHOM ? one, that is to say f Mademoiselle D., do WHAT? pcinrlre. The answer to uhom ? is qite, that is to say, Mademoiselle D. It is the direct object of the participle vue ; therefore it is declinable. 7th. J'ai vn WHOM ? quelqu'un (this pronoun is in ellipsis) do WHAT ? peindre WHAT? que ; that is to say les prtysages. The answer to the question whom ? is qtielqiiuiu which is understood after the participle ; quclqit ttn is its direct object; que is governed by peindre and not by the participle ; therefore vu is indeclinable. EXERCISE on the 31st Rule. I cannot forget the good actions which I have seeit you do The goods which you ordered me to send, de are arrived ; permit me to show you the letters which we de have received from Germany. The fable which I All-emagne, f. gave you to translate is not difficult. -Have you already a traduire read the books which I saw you buying? not yet, for I pas , have sent them to my sister who is in the country. a. I havo bought the clothes for which you saw me bairgain.- habit, m. ^ marchan- ing. The history which I have begun to read, is not der entertaining. She has written more books than you amusant have ever read. -The lady whom I saw singing is n'en avez pret. ind. handsome and young ; and the song which I have heard suug is the best, as to words and music, that your quant 348 PARTICIPLE. Brother ever wrote Miss B. has spent two or three pret. ind. passer days with your sisters, and saw* their 1 (picture drawn) ; a vu les peindre their cousins were in the next' room 1 , and my sister saw e f. voisin a vu them painting in miniature. en RULE. 32. The participle past whether it be conjugated with the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, or with etre, used jn the acceptation of avoir, is indeclinable if it is pre- ceded only by its indirect object. Ex. J'ai vu votre sceur, et je LUI I have seen your sister, and ai donne voire lettre, have given her your letter. Elle s'est cassc le bras, She broke her arm. Cette dame s'esl donne un That lady treated herself sttperbe collier. with a beautiful necklace. EXAMPLES 1. I have seen WHOM? votre sceur. The answer comes after the participle vu ; therefore it is indeclinable. And 1 have given WHAT ? votre lettre. This is the direct object ; it comes after the participle ; therefore the participle is indeclinable. Lui, to her, is of course the indirect object, the preposition to proves it. Besides two objects ; one of \rhich represents the person, and the other the thing, cannot be direct ; one of them is necessarily indirect. And when you have found out the direct object coming after the participle, let it suffice, and conclude that the participle is indeclinable. 2. In- this second example the verb ctre is used m the acceptation of avoir ; let us then ask this question : She has broken WHAT I le bras. The answer comes after the participle casse ; therefore it is indeclinable. Se is put for to herself, which is the indirect object. 3. Cette dame a donne, that lady has given WHAT ? a, necklace ; the answer comes after the participle ; there- fore donnc is indeclinable. Se is put for to herself; it is the indirect object of the verb. EXERCISE. Your sister met my mother this morning, and. pret. def. PARTICIPLE. 349 gave her very bad news Your sister has rendered pret. ind. herself celebrated by her wit and beauty. My celcbre esprit, m. mother has bought herself a fine gown ; my sister had acheter made herself a good cloak ; and my brothers had built faire mantelet, m. bdtir themselves an elegant house.' They found themselves pret. ind. surrounded by soldiers, who carried them to prison, conduire, pr. ind. where they have been detained for eight days ; but retenir pendant they have been found innocent of the crime with which they were accused, and are at last (acquitted.) The renvoyer absous city of Liverpool has rendered itself flourishing by its Jlorissant trade. commerce, m. RULE 33. When the auxiliary verb and the participle past form an impersonal verb ;* that is to say, when they are used impersonally, the participle is indeclinable ; for, not being active verbs, they can have no direct objects ; therefore cannot be preceded by any. Ex. La grande inondation qiiil afait. (Marmontel.) y a eu. La disette qu'tt y a en cet L'excessive secheresse qu'il hiver. ^ EXERCISE. The rain which (we have had) has done a great deal pluie f. y avoir of harm. The storm which (we had) lately mal, m. tempcte, f. y avoir dernierement has done much damage to our ships. The heavy mal, ra. * Let the learner recollect that a verb is known to be impersonal when the pronoun il, which precedes it, does /not relate to any person or thing expressed before ; that is to say, when we cannot substitute for that pro- ' noun the name of a person or thing already mentioned! 350 PARTICIPLE. showers which, (we have had) this week,, have prevented pluie, f. y avoir empccher we from- going into the country. The high wind a. campagne grand which, (they have had) in die county of Kent, has y avoir comtc unrooted many trees., deraciner , RULE 34. "Whenever the infinitive of a verb expressed before the participle past of the verbs de-coir, pouvoir and vonloir, is understood after the participle, this participle is indeclinable ; for the verb that is in ellipsis is the direct object of the participle, and ooines after it. Ex. Je vous al montre la recon- I have shown you the gra- noi&sajice qiiejai da., titude I ought. J'aijajt a cet enfant toutes I have given that child all let caresses quefaipn, the caresses 1 could. Ma sceur a obtenu, tons les My sister has obtained all secours quelle a voiilu, the assistance she wished. Sentence 1. The gratitude which I ought, que jai 4u WHAT ? montrer. 2. All the caresses I could, que j'ai pit WHAT ? Jaire. . 3, The assistance she wished, quelle a voulu.~~* WHAT ? obtenir. In all the above examples, the answers to tichat ? come, after the participles da,, pu y and voulu ; they are, therefore, indeclinable. EXERCISE. He has obtained from the minister all the favours he wished.-- You have loved your neighbour if vonloir, pret. indef. prochain, sing. you have dene him all tlxe services you could. rendre lui pouvoir, pret. ind. I have not paid all the attention which I ought *~T * Jaire devoir, cond. comp. to the advice } T t>ur father gave me. My son avis, m. pret indef. PARTICIPLE. 351 (might hare) improved more ;* but he has not made all auroit pu profiler davantage the efforts he could. cond. comp. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE OX THE PARTICIPLES PAST. I know your sisters ; I have seen them and spoken to them several times. I know they are excellent musi- cians. Have you ever heard them sing ? Yes ; several duets ; and the first which I heard them sing pret.ind. were Italian. What were the first that you heard pret. ind. them sing ? They were taken from the operas of Metastasio. Is not your mother in the country? Mctastase a Yes, Sir ; she has been there these six months. f Does 9 she often write to you? Very often; I received a letter from her last week ; and I have received two this fen week. Have you read the letters of which I spoke to, you this morning ? Yes ; I have read them, and have. heard them read. Have you heard that Mrs. B. has on i dire destroyed herself? Xo; has she really destroyed, donner la mart se herself? Let us always endeavour to imitate the good actions which we have seen done. Is Miss D. at Clifton ? Yes ; I saw her go out of church this morn* * A verb governed by arotLer verb is always to be put in the present of tile infinitive ; therefore im/rrnt-cri must be rendered br pro/tier. f See the Rule 15, page 321. . 352 PARTICIPLE. ing ; she then walked on the crescent. --We sepromener, pret. ind. have given ourselves a great deal of trouble to serve him. Have you had the happiness to succeed? Yes we have ; and we rejoice (at it) Do you know, said I en the other day to my little Louisa, who has created you ? Yes, papa, replied she ; it is he, who from my birth, tepondre has given me health, and has preserved me for your hap- piness it is God. The heads which you have learnt to draw are very beautiful The fable which you hare begun to learn has always been considered as one of the most beautiful of La Fontaine's. The intense cold we have had during the winter, has been severely felt by the poor. The continual rain which we have had for six weeks, has done much injury to the harvest. pendant - Tell me, my friend, do you think I exaggerated the pret. ind. misfortunes which I predicted you would experience ? pret. ind. No ; you (did not exaggerate) them at all ; you judged or> pret. ind. pret. ind, them rightly. The two men after having fought for a long bien ^ ** time, and having abused each other, are recon- se dire des injures <* <** tiled; and have promised to be always friends. 1 know 1 it (I am not ignorant) of the dispute ; my father savoir je n ignore pas has told me of it ; he has recounted it to me in detail. ADVERB. 353 CHAP VI. OF ADVERBS. Adverbs have been distinguished, according to their several significations, into adverbs of place, time, quality, quantify, number, order, affirmation, negation, doubt, inter- rogation, comparison, collection, separation, &c. But this classification, however ingenious, is far from being exact : it was therefore judged, that, if those of the most frequent use, and which, when compounded, form a particular idiom, were carefully selected, and arranged in an alpha- betical series, it would be more to the advantage of the learner. TABLE OF ADVERBS. Abondamment, abundantly, plentifully. A I' abandon, at random, in confusion, in disorder. D'abord, at first, immediately, Absolument, absolutely. D 'accord, granted, done. Agrtablement, pleasantly, comfortably. Ainsi (de meme), so, thus, in the same manner, Aiscment, Facilement, easily. Mai aisement, Difficilement, with difficulty. Dans un an d'ici, a year hence. L'anee qui vient, the next year. Anciennement, ") /. , . ., Autrefois,^ ') formerly, anciently. En ami, friendly, in a friendly manner. A I'amiable, amicably. En arriere, Tomber en arriere, to fall backward. A reculons, Marcher d, reculons, to walk backward. Assez, enough. Assurement, Surement, Certainement, certainly. Aujourd'hui, to-day. Time to f Z) 'aujourd'hui en huit, this day se'night. come. \D' aujourd'hui en quinze, this day fortnight. fll y a aujourd'hui huit, jours, this day week, {this day se'n- night. ^ ' II y a aujourd'Juti, quinze jours, this day fort- night. II y a aujourd'hui un an, this day twelve months. 854 ADVERB. Autant, as much, as many. D'atitant plus, so much the more. D'autant mains, so much the less. Tout autant,~l . , . Tout ctussi, I J ust as much > J ust as Dorcnavant, in future. A Pavenir, for the future, hereafter. ^FAngloise, after the English manner, fashion, or way. Al'Italienne, after the Italian, $c. A la Fran$oise, after the French, $c. A la Titryue t after the Turkish, c. EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. Our garden produces all kinds of fruits plentifully. sorte, f. Your sister left it all in disorder. You did laisser, v. <& not know me at Jirst - He would absolutely doit. vouloir, v. If you please, I will go to London with you. Done. vouloir, v. I hope we shall spend the day pleasantly. Have passer, v.- we not spent this so ? My brother learns his lessons easily, and I vcith difficulty, A year hence you will (be able) to speak French tolerably well. My father says. I shall go to France next year. It was thought so formerly^ I have had the honour of seeing you. r ormerly, but I do not recollect where, I believe it autrefois se rappeler, v. was at Mr. P.'s who received us in zjriendly manner Your brother and mine have settled their affairs amicably. renter, v. rrMake two steps backward He cannot see his \vay pas, m. who walks backward* Have you played enough ? * Say, He who walks becftisard cannot t &c. ADVEKB. 555 Certainly you must be tired -- We do not expect him de-voir, v. to day - If it be fine weather I shall be back de retour this day sennight. - L shall see you this day fortnight if I be well. - This dayiveek I was (at your house). chez vans This day month I met your brother. - 1 came here id, adv. this day twelve months. -- He has as much money and as many friends as you. I was so much the more persuaded of what you told me, that I dismissed him. this day three r envoy er, v. weeks. -"I will do it so much the less, as I promised him not to meddle with that affair. -- My sister has de se ineler, v. de, p. just as much wit, and is just as amiable as yours. Your son has given you some trouble, but I hope he maiSf c. will give you pleasure hereafter. -- She dresses after s'habiller, v. ihe English fashion, but she lives after the French way. - - She plays after the Italian manner. - Your si&ter lias a cap after the Turkish fashion. bonnet, m. ADVERBS. off > down ' dovvu with > below . En badinant, for fun. |^"^ } much, many, a great deal. A beaucoup pres,. nothing near. De beaucoup^ by much, greatly, much. JBien, well, very. Ue bon cceur, heartily, with a good will. De bonne foi, 7 Sinctrcnwt, j * 356 ADVERB. De bonne heure, betimes. De bonjeu, fairly. De bon matin, early. De bouche, by word of mouth, la bonne heure, in good time, luckily, well and good. ^ bon droit, deservedly. A bon marche, cheap. A bride abattue, full speed. Cd et Id, to and fro. A cause de quoi, pour quoi? on what account? A cela pres, that excepted. Cependant, in the mean while, nevertheless, yet. A cheval, on horseback. EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. Hats off, gentlemen, and'si t down. The whole army surrendered, and laid dowi their arms upon the ram* mettre, v. les parts of the citadel. There is a man beloiv, whom you en bas irfll see with pleasure. -We said it for fun, yet cependant he was very angry with us. There were many centre, p. ladies, and we had a great deal of pleasure. You way say what you please, but she is nothing pouvoir, v. il vous plaira, v. near so handsome as her sister. He has much increased his fortune. Whatever you do, do it well. If you do not do it with a good tuttl, I will do it myself. He has acted very sincerely in that business. Do you speak sincerely ? We will get up betimes. Have I not se lever, v. won * fairly ? We will set out early, that we may arrive before th^heat of the day. It (is ^tnleur, f. valoir ADVERB. 357 better) to tell it him by ivord of mouth, than to write to mieux, v. de him. -Sir, I have done my exercise. Well and good. He has obtained it deservedly. My father obtenir, v. has bought a horse very cheap.' -Do you see those two horsemen, who come to \isjull speed? They wandered cavalier, m. errer to and fro without knowing whither to go. On what account is he angry with me ? ' That excepted, I have nothing to reproach him with. 1 should speak; a reprocher, v. lui & devoir, v. yet I (hold my tongue.) Miss White is very handsome, se tairc, v. nevertheless I do not love her. Some went to London in a coach, others on horseback en, p. ^ ADVERBS. Combien, how much, how many, how ? Combien y a-t-il que, ") Combien de terns y a-t-il que, I Combien yavoit-il que, ^ h m - Let every one speak in his turn, for if you speak all a together, how can I hear what you say ? How many times did I tell you to write to your parents ? 1 pret. ind. de spoke to him only once, but I saw him twee.* My pret. ind. pret. ind. father generally goes to Germany tlirice a year. 1 told it you three times. 1 saw him so many pret. ind. pret. ind. times. Do you go often to London ? I go now and then. The king strongly opposed the enemy in the action, where he fought gallantly. Your little melee, f. combattre, v. sister is very pretty. In all that they undertake they always act stoutly.- My brother knows French tho- roughly. They demolished the house from top to bottom. I travelled in a (post-chaise) drawn by three horses chaise de posie, f. attelce de abreast. Always behave genteelly. Your brothers came to see us, and we received them politely.' The wine runs from the hogshead by drops. Give him but little wine. 'XeverJ do 3 things in haste. Is Nejamais, adv. Mr. D. above stairs? Go up stairs, you will find what you (look for) in the drawer behind the door. chercher, v. tiroir, m. dernere, p. After Having (waited for) him hourly, he arrived at last, attendre, v. * Jc tie fui ai fcrlg yiftttteftrit. ADVERB. 365 - We see the army increasing every hour. 1 went grossir, v. yesterday to London. It rained very much last nighl y and it has frozen very hard this morning. The day be~ fors yesterday I met your brother, who was riding se proinener, v. on horseback, it clieval ADVERBS. Id, here. Id autour, hereabouts. Id prcs, hard by. I)' id, hence. Dans I'espace de quinzc jours, within a fortnight. Dans quinze jours, in a fortnight. Par id, this way. Par id par la, here and there. A I' instant, immediately, instantly. Jamais, ever. Nc-jamais, never.* A Jamais, for ever. Justement, just, precisely. Jus q u (I quand? how long ? Jusqu'id, hitherto, as far as this. Jusque-lil, so far, as far as that. Jusqn'ou. ? how far ? De jour, in the day time. Dcjour * autre, j from d ay to-day. Dejour en jour, J Chaque jour, daily. De deux en deux jours, \ De deux jours i'un, > every other day. Tons les deux jours, I EXERCISE OX THESE ADVERBS. (Did I not tell you to) stay here? How many miles Ne vous anois-je pas dil de is it hence to Hampton-Court? There must be a // doit, v. * Jamais being a negative adverb, requires the negation >:c to be placed before the verb it qualifies. S6S ADVERB. great deal of game hereabouts. - How long has he gibier, m. Jived hard by? How far is it hence to Canterbury ? Cantorbtry I will call upon your brother ivithin a fort night. Come passer chez tin's icay. Come back immediately. They invited him instantly to dine with them. 1 do not believe that u he et-cr will follow your advice. My father never (by the subj.) conseil, m. will see him again. Great men will for ever be celebrated in history. (This is) just what I say. Hmv (fans I'nila, adv. long, O Catiline, will you abuse our patience ? abuser, v. de Hitherto the enemy has done nothing considerable. Learn this piece of poetry asjar as that. Hole far pocsic, f. will you go? You always come to see me by night ; fie why do not you come in the day-time? We expect from day to-day to receive news from the Continent. de We are daily exposed to great dangers.' My master cornea 'here every other day. I shall go to France and Italy in a fortnight. ADVERBS. La, there, thither. La antour, thereabouts. Lei IMS, yonder. De la, ^ , En dett, J thence - Par l, that way. Loin, Yar. De l',in, afar ofF, at a distance. Long-temsy a long while, long tia;e. Lors, then, at the time. ADVERB. 367 Al-trs, 7 ., Povrlors, j lhen ' DCS lors, from that time. Mai, ill, wrong. Mainteitaitt, now. Midiocrem cnt, i n d i ffe r en tly . Mcme, even, yet. De meme, so, in the same manner. Mieux, better. De nneitx en mieu.r, better and better. nloiiij, less. JMoins Mains, the less the less. A MOM*, for less. An mains. Du mains. ~> . , Tout an moins, j at Ieast ' at the least ' En moins cle rien, in a trice. Naivanent, plainly, ingenuously. Naturellement, naturally, by nature. An naturel, to the life. Nc, Jii, ni, neither nor. De nuit, by night, in the night-time. Oi>!igenminent t kindly, obligingly. Ou, where. Non; nonpas; ne; ne-pas; ne-point; point; no; not, OBSERVATION' OX THE ADVERB OU. The adverb of place, OH, \vhere, is most commonly and more elegantly turned into French by que after the two other adverbs, id, here, la, there, to prevent the hiatus caused by the meeting of the two vowels ; and sometimes after nouns expressing the place where some- thing has happened, been done or committed, especially when the sentence begins with the verb itre, to be, used impersonally, as it is, it was, it ;c//V be^ &c. Ex. C'est id que nous ratic;i- It is here (where) we are dons, waiting for him. Ce Jut la que je h vis pour It was there (where) I saw la premiere Jois, him for the first time. Ce fat en plein scnnt que It was in full senate (where Cesar fut inhumainement or in which) Ciesar was inhumanly murdered. 368 ADVERB. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADVERBS non ; non pas ; ne; ne* pas ; ne-point ; point ; no ; not. NON ; NON PAS. 1. NON is directly opposite to oui, yes; it never ac- companies a verb. If the sentence be continued, con- taining a verb used negatively, it must be attended by another negation. Ex. NON, Have you done it ? No. Lefercz-vous? NON,J NE Will you do it? No, I lejeraijamais, never will. DUes oui ou NON, Say either yes or no. 2. NON is sometimes repeated to give a greater force to the negation. Ex. NON, NONJC rfy consentirai No, no, 1 never will con- jamais, sent to it. 3. NON is sometimes used without any direct oppo- sition to oui. Ex. // en est Jache, NON sans He is sorry for it, not with- cause, out cause. 4-. NON may be joined to an adjective in order to give it a contrary meaning. Ex. Desgen$ vox interesses agi- Disinterested people would roient autrement, act differently. ,5. NON is sometimes used as a substantive. Ex. // ne rcpond presyite jamais He hardly ever answers but quc par un oui on un NON, by yes or no. 6. NON and PAS are often used together, particularly jn familiar conversation. Ex. \ Me pcrmcttrez-vous de pren- Will you give me leave to dre cet ceillet ? take this carnation ? NON FAsje vous en prie, 1 would rather be excused. ADVERB. 369 OBSERVATIONS ON NE. NE may be used \vithout either pas or point. 1. Before the verbs cmer, to cease; oser, to dare; savoir, to know; and pou-coir, to be able; particularly when this last verb is used in the conditional with the meaning of pouvoir. Ex. II NE CESSE de parhr, He talks incessantly. t/e N'OSE la contredire, I dare not contradict her. Je NE PUIS me commander, I cannot command myself. Je NE PUIS, or je NE SAU- I cannot be silent. no is me taire, Je NE SAIS em il est. I do not know where he is. 2. In interrogations of this kind, Est-il rien (jui mappartienne Is there any thing of mine dont vo2is NE puissiez dis- which is not at your dis- poser ? posal ? Ai-je un protecteur, un ami Have I a protector, a friend que tie soit aussi le votre? that is not also your's. 3. Before a verb that is attended by either a negative pronoun or a negative adverb. Ex. II x'est PF.KSOXNE que fes- There is no one I esteem time plus que Monsieur more than your father? votre pere. ^zlisez j A MAIS des livres Never read immoral books. immoraux, 4. After prendre garde, meaning to take care, when fol- lowed by the conjunction que, which conjunction governs the following verb in the subjunctive. Ex. PRENEZ-OARDE que votre Take care that your friend ami ne commctle cctte im- commit not this impru- prudence, dence. 5. Before the verbs that follow the conjunction que commanded by plus, more ; moins, less ; meilleur, mieux, better; or pire, worse, iu sentences expressing a com- parison. Ex. Voire securest bcaucoupvLVS Your sister is much better instruite QU'O;Z NE pense, informed than it is thought. R 5 .'SJO ADVEKB. Vous lies MOIXS prudent You are not so prudent as I NE croytiis, thought. 6. When these English words nothing but are translated bv iiQ-que ; for in that case the negative indefinite pronoun KIEN is understood in French before the conjunction qite. Ex. /' K r.fuil QUE lire du matin He does nothing but read an soir, from morning to night. That is to say, il nefali EIEN quelire,. &c. Je NE ve.ux QUE fo/re i/e, I have nothing but your good at heart. 7. After the interrogative particle que, used at the be- ginning of a sentence, in the acceptation of pourquoi ? Why ? Ex. QUE K'ctes-vous venuplutit? Why did you not come sooner ? 8. After dcpais que, since, or il y a-que, it is since, when the verb following que is in the preterite indefinite or prctcrphiperfecl, and the sentence expresses the time since which an action has not taken place. Ex. DCPUIS QUE nous x'avons Since \ve have not been etc en France, in France. IL Y A deux ans QUEje NF. I have not seen him these Vai vu t tv.-o years. IL y AVOIT 1rois mots QUE I had not seen your sister je N'rttWi- r votre sceur, for three months. 9. When two negatives are joined by the conjunction .jz/, or when this conjunction ni conies before two nour.s .substantive or adjective, two pronouns, or two ad- verbs. Ex. Jc K'aime yi,y 9 estime Man- I neither Icve nor esteem gifur B. Mr. 1}. A*/ fa pa Hi- re ^ileriche XE Neither the poor nor the scrrt exempts de in mort, rich are exempt from death. 10. "He-fore the verb that follows the conjunction que, when this is preceded by the verb doiiiw, to doubt, omier, ADVERB. S?l to deny, whenever they are used negatively. Also before the verb that follows the conjunction que, when this is preceded by the verb craindre, or by one of these expres- sions, dc crainte que, de peur que, for fear that, if we do not wish that the action expressed by the following verb should take place. Ex. Je NE donte PAS, je r.c nie I do not doubt, I do not PAS qiC'd XE soil arrive, deny that he is arrived. NoitscraigHOits, ou dc crainte \Ve fear he is ill, o?- for (iC'd xzsoit malade, fear he should be ill. . If we wish for the action expressed aftef the conjunction that follows craindre, or dc crainte, de pear should take place, then pas or point must be ex- pressed. Ex. Nous craignons quil ME soil, We fear lie is not arrived. PAS arrive, NE-PAS ; NE-POINT. I. Whenever the verb is in the present of the infinitive, either both parts of the negation ne pas or tie point may be placed before the verb, or the verb may be placed be- tween them. Ex. z In order not to be impor- PAS ctre imporluii, tunate. Pour NE PAS sonjfrir, ou Not to suffer his insults. NE soitjfrir PAS sea in- snltes, 2. If the verb is in any of the simple tenses ne must pre- cede the verb, and pas or -point comes after it. Ex. Je NE parle PAS, I do not speak. 3. When the verb is in a compound tense, ne is to be placed before the auxiliary verb, and pas comes after it. Ex. Ji? NW PAS parlt, I have not spoken* PAS and POINT are nol to be used indiscriminate!:/. It is very proper to observe that point denies more strongly, and is more exclusive than pas. For example, if I say ce jeune Iinmme nc parle point, it may be under- siooil that he is dumb; but if I say ce jeune honir.u XE 372 ADVERB. PARLE PAS, I mean, and it is understood, that at this moment he is not speaking. If I say of such a person, it ne dort PAS, it will be understood that he is not at present asleep ; but if I say, il ne dort point, every body will un- derstand that he cannot get any sleep. 1 shall therefore say 1. PAS is to be preferred to point before nouns which denote a degree of quality or quantity, such as plus t more j moins, less; beaucoup, much, many, &c. Ex. Jln'a PAS BEAUCOUP cfaww, He has not many friends. 2. PAS is to be preferred to POINT when applied to any accidental or transient action. Ex. Nonjils nt'tudie pas, My son is not studying. Monjils rfetudie point, Would imply that he never studies. OBSERVATION ON POINT. POINT is sometimes used instead of non, but pas never. Ex. Je le croyois won ami} mais, I thought him my friend; J>OINT, but, no. EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. It was there or thereabouts that I met him.' Do you see that tree yonder? Thence I went to France, and soon after to Germany. If you go that way, you apres, p. may (call at) Mr. H.'s. We are yet far pouvoir, v. passer chcz from our house. 1 saw him yesterday, but it was at a distance." You made me wait q long idiHe. The fight lasted a long time. He was ill at the time of combat, m. jny arrival. Now I believe you. -From that time I began to speak to him. Does your son behave conuner.cer, v, ADVERB. S73 ill noiv? When I do wrong, I repent immediately.* They are noto in England. The tree that I planted grows indifferently. Virtue is amiable even in an enemy. You blame him, and nevertheless you act in the same agir, v. manner. You work letter than your sister. She reads French better and better. My cousin has less money and merit. The less you work, the less (by the fut.) you will improve. He will not do \tjbr less. foire des pr ogres. There are now in America 30,000 men at least. If you cannot come, at least write to us. He replied plainly to all my questions, and I am much pleased with him. de, p. What he does, he does (it) naturally. Miss Nichol's picture is drawn to the life. I will neither see portrait, m. fait, p. p. Je ne veux ni him nor speak to him. My mother and sisters were to go next week to France ; but my father says, that he neither can (nor will) expose them to the caprice of the ne ni ne veut fashion which now reigns in that country. I (asked for) mode, f. demander, r. a glass of wine, and not a glass of water. Will you come with me ? Ac, for you always travel by night. Always speak kindly. Where did you meet them ? It was here that I saw your brother for the last time.* q.ue * I repent of \t.-JenCen< S74 ADVERB. It was at Caernarvon where Ed\vard the Second was que born, the first who bore the title of Prince of Wales. na'itre, v. Galles, f. , It was near the walls of Corunna in Spain, where (or that} the brave Sir John Moore was -wounded, Chevalier, m. and died a few hours after ; England will long regret the loss of that great general. Have you executed my Borders ? No, Sir. Will your brother gp and see his uncle? No, he will not go. Do you know if our friend will go to France this year? No ; I have asked him ; but he neither said le lui m'a rcpondu yes nor no. Do you intend to continue (your visits to) compter a voir Mr. D. ? No, no ; be easy about it. You are t ran quill e ><>> a strange being ; I never can get from you either yes or no.* My mother is always angry with me ; I know not fiiche cnntre what to do to please her. What has happened to que * pour lui your brother ? I cannot tell it you ; it would make cela rendre you miserable. I dare not mention it to anybody. . malheureux. pnrler, en personne Is there a French emigrant that does not feel the liveliest gratitude for the English nation ?"f 1 have seen nobody this day Will you never go to Prance? Take care our mother be not informed of your father's death;.}: * Sc-e Observation 5, on xox; KOX PAS. f- See Observation 2, on NE. j See O.bicnatiaii 4, o.: >:E. ADVERB. r>:.-, The effect would be more dangerous than you think.* That poor n)an has eaten nothing these two days but a crust of bread.t He looks strong. Yes ; he is a Vair strong Well then ; why does he not work ?J lie bien done Neither you nor I can boast of being without defect. My mother (was afraid) you were ill. Tell me, Ma- craiudre dam, have you not read Shakespeare ? Yes ; I have, not only once ; but three or four times The non pas nnefois army was on foot the 3 whole 1 night 3 (in order) not to be J~ut sur afin de (taken by surprise) 1 (am afraid) they will be beaten. surprise crains qiC Mr. O. will never succeed, he has no friends. How is your brother ? He is still very ill ; he gets encore no sleep ; he does not eat ; he is in great danger. en The physician told us, last week, that in a day or two he < would be out of danger ; bat, no.|| /tors ADVERBS. JQVt ? whence ? Par ou ? through what place ? which way ? through which ? Oui, yes, D'outre en outre, through. Pas (1 pas, step by step. De park ct d'atitre, on both sides. * See Observation 5, on NE. f See Observation 5', on NE. J See Observation ", on NE. To get sleep ; dormir. |; See t!ie Observation on />-jV ver ? near > thereabouts. Dans pen, in a short time. Depuis pen, lately, not long ago, a little while ago. A pied, on foot. A pieds nuds, barefoot, barefooted. Au pis oiler, let the worst come to the worst. Depis en pis, worse and worse. De plein gre, with a good will, freely. De plein pied, on the same floor. A pleines mains, largely. Plus, more, above. Plus plus, the more the more. Plus qu'il ri enfant, more than enough. Au plus, tout au plus, at the most. Deplus en plus, more and more. Aplusjbrte raison, much rather, much more so. . EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. Did my brothers tell you whence they came ? - < Which imper. are they gone ? -- The hole through which they (made their escape) was so small, that I do not know how s'echapper. v. they could get out. Do you know your lesson ? Yes, pret.def. Sir. - The barrel is pierced through. I will follow baril, m. you step by step. -- The battle was cruel and combat, ra. pret. def. bloody, and kept up a long time with an sanglant, adj. se maintenir, v. equal advantage on both sides. I can find my book no-tvhere. - There is no going any-ivkere in winter. He speaks so low, that I can hardly hear what he says, ADVERB. 377 The Spaniards pursued them so closely that Espagnolt m. de si pres, adv. they entered the town helter-skelter. I shall see you perhaps to-morrow He has Uttl-e money. If you give me a verb, I will learn it by little and little. She is as tall as you, or thereabouts. 1 heard that your sister will be married in a short time. Have you heard from your mother lately ? 1 received a letter from her not long ago. 1 was on foot, and he was in a coach. en *>- I often pity the poor little chimney sweepers, plaindre chemiiiee, f. ramoneur de m. who walk barefooted in winter Let the worst come to the ivorst, I will (get rid) of it. Your brother writes se defaire, v. worse and worse. He submitted to it "with a good iniU* All our rooms are on the same Jloor. He is so charitable, that he gives alms largely. 1 shall aumone, f. never more complain of the rude reception malhonncte, adj. accueil, m. which your uncle has given to my father. I have fait, p. p. written three letters, neither more nor less. You are above twenty years old* The more we are above au dessus de, p. others, the more it becomes us to be modest and humble.f You give me more than enough. You study more than ever. -How many coats have you ? I have six' J'en ai * Say, You have more than twenty years, vous AVEZ I'LUS DE...* t See Rule 11, page 45. SI3 ADVERB. (at the most. 1 ) < < I shall endeavour to deserve your kind- ness more and more. If I have done that to oblige pour, p. my friend, I would much more so do it for rry relations. ADVETIBS. Plutot, sooner. Point du tout, not all. /I point nomine, seasonably. Tout a point, in the nick of time. Apropos, to the purpose, a propos. Pourquoi ? or que TIC ? wby ? if the sentence be negative. De pres, near, nearly, narrowly. Premiereincnt, 7 .. - v. c . En premier lieu, j first, m the first place. Dei present, from this moment. Prexjne, almost. Pre->que jamais, hardly ever. Presque toujours, most commonlv. De propos delibere, on purpose, purposely, deliberately, intentionally, designedly. Par casfortuit, by chance, accidentally. Par derricre, behind. Par dessus le marchc, into the bargain. Par en bas, downward. Par en haut, upward. Par malice, through ill-nature, out of ill-nature. Par mf-garde, unawares. Par terre, upon the ground, down. EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. My father arrived yesterday sooner than we expected ne him. How do you like that book ? Not at all. You come very seasonally, and your brother came in the nick of time. He speaks little, but he speaks to the \ purpose Why do you not leara your lessons better ? Why do you not come yourself? He narrowly ADVERB. 379 escaped being killed. - In the frst place, I must tell d'etre, v. you, that I shall punish you, if you do not behave se comporter,\. better. - From this moment I begin to believe that you a are altered. - You are almost as tall as I am. - change, p. p. He is hardly ever at home. -- We dine most commonly between three and four o'clock. - They killed him entre, p. designedly. - 1 met him by chance. That has happened accidentally. - He struck his enemy behind. frapper, v. - He gave me three yards of muslin into the bargain. mousseline y f. Shall I begin downward or upward? Begin down- ward. - He has torn my book through ill-nature. dcc/iirer, v. - If I have done him any harm, certainly I did it un- awares. - 1 always find your books and hat upon the ground. - It was Peter who threw me down. jetter, v. ADVERBS. Qiiand ? when ? Depuia quand? how long is it since ? Que? why ? how ? QuelquefoJs, sometimes. A quoi bon ? to what purpose ? Rarement, seldom. Au rente, 1 ., Du reste, j as to the rest ' A rcbours, the wrong way. sijarenverse, backward, upon one's back. A rectdons, backward. A rez de chanssce, even with the ground. Sens dessns dessous, topsy-turvy. ScparcmeiU, separately. 380 ADVERB. Settlement, only.* De sangfroid, in cold blood. De suite, together, one after another. Dans la suite, 1 afWwflr .i Par la suite, | a Sur le champ, directly, upon the spot. Surement, safely. EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. When shall I have the pleasure of seeing you ? HOIK long is it since you lived in London ? Why do a you not come to see us sometimes? To what purpose shall I write to him ? He writes to me very seldom.' As to the rest, do as you please. You do every thing the wrong tvay.< You hold your book the "wrong way. He fell upon his lack. If you walk backward, you will fall backward. Our eating-room is even with the ground. She has left (every thing) topsy-turvy. He defeated them separately. 1 only saw him once. He committed the murder in cold blood. They meurtre, m. go together. He will give you much pleasure afterward. Do directly what I bid you. -We arrived safely, dire, v. ADVERBS. Tant, so much, so many. Tant mieux, so much the better. Tant vis, so much the worse. Tanlot) by and by, sometimes. * Only is also expressed, in French, by ne before the verb, and que after it, when it can be turned into not, but. Ex. I have only two children i that is to say, I have not but two children ; je n'ai que deux enfant. ADVERB. 381 Tantot tantot, sometimes sometimes. T6 f soon ' Tot ou tard, one time or other, sooner or later, soon or late. Tant so:t pen, very little, ever so little. Tard, late. A terns, time enough, in proper time. De long-terns, for a long time, this long while. De terns en terns, 7 i ^i c De terns a autre, j now and then > from time t0 tune ' A^ tort, wrongfully. A tort ou a droit, right or wrong. A tort et a trovers, at random. Trop, too much, Toujours, always, ever. Pour toiijours, for ever. Tons les jours, every day. Tour (1 tour, by turns. Tout, quite, wholly, thoroughly, entirely.* Tout (i coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. Tout bas, softly, with a low voice. Tout d'un coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. EXERCISE. He has 50 much money, and so many goods, that marchandise, f. he does not know what to do (with them.) - (It is) so ne suit qii en, pro. c'esl, v. much the better for me ; but it will be so much the worse ce for you. - My father will come back by and by. - revenir,v. Sometimes you write well, sometimes you write very badly. - My father says I shall soon go to France. - Have patience, you will succeed one time or other. - The sun * Tliis adverb takes the nature of a noun adjective, and becomes decli- nable in Fremlj, when placed before another adjective feoiiniue beginning with a consonaiit. Ex. Ces femmts paruLsuicnt tout These women seemed quite frigUt- eJ/Tfyvcs tt ttulcs cQHtterne&f eueJ and quite UiaUiavcJ, 3S2 ADVERB. is the emblem of truth, which dispels, sooner or later, dissiper, v. the vapours of slander. - Did he give you any nauvaises influences meat ? He gave me very little * - You arrived laie t but I came in proper time. - 1 have not heard from my brothers/or a longtime, Come and see us now and thai. You accuse him wnmgjvtty. - Right or tcro#, he will speak, and always speaks at random. - Give couloir, v. him a little money, but never give him too wmc/i.f You ahcays contradict me when I speak. O my chil- dren! be ever good, and you will be ever happy. - 1 bid you adieuybr ever. - 1 go every day to town ---- Vdire, v. We will danoc by turns. I am quite tired with repeat- ed ing rise same things. - My sisters were quite transported with joy when they heard the happy news of the apprendre .^^ictory. - Misfortunes come sometimes suddenly upon us. -- Speak snfthj. - A storm arose suddenly, and s'tkvcr, v. all the sailors were quite frightened -- The ladies I saw at the play were quite young and agreeable. cl ADVERBS. Tout fiftiit, quite. Tout a I'hcure, this minute, presently. Tout droit, straight along. Tout dc ban, in good earnest. Tont haul, aloud. * Translate this sentence as if there were, he gnre me very H't'e r>f it, t Of i! is ucdmtOvd and must be expressed ;n Frer.ch. ADVERB. 383 D'oulre en outre, through and through. A tons cgards, in all respects. De toutes scs forces, with all his or her might. Par tout, every-where. Par tout OH, wherever. Vite, Vttoncnt, Vivement. ,, . , tothe( i utck - A vide, empty. An plus inte, with all speed. Fo/c?', here is, behold. Voilit, there is, behold. A i'ue cTceil, perceptibly. y, there, therein, within, thither. EXEKCISE. You are quite altered. 1 will do \t presently. If you do not come this minute, I shall go and fetch you. cliercher, v. Go straight along. Do you believe it in good earnest? Hc ran him tfirougk mtd through; She is percer, r. better than her sister iu all respects, He struck me J rapper, v. with all his might. 1 have (looked for) you every-ivhere. cherdur, v. 1 will follow you u-hcrever you go. Set out (by the fut.) quickly. Her misfortunes touch me to the quioJc. malheur, m. The coach was returning empty. Go twV/t all speed to Mrs. Lucas, and tell her to come directly. Here chez, p. de is my room, and there is yours. These children grow perceptibly.' Go thiiher intently. grandir,v. 384 PREPOSITION. CHAP Vil. OF PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions are divided into the three following classes. First, those that are followed by the preposition de ; se- condly, those that are followed by the preposition ; and, lastly, the simple uncompounded prepositions. PREPOSITIONS That govern the genitive or ablative. Autour de, about, round. j$ cause de, because of, on account of. A cause de vous, de lui, d'elle, de nous, &c. on your, his, her, our, fyc. account. A cote de, by, by the side of. Afleur de, close to, even with. A force de,* by dint of. moins de, under. A raison de, at the rate of. A 'abri de, sheltered from, free from. J I'egal de, to, in comparison of. Al'egard de, with regard to, with respect to, as to, con cerning. Alafaveur de, by means of. X I'insfU de, without the knowledge of, unknown. Ala manure, de, 1 in QJ . after the manner or fashion of> A la mode de t j Vis-a-vis de, opposite. Audegade, \ on this side< Ln dec a de, \ An delade, on that side, on the other side. Hors de, out, without. An dessus de, above, over, upon. An dessous de, under, below, beneath. Alkr au de-cant de, to go to meet. Au lieu de, instead of. Au milieu de, in the middle of. Ait prix de, en comparaison de, in comparison to- Faute de, for want of. A la \auteur de, (sea term,) off. Hors de, out of. * This preposition is sometimes Englished by with. Ex, H fleure a force dc rire, He cries with laughing. PREPOSITION. 365 Le long de, along. Loin de, far from. Pour I'amour de moi, de lui, d'elle, de rows, &c. for my sake, for his, her, your sake, &>. Tout aupres de, close, hard by. A I'epreuve de, proof, (able to resist.) EXERCISE. Come this way ; we shall walk round the meadow. - - prairie, f. I have sent nothing to your brother because of his idle- ness ; but I forgive him on your account- - Sit down ly that lady's sister. - Endeavour to be free from blame. v. We are not yet secure from all danger. - Cut that sorrel even ivith the ground. - He is become a very osei'le, f. good master by dint o/"study and practice.- He will vonloir, v. not sell it under twelve guineas. - My brother bought yesterday twenty pair of silk stockings, at the rate of fourteen shillings and sixpence a pair. - Under that Sous, p. tree we shall be sheltered from the rain. - Your horse (is worth) very little in comparison of\\\s.*>With regard valoir, v. to what you say, I do not mind it. All the se soucier, v. de prisoners (made their escape) by means of the darkness of scchapper, v. obscurite, f. the night. - Your brother is gone to London without the knowledge of your mother. - He left off Latin quitter, v. unknown to his father. - Now the English ladies 8W PREPOSITION, dress after the French fashion.^ Mrs. Tart s'habitter t v. Jives in the Strand over-against Catharine-street. denteurer, v. We now lire on this side of the river. Do not you Say that you met my father on the other side of the bridge ? .Why did you stay out of the house ? Mrs.A. is very proud, she thinks herself above every body, and Consequently she (looks upon) every body as beneath her. regarder, v. .P- . Did you observe the elegant lady who was in rentargufr, v. the box below you ? There is a large tree before the loge, f. bouse.- I am going to meet my aunt, will you accom- pany me ? There is a fine statue within the garden. He took my hat instead o/*his.- Let us go in the middle of the meadow. My house (is good) for nothing in valoir, v. *" comparison others. 1 can do nothing^or ivant of money. TBey were off the Cape of Good Hope when they were taken.' Do not push me out of the room. pousser, v. He is gone along the river. We are still./flr/nww our house. 1 met your friend Mr. A. near the church, He passed by me without knowing me. 1 do it sans, p. for your sake as well as for theirs. My best friend lives ^ % close to the Royal Exchange, and he lived formerly close to St. James's palace. The officers and soldiers were PREPOSITION. 38T lodged in barracks cannon and bomb-proof. My caserne, f. canon, m. bombe, f. shoemaker 'very much wanted* to make me a pair of boots dcsirer, v. water-proof, but I had not money enough to pay him, pour, p. PREPOSITIONS that are followed by the preposition a. Conformcment, according, pursuant. Jusqiies'a J l '^' unt ^> even to a 8 f ar as > so f* ar as > to - Par rapport a, with respect, on account. . Pour, quant a, as for, as to. EXERCISE. He has been punished pursuant to an act of parlia- parle- ment. Yesterday we waited for him till five o'clock merit, m. in the morning". They fought with obstinacy on both du sides until the beginning of the night. If I had not entree, f. stopped him, he would have gone even to Dover. V.'e accompanied them as Jar as Rochester, and they pur- sued their way to Canterbury. I will do it for your sake, but never on account of them.' -As for me, I will not give him a penny. As for us, we were very much dissatisfied, I assure you. As to what people niecontent on may say, I do not care for it. pouvoir, v. se soucier, v. SIMPLE USCOMPOUND PREPOSITION'S. Aprts, after. D'aprh, after.* * We make use of this preposition in the following sense only : // feint (r (if res un don mv'are, He paints after a good master. 383 PREPOSITION. A-cant, before. AvcCt with. A trovers, cross, through. Chez, in, to, at, among. C/ifs <>i s chez toi, chez lui, chez elle, chez nous, &c, at or to my, thy, his, her, our, $c. house. Conlre, against. Dans, in, into, within. De, about, through. Depuis, since, from. Derriert, behind. Des, from. De-cant, before. De dessus, from the top. De dessous, from under, from beneath. Durant, during. En, in, into, like, as, at. Entre, between. Envers, towards. Environ, about. Excepte "| Hors, > except, but, save. Hormis, j Moyennant, for, provided. Nonobstant, \ notwithstanding, in spite of. Malgrt, J Outre, beside. Par, by, through. Par depa, on this side. Par dela, on that side. Par derricre, behind. par dessus, above, over. Par dessous, under, below. Parmi, among. Pendant, during, for. Pour, for. Sa?is, without. Savf, saving, but with. Selon, \ accor diiig to. Suivant, } Sous, under. Sur, upon, about. Touchant, concerning, about. Vers, towards, to. PREPOSITION. 380 EXERCISE. Hearrived here an hour after you Miss A. paints after nature. Let me drink before you. Did Laisser y v. you not see her walk with her father ? It was the an- cient Britons, who cut a road through this moun- chemin, m. tain. Such was the custom among the Romans. 1 was going to your house, but as I have met you, we will go to mine, where we shall dine. Do not lean s'appuyer, v. against that wall. Go and take a walk in the garden. I am going into my room. Keep yourself Tenir, v. ivithin the limits of decency. 1 spoke to your father about your affairs. His father died through grief. I have not heard from her since her departure. Go into my room ; you will find a letter behind the looking-glass ; (be so kind as) to bring it to me. Do tniroir, m. avoir la bonte, de not put yourself before me. He behaved well during your absence.- My sister is in England He behaved lilce an honest man in that affair. He acts as a tender father who loves you. Tell nobody what passed between you and me. Be not unjust toivards your neighbours. prochnin, m. It was about four o'clock when we set out. Take pret. def. all that you please, except my sword. 1 give you all 390 PREPOSITION. my books, but the History of France. They were all drowned save my friend. He will do itybr two guineas. noyer, v. I walk every day notwithstanding the bad weather. 1 hope you will succeed in your undertaking in spite of slander. Beside his own money, he spends all his sis- ter's. It is said that Gibraltar is blocked- up by land bloquer, v. and by sea. I have passed through France and Italy. He is a coward who attacks his enemy behind. Let us see whether you can jump over the table.- Look si, c. sauter, v. under the door, and you will see it. Envy, jealousy, and slander, always reign among authors. What mtdisance, f. have you done during my absence ? I have been ex- pecting you for a long time. Your aunt has sent me some books for you. Without him what could I have done ? A woman may please without beauty, but she cannot succeed without virtue. He always goes out without me. The army marched three days and three nights without stopping. He carried away all my furniture, saving my bed. 1 found your buckle meubles, m. pi. boticle, f. under the chair; you said you had left it upon the ^ chaise, f. laisser, v. table. Did not my brother write to you concerning that affair? PREPOSITION. 391 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME PREPOSITIONSv ABOVE. This preposition, when preceding a noun expressing lime or number, so as to signify more than or longer than, is to be rendered in French by plus de. Ex. Le combat dura phis de The fight lasted above two deux heureSf hours. EXERCISE. My brother was not above twenty years old,* when he was married. He made us wait above a week. My father's country-house is very handsome, but it cost pret. def. him above six thousand pounds. In the last sea-fight combat naval which took place between the French and the English, above twelve hundred men perished in the action on the side of the French, and the English took above fifteen ships of the line. It is above a year since my cousin set off for Jamaica. Jamaique, f. AT. 1st. At is most commonly rendered by a, or by one of the French articles au, a la, d /', aux, according to the gender and number of the noun following, wheft that noun takes the article. Ex. Nous etions ti diner, We were at dinner. Elle est a la maison, She is at hcmie. II jane bien aux cartes, He plays well at cards. EXERCISE. If you be at Home, live as they do at Rome. We on "cit * Sajr, My brother had not MoRK THAV, &C. 392 PREPOSITION. will get up next week at six o'clock. When I called passer upon Mr. B. he was at breakfast. Every thing I have chez is at your service. My brother is at Mr. H.'s academy. . Were you at Mrs. C.'s ball last week? You always travel by night at the peril of your life. -I will pay you at the end of the year. My mother is at the height comble, m. of happiness. -He plays very well at chess, and cchecs, m. pi. his companion begins to play a little at draughts. He dames, f. pi. did it at the instigation of his friend. 2dly. After nouns or verls denoting anger, derision, joy, provocation, resentment, sorrow, surprise, or concent, at is rendered by one of the following articles, du, de la t de I', des ; or by the preposition de. x. Jl se moque de vous, He laughs at you. Je me rfjoiiis de votre Ion- I rejoice at your good luck. heur, frous sommes surprls de ce We are surprised at what yuc vous dites t you say, EXERCISE. Exasperated at his conduct, he told him never to laugh Jrrtie, adj. at (poor people). We always ought to rejoice at the malheureux. condit. (good fortune) which befalls our neighbours I am bonhevr arriver, v. Bested at the news which we received last week. A dcsolt good Christian never shows any resentment at the injuries which are offered to him. A patient* man 1 never faire grieves at his misfortunes. I cannot help tfattrister, v. s'empecher, v. PREPOSITION. 393 being surprised at her manner of answering. 1 am concerned at the loss which you sustained. He essuyer, v. pret. def. was mortiSed at the disobedience of his sons. fut. 3dly. At is rendered by chez, when, in English, it pre- cedes the word house, either expressed or understood. The same rule is to be observed with respect to the pre- position to ; and when at or to is followed by the word home, the learner is to look for the possessive pronoun that is understood, and substitute for home the personal pronoun corresponding with the possessive pronoun that is in ellipsis. Ex. J'ctois chez votrejrcre, I was at your brother's. Jc vais chcz Madame Lucas, I am going to Mrs. Lucas's. Nous serons CHEZ NOUS, We shall be at home; that is to say, at our house. II est CHEZ LUI, He is at home ; that is to say, at his home or house. EXERCISE. I called upon Miss Brown this morning, as I had pro- mised your mother; but she was not at home. Where was she then ? She was at her aunt's. 1 thought my done imperf. friend was at her father's ; but I mistook, for he was at his uncle's. How long have you been at Mr. H.'s ? We lodge at my friend's ; but we board at the pastry- cook's. If you go to my brother, tell him to come to de my cousin's, where I am to spend the day, and \ve will passer, v. go together to his friend's. s 5 394 PREPOSITION. BY. 1st. By, when preceding a numeral adjective imme- diately followed by another adjective expressing the di- mension or superficies of an object, is rendered in French by sur; and when it precedes a verb in the participle active, it is then rendered by en. Ex. Cette chambre a dix picds de This room is ten feet long longueur sur sept pieds et by seven and half wide. demi de largeur, En agissant ainsi vous vous By acting thus, you will Jerez des ennetnis, get enemies. EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION". My box is a foot and a half deep by two wide a projbndeur largeur and four long. Our (school-room) at Alfred-House, longueur ccole, f. Camberwell, is forty feet long by thirty-six wide. a longueur largeur You will soon speak French by applying so. ' Your father gets a considerable fortune by buying cheap and faire, v. selling dear. Men acquire learning by working and not by sleeping. Water hollows a stone, not by falling creuser, v. with force, but by falling often ; so a man becomes learned, not by studying with force, but by studying often. 2dly. By, after the verbs to sell, to buy, to -work, and the like, preceding a noun of weight or measure, day, "week, mont/ty or year , is rendered into French by a, or by OK, // la, a /', aux, according to the gender and number of the following noun. Ex. Je ne vtnds rien i la livre, I sell nothing by the pound. 11 achete ioujours a I'aune, He always buys by the ell. Nous travaillons a Vheure, We work by the hour, or by ou a la jour nee, the day. PREPOSITION. 593 EXERCISE. Always buy tea by the pound, and never by the ounce, you will get it cheaper. 1 never buy my cloth by the ell, but by the piece. How do you sell your brandy ? We sell it by the gallon, and not by the bottle. Hft sells his wise by the dozen. 1 sell eggs by the hundred. How do you measure your cambric ? by the ell, or batiste, m. by the yard ? Does your father work by the week or by the month ? He .works by the year. 3dly. By, immediately following the verbs to Ml, to tcound, to knock down, and the like, is made into French by d'un coup de, when it expresses the effect, blow, thrust, stroke, firing, &c. of an instrument by which a man was either killed, wounded, &c., provided the blows have not been repeated : if the blows have been repeated, we make use of d coups de, in which case it is most conv* monly rendered in English by with. Ex. II Jut blesse d'un coup de He was wounded by an jleche, arrow. Us r assommcrent d coups de They knocked him down baton, with a stick. EXERCISE. Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an arrowr, au which Paris, king Priam's son, (let fly) (at his) lui df cocker, v. au heel. At last the king, having broken his battle- talon, m. E>ifin> adv. liache- axe and sword, was knocked down by a stone, and d'armes, f. renversc, p. p. taken prisoner. William the Second was killed by fait, p. p. S96 PREPOSITION. an arrow in the New Forest. My brother vras wounded by a gun, and my cousin was killed by a cannon-ball. fusil, m. canon, m. Edward the First was wounded in Palestine tvith a poisoned 3 dagger 1 . He is so strong, that tvith his poignard, m. &* fist he could knock down an ox. He threw my brother poing down, and almost killed him with his feet. They par terre, killed him not tvith stones, but toitk arrows. FOR. For, after reflected verbs, and those which denote thanksgiving, &c., is rendered by one of the following Articles, du, de la, de /', des ; or by the preposition fa. Ex. Nous sommes dcsotts, de ce We are sorry for what has qui vous et arrive, happened to you. EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. I am very grateful for all your kindness. rcconnoissant, adj. bonle, f. He is very sorry Jbr the grief he has caused you. - When we have reached the age of reason, we are often atteindre, v. sorry, tout too late, for the time we lost when we pi'et. def. vere young. My brother desired me to thank you for de the part you took in his troubles. Every one pret. def. peine, f. Jeapedyor joy, when the happy news of peace arrived. sing. A child who cares - little for those who gave se soucier, v. pen pret. ind. him life, is an unnatural being.- An ungrateful SOH denature, adj. will be punished (one time or other) for his ingratitude. tot ou tard PREPOSITION. 397 FROM. From, preceding the name of a man or tooman, or one of the personal, possessive, relative, or interrogative pro- nouns, after the verbs to go, to come, to send, &c. is gene- rally rendered in French by de la part de, or de ma t de sa, de notre part, de votre part, &c. Ex. Allez de ma part chez Gofrom me to Mr. D. Mpns. D. Ji viens de sa part, I come from him or her. EXERCISE. Go from me to Miss Dunkin's and tell her I shall be glad to see her. From whom do you come? said she to me. Madam, replied I to her, I comeyrow my parents, who sent me. Send from me to Mr. Lucas's, and pret. ind. chez let him know that I am very much vexed at the letter he has written to me. 1st. In requires some attention from the learner, who is to observe, that dans always conveys a limited idea, and is followed by the article when the following word ad- mits of it ; on the contrary, en conveys a very indeter- minate idea, and seldom admits of the article, whether expressed in English or not. Ex. II est dans la maison, He is in the house. Elle est en Angleterre, She is in England. EXERCISE. He always keeps himself shut up in his room. Take all the linen which I shall want in our journey, and linge, m. put it into my box. Walk into the parlour. We live in the county of Surrey.' Is there a good fire in the 398 PREPOSITION. room? Ovid, one of the finest poets of the Augustan Auguste, m. age, expired in the seventeenth year of our Lord, at si eel e, ra. Tomi, near Varna, on the western coast of the sur, p. occidental^ adj. cote, f. \ Black Sea, whither he had been banished by the emperor Augustus. Is your sister in France? No, madam, she is in Spain. How long do you intend to stay in town ? Sir, do you keep a house ? No, we live in (ready-fur- ^ garni, adj. lushed*) lodgings 1 . Your eldest son behaved like a chambre, f. en <&> hero. If my son behave like an honest man, I shall en =* act towards him as a father. In what does human* en =" vo* happiness* consist? 1 If you wish to be happy and esteemed in this world, live like a man of honour and en HP, de probity. 2d. In, after words denoting pain, hurting, or wound- ing, and preceding one of the possessive pronouns in con- junction with any part of the body, is to be rendered by one of the following articles, au, a la, a l\ aiix, or by the preposition d, and the possessive pronoun is left out ; and when in precedes a noun denoting a part of time, it is not to be expressed in French. Ex. // etoit blesse au bras, et non He was wounded ui his arm, jl lajambe, and not in his leg. Vous les trouverez toujours You will always find him at chez lui le matin, home in the morning, EXERCISE. My toother has constantly a pain in his head, and I murderer at the bottom of his heart. He did it "with the homicide au fond intention of pleasing you, and not with any design of le dessein hurting you. I went last week to Mr. Olympus, in nuire dam the expectation of receiving the money which I lent attente pret. def, him a month ago ; but he was not at home. 1 live in dans the hope of receiving it one time or another. He said so fvith a design of deceiving you. 2d. With must be rendered by de after the following verbs, to starve, to die, to do, to dispense, to meddle, to en- compass, to load, to cover, to strike, and those denoting fulness : likewise after the following adjectives, charmed, pleased, displeased, endowed, $c. Ex. Elle meurt de froid et de She starves with cold and Jaim t hunger. 402 PREPOSITION. Je suii content de ce que I am pleased 'with what I j'aig have. EXERCISE. Lazy people ought to starve with hunger and devoir, v. condit. scold. The winter was so severe, that I was starving pret. def. with cold. They are so rich, that they do not know what to do with their money. I hope you will dispense que me tvith that disagreeable work. Do not meddle tvith besogne, f. se tneler my affairs, meddle with your own. It is reported on all Km de sides that Paris is to be* encompassed with walls. Do entoure you see that waggon ? It is loaded with goods. He chariot, m. was overwhelmed with grief. The enemy, struck accable, adj. nath terror and astonishment, ran, away." Honour me with your commands. 1 have filled my cellar with good beer and excellent wine. Narcissus, seeing himself in a clear fountain, (fell in) love devenir v. amour eux t adj. with hia own person?-- - I am delighted with the charms agreeable company of your sister. As to us, little satisfied with his answers, we took other measures. Are you not pleased with the behaviour of your son Thomas. You would be wrong to be avoir tort, de dissatisfied with him ; for he behaved like an honest mecontenty adj. se conduire, v. PREPOSITION. 403 man in that affair ; and he is endowed icith many good doue, adj. qualities. The man who meddles with nobody's affairs, but quietly follows his own, seldom makes himself vaguer a <**> enemies. 3dly. With is rendered by contre after words denoting anger or passion : and before nouns denoting the matter r instruments, tools, or expressing how and in what manner a thing is done or made, it is rendered by one of the follow- ing articles, au, a la, a I', aux, or by the preposition a, according to the gender and number of the following noun. Ex. Madame votre m$re est tres* Your mother is very angry Jachee contre vous, ivith you. Une table a tiroirs, A table with drawers. Dessiner au crayon, la To draw ivith a pencil, "with craie, chalk. Se battre a I'cpee, au pisto- To fight ivith swords, "with kt, pistols. EXERCISE. My brother was in* such 1 a passion? tw'/A me, that I si *o colere, f. thought he would have beaten me 1 believe what you croire, v. say ; but I was very angry with her when she told me she would not do it.- I live near the river, and if you <=H cond. come to see me, we will fish with a net or a line. <<>> Jilet, m. Hgne, f. Your brother and my cousin fought with sabres and not 'with pistols; the former was wounded (in his thigh,) and a la cuisse the latter (in his) side. My house has been built tuitk au & lime and sand. Did Miss Arnold show yovu-the picture she has drawn with Indian ink ? No ; but she showed Chine, f. 404 PREPOSITION. me her mother's picture done -with chalk ; I assure you it is very like her. I bought a penknife with two blades. ressemblant,adj. ^ lame,f. 4-th. With is not to be expressed after some verbs, such as, to meet with, to trust with, to supply with, to reproach ivith, &c. It is likewise to be suppressed where it expresses the situation, position, &c. of a person, or when it is used in the sense of having, holding, &c. Ex. // a essuyt lien des c/m- He has met faith many grins, troubles. Nous lui fournirons tout ce We will supply him with dont il aura liesoin, every thing he wants. // se promene toujours un He always walks with a book livre d la main, in his hand, that is, having or holding a Look, &c. EXERCISE. He met with so many mortifications from essttyer, y. de la part de his sons, that 1 through* grief 6 he" felh ill* and died. de tomber, v. > - When you meet a (poor man) never reproach rencontrer, v. malheureux him with his poverty ; but endeavour to furnish him with lui lui the means of emerging from his misery. 1 have moyen,m. de sortir trusted -Mr. N. with my son's education, in the firm confier d confidence that he will answer my expectation. The confiance a attente, f. New River supplies London with all the water which fournir d dont the inhabitants stand in need of. 1 reproached her avoir besoin, v. *" lui with her ingratitude towards her benefactors. He often walks round the garden with a stick in his hand. baton, m. Never speak to any body with your hat on your head. le la PREPOSITION. 405 He is represented on horseback, ivit/i a sword in his divided into copulative, comparative, disjunctive, adver- sative, casual, dubitative, exceptive, conditional, continun- tive, conclusive, &c. Instead of following this arrange- ment, it will be of more importance for the scholar to understand, that different conjunctions govern the follow- ing verb in different moods. Some govern it in the infinitive mood, others in the indicative, and others in the subjunctive. CONJUNCTIONS WHICH GOVERN THE VERB IN THE INFINITIVE MOOD. Afin de, in order to. Am oinsde,or 7 rf A moms que de, J jivant de, better 1 . , Avant que de, J ! Au lieu de, instead of. rf f JJepeur de, J JZxcepte de, except to. Faute de, for want of. Jusqu'a, to that degree that, till, so far as. Loin de, far from. Plutot que de, rather than. EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. Jn order to learn 2 well 1 , we must study with a great on devoir, v. deal of attention. - It will be impossible for you to learn Frejieh unless you be diligent. - Let us breakfast i- before we begin (any thing). - A prudent man ought to o>* rien think several times, before he acts -- He is gone to **>" egir f v. CONJUNCTION. 40T church, instead of coming with us.' I would not do it Jbr Jear of displeasing you. - He is capable of (every thing), except of doing good. For ivant of tout sending for a surgeon in time, he lost his envot/er cherclier, v. chirurgien, m. <2 arm. - He carried his insolence to that degree, that he pousser, v. spoke injurious* words 1 to him. Tar from, exciting dire, v. them to fight, I did all that I could in order to prevent a them. - She would do (any thing) (in the) world rather les en tout au than speak to him. Instead of studying, he loses his time. CONJUNCTIONS WHICH GOVERN THE VERB IN THE INDICATIVE MOOD. Ainsi que t * comme, as. Tout ainsi que,* just as. Apres que,* after that, after. A cause one, "I , T> 1 J- because. Parce que, j A ce que, according as, or to. A condition que, on or upon condition that. A mesure que,* in proportion as, as. Au lieu que, whereas. DCS le moment que,* the moment that. Aussi long-tans que,* as long as. Aussi loin que,* as far as. Aussitot que, Sltot que y Attendu que, considering thnt, seeing that. Comme, or 1*0, En tant que, J ~_ > De maniere que 2 * Defagon que, "] *> 1 De sorte que t V in such manner that, so that. Si bien que, TeUement que, '} 408 CONJUNCTION. Depuis que, ever since, since. Puisque, since. D'ou vient que, how comes it to pass that, why. Lorsque, 1 , h Quand, J Mais, but.f Outre que, beside that. Apeine que, hardly, scarcely, but, or when. Pendant que, 1 * while> landis que, j Peut-etre que, perhaps. % uand ,> d I though. Quand meme, j as. Tant que* as long as. Autant que,* as much as. D'autant que, whereas, for as much as, since. D'autant plus que, as much more, the more, as. Toutefois, yet, nevertheless. Toutes lesfois que, every time, as often as, whenever. Sinon que, except that. SI, if, in case, whether. EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. I called at your sister's, as you had desired me. < passer, v. m'en I punish you (just as) you deserve (it.) - After you comme were gone, I began writing.' -I love you because you behave better than your brother. - He will write to you, on condition that he shall speedily receive your promptement, adv. answer. In proportion as we study, we become learned. A skilful gardener pmlls up weeds as arracher, v. maunaise herle t f. f This conjunction, when beginning a sentence, is always rendered by niais- lathe middle of a sentence, the word but is always rendered by ne before the verb, and que after it. Ex. Je n'a parle a votre/rere que deux I have spoken to your brother Imt foia, twice. CONJUNCTION. 409 they grow. The moment that I saw you, I knew you again. 1 followed him (with my) eyes as des far as I could. As soon as they had taken the general, pus the array surrendered. You (look at) me, as if I regarder, v. had taken your book Your mother is quite altered, change, p. p since 1 D saws her* last 2 . You must stay at vis la dernierefois que home, since you are not well. How comes it to pass puisque that I have not seen your friend till now? Why, in pro- portion as we grow older, do we not grow wiser? devour, v. When she had done speaking, she (fell asleep). s'endormir, v. Did you not see Mr. Brown this morning? Yes, but N'avez-vous pas vu (I could not) speak to him. Though you would give je n'ai pas pu Quand me but half of the money you owe me, I should be very much obliged to you. Beside that he does not apply as he should, he (is often absent) from school. le devroit s'absente souvent We were hardly arrived, when it began to rain. While a you lose your time, your brother improves fast.- beaucoup, adv. Play (on the) harpsichord, while I shall write my exercise. du clavecin, m. Perhaps the master will forgive me. Though you should cheapen for two hours, I could not abate six- marchander, v. pence. Our father punishes and rewards us according as we deserve. Speak as long as you please, I will not T 410 CONJUNCTION. grant you what you ask me. 1 avoid slanderers, as eviter,v. medisant,^. much as I fear them. This proceeding was the more extraordinary, as it was contrary to the laws of the king- dom. Virtue reigns so much the more sovereignly, as it does not reign by force and fear. All men (seek after) rechercher, v. riches, and yet we see few rich men happy. 1 see the > king and queen every time I go to Windsor. He inter- rupts me as often as I speak. Whenever I go to Lon- don, I meet him. She said nothing to me, except that it was impossible for her to do what you required of o> lui de exiger her. (In case) Mr. S. calls here, tell him I am not at Si passer, v. home, and ask him when he will come again to see me. If you do it, you will be punished. Tell me sincerely whether he did it or not. We should spare our* epargner, v. selves many troubles, icere we more prudent. f Observations. 1. The conjunctions that have this mark * affixed, as it appears in the preceding ones, require the verb they govern to be put in the future, whenever this verb is connected with another expressing a future action. Ex. JVoKS partirons quand vous We shall set off when you voudrez, please. EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. You will be rewardedjM.tf as you deserve. After you \ %.y have done your exercises, you shall go out. I will explain themes, m. t S*?> if 'f we, &c. CONJUNCTION. 411 these rules to you as we read them. The mo- a mesure que ment that you burn this letter, the danger will be over. fni We will follow you as far as you go. As long as you (keep company with) those people, never come to my frequenter, v. gens house. We will set out as soon as we have dined. Send me Miss White, when she has done writing. Jini, p. p. de As long as you behave well, you will be dear to se comporter, v. me. In short, said this good king, I shall only think myself happy in as much as I cause the happiness of my people. 2. It has been remarked on the degrees of com- parison, that every comparative must be attended by the conjunction gue, than ; it must now be observed, that, if que precede a verb in the infinitive, it is to be fol- lo.ved by de. But if the verb be neither in, nor can be turned into the infinitive, the conjunction must then be attended by ne ; that is, gue before the noun or pronoun, and ne before the verb. Ex. II vaut mieux etre mnlheu- It is better to be unfortunate reux que d'etre coupable, than criminal. Man ptre est revenu plutot My father came back sooner que nous ne l'alten,dions, than we expected him. EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. It is more pleasing to enjoy good health than to agrcable, adj. possess a large fortune. It is harder (to be revenged) se vengcr, v. of an enemy, than to forgive him. It is better to make a sacrifice of a limb, said the surgeon, than to lose your T 2 412 CONJUNCTION. life. When the thunder roars, it is less dangerous grander, v. to be in an open field, than to take shelter under a tree. se mettre, v. Should you not apply more than you do ; you, especially, who are to be useful to your country ? That would devcz give me more pleasure than you imagine. Did you not le receive your goods before war was declared?. How many people can say to themselves, had I employed my time better than I did when I was young, I should be {in good circumstances) now. Diseases come faster a man aise, than they go away. sen oiler, v. COXJUXCTIONS WHICH GOVERN THE VERB IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Afinque, > that in order that . Pour que, y Avant que, before. Au or en cas que, in case that ; if; suppose that. A mains que,\ "\ Excepteque, I unl till . Si ce n'est que, f Qiie ne, J Bien que, ~\ Encore que, I h , althou ] f r u that M Quoique, j Tout J que, J Bien entendn que, with a proviso that, upon condition that, provided that. f Tbe conjunctions thus marked ({) require the negation ne before the following verbs. See the observations on ne and ne-pas, p. 370, No. 10. A mains ipi'il ne lefasse, Unless he does it. J)e crainte, or de peur qu'ils re For /ear t or lest they come. viennent, 4: See Rule 11, page 136. CONJUNCTION. 413 , for fear . que, } J Dieu vetiille que, God grant. Plaise, or plut ^ Z)/V ywe, please God, or would to God. A Dieu nc plaise, God forbid. Jusqu'ci ce que, till, until. Loin que, far from. Nonobstant que, notwithstanding that. Pour pen que, how little soever, however little. Sans que, without that. Soit que, whether, or. Supposons que, suppose, let us suppose that. Tant senfaut que je, I am so far from. Tant Senfaut quit or quelle, he or she is so far from. Taut sen font que nous t or votts, we, or you are so far from. EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. I will explain to you every difficulty, that you may not be disheartened in your undertaking. - Carry that money decottrager, v. to Mrs. Nolle, in order tliat she may pay the writing-mas- ter when he come.- - A wise and prudent man lives with fut. economy when young, in order that he may enjoy the fruit of his labour when old.* -- Before you begin an action, consider well, and see whether you can (bring reflcchir en ve- il about), for it is the end that crowns the work. In nir d bout ceuvre, m. case you want my assistance, call me, I shall be near you. If I do not call upon you this afternoon, I will write to * Say, when he will 6c old. 414 CONJUNCTION. 3*ou. Suppose you lose your friends, what will become of you ? You will never be respected, unless you forsake the bad company you keep. You abandonner, v. Jrequenier cannot finish (to-night), unless I help you. I will not ce soir, lend it you, unless you promise me to return it to her as de rendre, v. soon as vou can. 1 shall not cease to importune vou, fut. de till you have forgiven me. They are not happy, though they are rich. The general arrived yesterday morning at the camp, weary and tired, but very seasonably; las, adj. immediately he gave his orders to begin the pour, p. commencer action, though he had not yet all his troops. For all attaque that she has no fortune, I do not love her the less for it. As* zealous* a friend 2 as* he appears to be, I do tOn not trust him.- My mother will come to see you, pro- elded you promise me to go to the play with her. I will go to London to-morrow, provided you accompany me. 1 will write again to your brother to-morrow, lest he should not have received my last letter. (present of the subj.) We avoided an engagement Jbr fear (of being de- que nous 11 e feated), their force being superior to ours. Jitssions *battus God grant you may not be disappointed in your hopes ! Would to God I had been there ! I would have conquered vaincu CONJUNCTfON. 415 or perished. God forbid I should blame your pres. of the subj. conduct. Your business never will be done properly, unless bien you do it yourself. 1 shall not go out to-day, except you go with me. They fought with fury venir se bait re, v. acharnement,m, (on both sides), till night came. J shall not set out, de part et d'autre <<=>, till I have dined. 1 will write till we go out Far avant que from from hating him, I wish him prosperity. I pres. subj. du bonheur. forgive you this time, provided you promise me not to be de lazy any longer, and pay more attention to what you faire, v. are told. I will give you leave to dance, provided you promise not to overheat yourself. Why did you de s'echaiiffer, v. ** tell me my father was arrived, though you knew pret. ind. the contrary ? He is so quick, that hotv little soever he ^ vif, adj. is contradicted, he (flies into a passion) in an instant. contraric, s'emporter, v. However little you give her, she is of so 1 good 3 a 1 I ui tempers that she is always pleased.-- (\n you touch naturel, m. content, adj. ^^ it "without my brother perceiving it? Sw/yj^k we dine sappercevoir en here to-day, and to-morrow at our house. -Fam so for from blaming you for having assisted him, that, on the contrary, I very much admire your conduct. He is so farfrom despising her, that, on the contrary, he respects and honours her. It is so far from raining, that, on the 416 CONJUNCTION. contrary, I think we shall have dry and hot weather during all this week. Observations. 1 . The conjunction si, if, instead of being repeated in a sentence, is more elegantly rendered by gue, with the verb following it in the subjunctive mood, as, in- stead of saying, Si vous venez chez moi, et If you call upon me, and si vous ne me trouvez pas, do not find me at home, It is more elegant to say, Si vous venez chez moi, et que vous ne me trouviez pas, &c. 2. Que must also be repeated in the second part of a sentence, as well as the pronoun, when there is a con- junction in the first part of it ; in this case que requires the following verb to be put in the same mood as the precede ing. Ex. Dh queje 1? aural vu et que As soon as I have seen him je lui aurai parle, je vous and spoken to him, I will lejerai savoir, let you know it. Quoiqu'il soit plus riche que Though he is richer thart vous, et qu'# ait de meil- you, and has better leurs amis t friend*. t PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS.- (Read the two preceding Observations. t If your father do not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will lend you some. If you avoir besoin de should see your sister, and speak to her, &c. If you \ study and" take pains, I assure you that you will learn the French language in a very short time. Whether you eat CONJUNCTION. 417 or drink, sing, dance, or play,* do every thing with grace and attention. If you love me and be willing to oblige me, do not go to France with her. If men were wise, and would follow the dictates of reason, they lumiire, f. would save themselves many sorrows. -[/"you tpargner, v. se meet my brother, and he speak to you, do not answer. Though you have good relations, though your merit be parent, m. known, and you do not want friends, your projects manquer de will not succeed without your brother's assistance. As soon as I have dressed myself, and breakfasted,f I will futur. past go to see him. While you play and lose your money, your sister is learning her lesson. We must pity him who Nous devons plaindre has no talent. Play on the organ, while I read my bro futur. ther's letter and answer him. Beside that he never futur. y studies, and is always in the country, he has not so much wit as his sister. 1 will explain to you every difficulty, (In order that) you may take courage and learn well. Though you should have the best master in England, and Quand d* learn all the rules of the grammar, if you do not put them in practice, you will never speak good French. God bicn * Qiie must be repeated before every one of those verbs ; say, then, or that you drink, thai you sing, that you dance, or that vow play, &c. f Say, and tttat I shall have breakfaittil, T 5 418 CONJUNCTION. grant you may succeed in your pursuits, and obtain the entreprise, f. favour you solicit so ardently ! Whether God raise grace, f. clever, v. up thrones, or pull them down ; whether he com- *- abaisser, v. ^>> municatc his power to princes, or withdraw it puissance, f. retirer. v. (from them), and only leave them their own weakness ; leur he teaches them their duty in a sovereign manner. de, p. Whether you speak or hold your tongue, you will se taire, v. obtain nothing from me ; but whatever you may say, speak (so thai) you may never offend any one. Your bro- demaniered. *<* infi. ther told me he was young, and was but twenty years old when he was made a captain ; I think he was better in- : ' % . Os formed, and had more experience than you have. 1 CO-3 can assure you, that both our officers and soldiers have behaved nobly, and performed prodigies of valour. RULE 1. All verbs denoting tew//, trill, command, de- sire, doubt, Jear, ignorance, entreaty, persuasion, preten- sion, surprise, &c., when followed by the conjunction que, govern the following verb in the subjunctive mood. In short, in those dispositions of mind where the will is chiefly concerned, or whenever we express a thing with some degree of doubt or hesitation, then the verb must be put in the subjunctive mood. The verb croire, to think, to believe., when used negatively or interrogatively, and followed by the conjunction que, governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Croyez-vbus quil soit hon- Do you believe him to be ncte? honest? Je doute que vous lefassisz, I doubt of your doing it. .CONJUNCTION. 41? Jenecroispasqu'eUei-ienne, I do not believe she will come. That is to say, do you believe TM AT he, &c. I doubt THAT you idll do it. See FALLOIR, and the rules after it. EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. You wish him to pay you : he has no money, I am obliged to lend him some every day.- I do not think de that true philosophy may be less useful to women than men ; but I remark, that the most part of those who remarquer, v. meddle (with it) are but very bad philosophers, and do se meler, v. en not become better wives for it. 1 do not believe that en your mother will arrive to-day. She wishes you may <^> succeed in all your undertakings. 1 fear * she pres. subj. craindre v. (will go away) without speaking to me. 1 much fear" s'en uller, v. infi. he will come sooner than you expect him.f Do attendre, v. you not say you are surprised that William has not spoken to you (ever since) last week ? For my part, I am not depuis Quant ft moi surprised at it, for he is always pouting. Do you think bonder, v. he will succeed, and obtain the place J he aims at ? pres. subj. aspirer, v. You have had much trouble, and we all fear lest hereafter she should give you H much more. If you believe him * See p. 3/"0, No 10. t See p. 369, No 5. J Say, and that he will obtain the place to u'hich, &c. jj Say, elle ne vovs eit domic, &c. / 420 % CONJUNCTION. to be your friend,* why then do you not follow his ad- vice ? - It is necessary for you to go thither, and assure que him, that I am very thankful for all his kindness.- reconnoissant de I wonder that Mr. R. has not yet asked your sister in encore marriage. If you see her, and she speak to you, do not answer her. - Order her to do it. lui Ordonner imagine we are sure they will come to-night ? f'imaginer, v. ce soir you think it is possible for you to (bring it about) ? croire, v. que en venir d bout, v. Jt is just we should suffer, since we deserve it. - He (was afraid) lest you (should come) while he was craindre, v. gue imperf. subj. (gone out). - Our master has ordered, that we should get sortir, v. nous nous le- vp to-morrow morning early. - You did not think vions that she wanted to deceive you, when she told you that. vouloir, v. - 1 wonder you should doubt, that it is your etre surpris, v. daughter who told it me. Do you think my mother will let .us go to the ball next week ? - Were Mr. S. permettre discreet and willing to undertake that affair, I would com- municate it to him immediately.' It will be better for que you to go and speak to him yourself, while he is in town, <<*> en because I do not doubt of his undertaking it.f I am cer- % * Here ttie verb croire being used affirmatively, governs the verb ffre in the indicative mood ; say, then, si vuus croyes qti'il est, &c. f Say, / do not doubt THAT he WILL VNDEP.TAKE it. (Pro. subj.) CONJUNCTION. 421 tain that he will satisfy you. Your uncle is very glad fut. you have written to your father. 1 will give you no rest, unless you are reconciled with your mother. I gue ne do not believe it is she who has done it. My brother is not well, and I doubt very much of his coming to see que us before next spring. Do you think he is on the en, p. <<=> road ? I doubt whether he will come before next &uivant,adj. week or not. RULE 2. 1st. After the verb vouloir, the verb to have governing another verb, is not expressed, but rendered in French by que. 2d. When the sign of the future tense, shall, refers to the will of a person, and means I choose, I do not choose t do you, choose, $c. it must be rendered in French by the present tense of the indicative mood of the verb vouloir, according to the number and person of its subject with the following verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Je veux qviilfasse cela, I will have him do that. Je veux que vous me mon- You shall show me that letter, triez cette letlre, that is to say, I choose you to show, &c. Voulez-vous que je dense ? Shall I dance ? that is to say, do you choose that, &c. EXERCISE. You would have your daughter return to-mor- Vouloir, v. revenir, v. row, but that is impossible. 1 will have your father know what you have done : you must stay here till he rester, v. come Your mother would have you come directly; why do not you come then? 1 absolutely intend v. 422 CONJUNCTION. that she shall go thither directly, and tell him that, aille a I'instant whether he be ill or well, I will have him set out as soon as he has received my letter.-. I will have you see my house, and tell me what you think of it. She shall not go into the country, unless I go with her. . My father 'would have me and my brother walk all the way. Jaire a pied, v. Your sister shall go with me to Croydon, and not you. Your father will have you go to France in a month ; 1 am very glad of it ; 'however I would not have you act agir too precipitately. Shall my brother show you avec trop de precipitation his translation ? Your brother asked me whether he pret.ind. might go home to-morrow ; I told him he might pret. ind. pouvoir, imperf. go -whenever he thought proper : but you shall remain. lejugeroit d propos here till you have learned all your lessons. 1 know a gentleman who is going to Paris : shall I tell him to de <:all upon you ? I would not have you go to Germany passer chez without understanding French well, as that language car .will enable you to learn German much sooner; than mettra a meme you imagine.- Your brother shall not go out to-day. penser Will you (be so good as to) go and carry that letter avoir la bonte de <=>, to the pdst ? I tell you, that you shall go ; I would havfi you .pay more attention to what you are told.* * Read Role 25, page 38 S. CONJUNCTION. 423 RULE 3d. Qtii, que, or dont, preceded by a superlative, require the following verb to be put in the subjunctive mood ; and when qui stands as a nominative to a verb, denoting a condition, it also requires the following verb to be put in the subjunctive mood. Ex. C'est la plus belle Jemme She is the handsomest wo* qu'on puisse voir, man that can be seen. C'est le plus mcchant garfon He is the most wicked boy quejc connoisse, that I know. Je veitx une Jemme qui soit I will have a wife who is belle, handsome ; that is to say, I will not have any woman for a wife, but on condition shfi be handsome. Observation. Pie is, she is, it is, they are, being followed by a substantive or a pronoun, must be rendered by c'est lui, C'est elle, C'est eux. EXERCISE. Do you say you are surprised, that he has not yet encore written to you ? I assure you (it is not to be wondered at), ccla n'est pas surprenant for he is the most negligent man I know.' It is neces- sary for you to go thither, and assure him* that he has que done nothing that should (make me angry.) devoir, v. pres. sub. Jflcher, v. He is the most charitable man we have in this neighbour- hood. Did you not tell me you sought a master chercher, v. who had a good pronunciation, and a great deal of patience ? When a father is capable of teaching his children, he is the best master that they can have. I know nobody that improves more than Miss C.f Jftire des progrds, and when she was learning French, had she learned it . >^^^^ * Say, and that you, &c. ^HRf*-}- Say, who makes more progress thartf Sic. 484 INTERJECTION. by rules, she would speak, write, and translate now, mu ch better than Miss S., though she was two years in France ait tie Has not your brother some friends whom he can trust? - Your father has bought the fii*5st horse that I sefer, v. have ever seen. - Is there any lady that appears more reasonable than she does - It will begetter for you to go w " J ^ ue and speak to him yourself, instead ofjwriting to him. He is the most diligent and the most careful man we have in this country.' Before you begin any thing of impor- tance, consult somebody on whom you can rely. - f a ire fond 9 v. Do you know any body who goes to FrjriBe ? - If you do not follow my advice, believe me, it wil|p^'the greatest misfortune that can happen to you. Babylon was the finest city that ever was built. If you lend me a horse, lend me one that goes well. The God who has cheated us, and who created the universe, is the only one to whom we owe adoration, and the only one whpm we ought to fear. __ /1 W CHAP, IX. OF INTERJECTIONS. Interjections, as before observed, serve to express the sudden emotions of the soul. There are several sorts, viz. Of joy, grief, pain, admiration, aversion^ silence } cc encouraging, warning, &c, such as, k INTERJECTION. Courage ! Allans ! come, be cheerful ! ^a, courage ! come, come on ! Bon ! good ! Ah, mon Dieu ! oh, my God ! Ah! ay! Ha, quellejoie! O, joy ! O del ! O heaven ! Ft ! Ji ! fy upon ! fy ! Hola, ho ! ho, there ! Helas ! alas ! Malheur d ! wo to ! Miscricorde ! bless me ! Prencz garde ! gare ! have a care t Paix, chut, st, st ! hist, hush ! Silence ! silence ! EXERCISE. Come, friends, let us rejoice Come ! here are n se rejouir, v. for you, brother. Fy, fy ! Robert, you do not think penser,v. of what you say. "Why do you not endeavour to- d, s'effbrcer, v. de acquire it? Alas! who can express the torments I suffer here ? A man without religion, never having hi* heart or mind at peace, can, alas! be but a very esprit, m. en, p. unfortunate creature. Wo to you ! usurers, misers, usurier,m-avare,m. unjust possessors of (other people's) goods ; hearken autrui, pro. MM, m. ecouter, v. to these words : The treasures of iniquity (will be of no v* parole, f. ne servir de service) to you. -O! (lazy people), go to the ant; rien fournil, f. consider what she does, and learn from her wisdom and industry. Bless me ! I am undone ! Hush there ! perdu, p. p. silence! O ! the dismal effects which laziness pro- Juneste, adj. 426 RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. cluces ! -How 1 tremendous" an* office^ is 6 that of 4 a terrible, adj. le =* <* judges ! What wisdom, what integrity, what knowledge, science, f. what sagacity of mind, what experience (are required !) nejaut'ilpas avoir,?. RULES on the PREPOSITIONS de, ei and pour with respect to verbs that either command or reject them. RULE 1. 1st. No verb, standing as subject to another verb, is to be preceded by any preposition. Ex. Nourrir des sentimens de To entertain sentiments of vengeance est indigne d'tin revenge is unworthy of a bon chretien, good Christian. 2d. No preposition is to be placed before any verb pre- ceded by one of the following verbs, oiler, croire, devoir, Jaire,Jalloir, savoir, valoir mieux, venir, pouvoir, oser, vou- loir and penser,t\\is last,meaning etre sur le point, to be near. EXERCISE. To know how to give seasonably is a talent every body vO bas not. To be able to live with one's self, and to know how to Uve with others, are the two great sciences of life. had rather do it now than later. Why aimer micux, v. dare you not undertake it ? I think you might succeed. pouvoir, v. reussir, v. He says he will lend you his gun with all his fusil, m. de teart, because you know how to make use of it.' & se servir, v. Aristotle, though so great a philosopher, was never able ires <* to penetrate the cause of that prodigy. Tell him, that lie may set out when (he pleases). You never il luiplaira, v. ne-pas could come more seasonably. We are going to pouvoir, v. a propos RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. 427 Vauxhall to-morrow. 1 am going to see your brother. (Is it not better) to set out now, than wait valoir mieux, v. de attendre, v. any longer? If you think to oblige her, you mistake. v=s phis long temps. setromper,v. We intended to have a ball yesterday, but my sister was not well 1 had like to have fallen twenty Aipense <**> tomber times coming hither. To instruct, please, and move en the passions, are the three principal qualifications requisite talent, m. in an orator. If you would read this book, I dans vouloir, v. could lend it to you for four or five days. pouvoir, Y. RULE 2. 1st. The particle de is put before a verb in the infinitive mood, when any of the following words, of, from, or ivith, are used before the participle active of any verb. (See rule 28, on the participle active, page 334. 2dly. After a noun substantive joined immediately to a verb, either with or without the following articles, le, la t or les. Sdly. After the following adjectives, decent, glad, im- possible, necessary, sorry, worthy, vexed, and the like. 4thly. After the following verbs : to advise, to apprehend, to bid, to cease, to command, to conjure, to counsel, to defend, to defer, to deserve, to desire, to endeavour, to intreat, to fear, to hasten, to long, to order, to permit, to persuade, to pray, to pretend, to promise, to propose, to refuse, to remem- ber, to threaten, to tell, to mam, to undertake, fyc. 5thly. After the conjunction que, preceded by the com- parative degree. EXERCISE. I have desired your brother to lend me some money. prier, v. My mother ordered me to tell you, to go and ordonner, v. * " speak to her directly. Did you not permit him to I'instant lu* 428 RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. go out this morning ? 1 am surprised to find you so ill. sortir,v. I have not desired you to play. Bid your dire, v. f /. mpnninp Ha morf. RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. 429 much. 1 shall never refuse to do you a service, as rendre, v. long as it will be in my power. Have you a mind to *>> envie, f. do what you have promised me ? I desired preter pluperfect you to bring your sister with you ; why did you not ?* I forbid you to speak or write to him (any more). dcfendre, v. davantage, adv. Would you not be very glad to read and speak Italian? Condemn the opinion of (no one) hastily; but personne endeavour to regulate your own by the line of truth.' s'effbrcer, v. < o* veritt, f. Who can hinder me from speaking or writing to empecher, v. her? (Give me leave) to tell you, that you do very Permettre, v. wrong to disoblige your aunt. He (was not con- mal, adv. se conten- tented) to demolish the temple and pull down the statues, ter, v. abattrc, v. but, &c. (Is there any thing) more glorious, than to Est-il rien de change enmity into friendship? (I long) to see II me tarde, v. your mother, and tell her all that I think (about it.) lui en, pro. RULE 3d. The particle cl is to be placed before a verb in the infinitive mood. 1st. After the auxiliary verb, avoir, to have, imme- diately followed by a substantive or an adverb, express- ing a futurity in the action. Ex. J'ai plusieurs lettres a ecrire, I have many letters to write. 2dly. After nouns substantive joined to the verb avoir, or nouns adjective joined to the verb ctre, signifying to be addicted, apt, bent, diligent, disposed, dreadful, easy,jit t hard, inclined, quick, ready, subject, used, &c. * Do it, is understood, and must be expressed in French. The verb fairs must be put in the preterite indef. 430 RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. 3dly. After the following adjectives, admirable, good* dexterous, handsome, scarce, the last, the/zVs/, the second, &ci 4lhly. After the following verbs, to amuse, to aspire or aim at, to begin, to condemn, to continue or go on, to compel or force, to design or destine, to dispose, to employ or spend, to encourage, to engage, to excite, to exhort, to help, to induce, to invite, to learn, to please, to serve, to take tt pleasure or delight into, or to teach, to think, &c. EXERCISE. Come hither, Paul, I have something to communicate to you.- We have much to fear in our present sit uation, and a great many hazards to run. 1 cannot go to the play to-night ; for, I have five or six visits to pay. rendre, v. Is there any thing pleasanter to behold than the flux and reflux of the sea? We ought to learn how to *0> subdue our passions, conquer our desires, and suffer subjuguer, v. patiently the most cruel misfortunes. She is always disgrace, f. the first to (find fault) with what I do. Do not trouver d redire d gather that apple, it is not yet good to eat. Mr. N. told me you had a country-house to let. Mr. F. is a loner, v. very agreeable man, always ready to serve his friends, but he has the misfortune to be inclined to gaming. We had for a long time nothing to eat but the fruits which we had gathered. The greatest part of men spend their % time either in doing nothing, or doing what they ought not to do. It is very hard to believe what you j adj. RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. 481 say of her. Tell him, I have no complaint to make d'elle of his conduct. Why do you oblige her to ask my de pardon, since she is not inclined to do so herself? 1 disposee believe she takes a delight in tormenting me. Life is v=>> plat sir so short, that we should employ all our days in preparing ourselves for the other world. There is no more danger to fear. Use yourself, said a father to his son, to S'accoutumer, v. practise virtue. Virtue alone helps us to bear with supporter,?. patience all the vicissitudes of fortune. Never amuse yourself in reading bad books. You can never spend passer, v. your time better than in reading and studying the history of your own country. Learn to speak well ; but, above all, to speak truth. That science which teaches us to dire, v. see things as they are, is highly worthy of being cultivated. An affectionate man always takes pleasure in obliging his friends. Does your master teach you how to translate English into French? Do you begin to translate I French well? Why did you not oblige him to pay you what he owes you ? Why do you not (get ready) s'apprtter, v. to set out with us ? 1 love to discourse with polite 5 s'enlretenir, v. and 3 sensible4 people 1 . eclair es sens o Observations. 1st. For the sake of euphony, the follow- ing verbs, to begin, to continue, to constrain, to engage, to 432 RULES ON PREPOSITIONS. txhort, to compel, or force, to endeavour, to oblige, may be followed by de or <), as most convenient. 2d. The preposition pour is often used to translate to after the adverbs enough, on purpose, too, too much, or less; and before an infinitive in the beginning of a period. 3d. Whenever in order to can be substituted for the English preposition to, that preposition must be rendered by pour. EXERCISE. I will do (every thing) in my power to please him.' tout Good rules are useless, if the attention, industry, and assiduite, f. patience of the scholar be not put into practice to learn them.- Mrs. B. has too much pride to confess she (is in the wrong.) To understand geography well, we avoir tort on must, &c.- I assure you that I came on purpose to see tout eacpres you. The wicked live to die, but the righteous die to live. She has vanity enough to believe all you tell her. i What makes the misfortunes of kings, is not to have friends bold enough to tell them the truth. 1 wrote to you sotrie time ago to let you know, that your brothers faire, y. were arrived. He promised me, that he would do every thing to deserve the honour of your protection. I sent yesterday my servant to your aunt's to desire her to send me back again the book I lent her a month ago ; but she x was not at home. We did all that we could faire, v. to pass the river, but could not (accomplish it). Why venir a bout de, v. OBSERVATIONS ON PREPOSITIONS. 433 did you not punish her for having done what you forbade her to do ? A man should live a century at least to de-croit siecle know the world, and many other centuries (to know connoitre encore how to) make a proper use of that knowledge. apprendre bon connoissance OBSERVATIONS ON THE PREPOSITIONS C11, ddllS, and O t IN or AT. EN expresses a vague and indeterminate sense. Ex. EN tons temps, EN tous lieux le public est injuste. J'ai vecu en pays etranger. DANS expresses a precise and determinate sense, and conveys to the mind the idea of within ; it means that the object spoken of is contained within such another. Ex. Ma sceur est dans sa chambre, My sister is in her room. Ce livre est dans la biblio- That book is in the library. theque, The preposition a expresses also a precise sense, and points out the situation of the object spoken of. Ex. Us sont a la promenade, They are out walking. Mes enfans sout an spectacle. My children are at the theatre. Observations. 1st. It often happens that tlie mind of him who speaks embraces at once the idea attached to ivithin, as well as that of the situation of the object spoken of; and in such cases dans and d may be indifferently used. Ex. II est dans lejardin t or il est He is in the garden. au fardin, Le cneval est dans I'ecurie, The horse is in the stable. or a Pccurie, 2d. EN points out the duration, the length of time ; as in an hour ; in a short time, and answers this question: in ixhat time? in what length of time? Ex. Ilarrivera en trois jours, He will arrive in three days; that is to say, he will take three days to come. V 4S4 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS DANS points out the time when an event will take place ; it answers this question When? Ex. // arrivera dans trois jours, He will arrive three days hence. ' 3d. The three following modes of speaking claim some attention. EIRE EN VILLE ; KTRE DANS LA VILLE ; ETRE A LA VILLE. To say of Mrs. B. who lives in town, elle est en wile, is equivalent to this : elle nest pas chez elle, she' is not at home. To say Mrs. B. est dans la vitte, merely means that she is somewhere within the town. To say that she is a la ville implies only that she is residing in town. TRE EN CAMPAGNE ; ETRE A LA CAMPAGNE. Eire en campagne means (speaking of troops) that they have taken thejield. j?lre en campagne means also that we are travelling. Eire a la campagne implies that we live in the country. Ex. Les troupes sout en campagne, The troops have taken the field. Mon pere est en campagne My father is travelling on pour affaire, business. Nous dcmeurons, or nous We live in the country. sommes a la campagne, IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS ON THE VERB dVOir t tO have, &c. Avoir nial & la tt-te, to have the head-ache, or a pain in the head. Avoir mal aux oreilles, to have sore ears, or a pain in the ears. Avoir mal aux yeux t to have sore eyes, or a pain in the eyes. Avoir mal au nez, to have a sore nose, or a pain in the nose. Avoir mala la louche, to have a sore mouth, or a pain in the mouth. Avoir mal aux dents, Sfc. to have the tooth-ache. IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 435 We say, after the same manner, Avoir froid aux mains, aux pieds, S$c. Ex. J'ai froid d la tcte, aux My head, my hands, and my mains, el aux pieds, feet are cold. Avoir beau^ to be in vain. Ex. Vous avez beau parler, It is in -vain for you to talk. Avoir de la peine d. Avoir peine a, Ex. J'ai peine a vous croire, I can hardly believe you. Avoir besoin de, to want to have occasion for. Avoir la bonic de (daigner), to be so kind as. Avoir connoissancc, avis de, to have notice of. Avoir cours, to take, to be in vogue. Avoir honte, rougir, to he ashamed. Avoir la mine de,io be like, to look like. Ex. Vous avez la mine d'etre in- You look like a man of un- tclligcnt, derstanding. Avoir pitic de, to pity. Avoir part au gateau, to share in the booty. Avoir bonne mine. Ex. Vous avez tres-bonne > y ^ fl to . d mine aujourd hui, j Avoir plus depeur que de r,ial, to be more afraid than hurt. Avoir raison, to be in the right. Avoir soin, to take care. Avoir tort, to be in the wrong. JV'auozV que faire de, to have no occasion or business of or for. N 1 avoir garde de, or \ are ex- f to be sure not, or by Se garder bien de, j pressed by L no means. Alter son train, to go one's own way. Aller trouver quelqu'un, to go to somebody. Venir trouver, to come to. EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING RULES. I could not call upon him this morning, because I had pret. ind. A PAIN IN MY head. My brother would have come with me, but he has A SORE LEG, and is obliged to keep his bed. 1 heard your mother had the TOOTH-ACHE: is it true ? No, madam, but she has A PAIN IN HER side, 172 436 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. which prevents her from going out. 1 have not yet finished ray exercise ; for MY HANDS WERE so COLD, that I could not write another word. IT WILL BE IN VAIN FOR YOU to write to me ; I never will answer you. I CAN HARDLY believe what you tell me. IT is iu VAIN FOB WE to speak to her, she still GOES HER OWN WAY. tovjours Miss N. cried very much ; but I think she was MORE AFRAID THAN HURT. IT HAS BEEN IN VAIN FOR HIM to torment your sister ; she never would tell him what happened to her when she was at Mr. P's. Go TO him, and tell him that, unless he returns me my books in a very short time, I will desire his father to send them to me ; when you have told him that, do not wait for his answer ; COME TO me immediately ; I shall be at your mother's, where I am to dine, and thence go to the play with the whole family. IN VAIN I give myself trouble ; I am not the richer for it. Your sister does not LOOK so WELL to-day as she did yesterday. AM I NOT IN THE o> o* RIGHT to go there no more? 1 WILL TAKE CARE to prevent them from coming hither. Believe me, I have long suspected them, and now I am very certain that both your cousins and they HAVE HAD A SHARE IN THE BOOTY. "We SHOVLD often BE ASHAMED of our finest actions, if IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 43T the world knew all the motives which cause them. You ARE IN THE WRONG not to ask for his horse; he would lend it to you. Why should I borrow his horse, when I have one of my own? I HAVE NO OCCASION FOR moi-mcme his BE so KIND as to carry that letter toMr.H's.; but BE SURE NOT to tell him who sent you. 1 hope lui pret. def. you will BY NO MEANS go there again, after what has hap- plus pened to you. Somebody having advised Philip, Alex- der's father, to banish from his states a man who had spoken ill of him; I SHALL BY NO MEANS DO IT, answered he ; he would go every where and speak ill of me. vcr> On ETRE, to be. {a son aise, ") . , , . en bonne passe, (- tO be m S d CirCum - blen danx ses affaires, } Eire blen aupres de quclqitun, to be in great favour with A some one. Etre mal avcc quelqifun, to be out of favour with some one. Eire a charge a quelqu'un, to be chargeable, troublesome, or a burden to some one. Eire but a but, to be equal. fyre de moitic, to go halves. Eire a la portce du fusil, du canon, to be within musket- shot, gun-shot. Eire a la portce de la voix, to be within call. Eire \^^ a ve *M c de, ") to be upon the brink, or very J sur le point de, j near to. Eire en etnt de, ~\ . , Avoir le moyen de, / to afford ' to be able ' 438 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. Your brother is IN GOOD CIRCUMSTANCES now. Somebody told me he WAS IN GREAT FAVOUR WITH the king. Yes, it is true ; but HE is OUT OF FAVOUR with my father, because HE is TROUBLESOME to the family. Well, Mr. R. and he ARE EQUALS. 1 thought Mr. A. and Mrs. D. WENT HALVES in that affair; but I heard the contrary. Suffer me to tell you, you do very wrong to treat her as you do ; you undoubtedly have forgotten she is IN the queen's FAVOUR. Well, if she is IN the . queen's FAVOUR, do you imagine I am not to tell her what I think of her conduct? The two fleets WERE WITHIN GUN-SHOT, and VERY NEAR beginning the en- gagement, when we lost sight of them. WE WJLL BE les perdimes de vue WITHIN CALL. Why do not you take a coach now and then ? said she to me. I would willingly take one some- times, replied I to her, but I cannot AFFORD it. On FAIRE, to make, or do. Faire cos de, to value, to esteem. Faire un tour de promenade, to take a walk. Faire le malade, to sham sickness. Faire Pecole buissonniere, to play truant. Faire bgaucoup de chemin, to go a great way. Faire le bel esprit, to set up for a wit. Faire fond sur quelqu'un, to rely upon one. IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 439 Faire savoir, (envoyer dire,) to let one know, to inform, to send word. Faire voile, ov -) . ., nf it \ i 'if lO bcl sail. Mettrc a la voile, J Faire jaire, to bespeak, to get made, to oblige one to do Faire de son mieux, to dolour best. Faire semblant, to pretend. Faire de son pis, to do our worst. Nefaire que de, to be just, or Venir de, to have but just. Ex. II ne fait que Karriver, He is but just arrived. Nefoire que, to do nothing but. Sejaire des amis, des cnnemis, to get friends, enemies. Sejaire des affaires, to bring one's self into trouble. S'enjaire accroire, to be conceited, to have a good opi- nion of one's self. C'en estfait de moi, I am undone, it is over with me. C'en etoitjait de lui, he was undone, it was over with him. C'en sera Jail d'elle, she will be undone, it will be over with her. C'en seroitfait de nous, we should be undone, it would b6 over with us. The English verb, to cause, preceding the verb to fa, immediately followed by a participle past, is rendered in French, by the verbjaire, and then the verb to be is not expressed, but the participle past is turned into the infinitive mood. Ex. // lui fit couper la tete, He caused his head to be cut off. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. Do not lose that ring for I VALUE it much ; it is a par- ticular friend of your's who gave it me.' I would go and TAKE A WALK, if I were well. Do you not SHAM SICKNES &iow and then? Did not your brother PLAT? TRUANT last week? That man GOES A GREAT WAY for 440 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. a trifle.* -Mr. P. SETS UP FOR A WIT wherever he goes. You may RELY UPON what I tell you. He suc- ceeds better IN BEING CONCEITED, than in giving others a good opinion of himself. 1 begin to be very much sa- tisfied with his brother, who now DOES HIS BEST, and will soon be able to write a French letter to his father. LET ME KNOW whether he will pay you or not. We SHALL SET SAIL about the fifteenth of the next month. Why did not you BESPEAK three or four pair of shoes j more ? SEND WORD TO your brother, or LET him de plus. KNOW, that there is a* letter* for* him* here 1 . 1 will give him an exercise, and OBLIGE HIM TO DO it in my theme, m. presence. She told me that, if she WERE OBLIGED TO DO it, she WOULD DO HER WORST. She PRETENDS not to listen ; but I assure you she does not lose a word of Of what you say. We were BUT JUST come in when it began to rain. It WOULD HAVE BEEN OVER WITH us, had the enemy known what passed in our camp. You BO NOTHING BUT play from morning till night. That dn au soir young lady WILL GET FRIENDS every where. If you do not fake care, you WILL BRING YOURSELF INTO TROU- BLE. Permit me to tell you, that they ARE TOO CON- IDIOMATIflAL EXPRESSIONS. 441 CEITED. Your brother is UNDONE, if his master come to know it. In 1606, King James caused the oath of ft allegiance (to be drawn up;) and, in 1621, summoned a dresser convoguer parliament, iu which (were formed) the two parties, called sejbrmerent Whigs and Tories. ON DIFFERENT VERBS. Aimer mieux, to have rather, to choose rather. Se donner bien des airs, to take a great deal upon one's self. // nejaut pas s'ttonner, it is no wonder. II me tarde de, I long to, Sfc. Penser, to be like. (Followed by a verb in the infinitive mood.) S'en prendre a, to lay the fault or blame upon one, to look to one for. S'y lien prendre, or 7 to go the right way to S?y prendre de la bonne Jhfon, > work. jS'^ prendre mnl, to go the wrong way to work. S'y prendre tout autrement, to go quite a different, or an* other, way to work. Prendre en mauvaise part, to take amiss. Venir d bout de, to bring about, to accomplish. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. I CHOOSE RATHER to set out HOW than later. She told me she HAI> RATHER do any thing, than speak to Mr. L. They HAD RATHER have had you stay in Italy two or three years longer.' Do not you think Mrs. H. TAKES A GREAT DEAL UPON HERSELF ? If is NO WONDER that I do not speak French so well as you; you have been several years in France, and I never wai there. 1 hope your brother will succeed in his under-* 442 IDIOMATICAI, EXPRESSIONS. taking ; for he GOES THE RIGHT WAY TO WORK, and I am certain that he WILL BRING IT ABOUT. Your cousin, On the contrary, will always be poor; for he GOES THE WRONG WAY TO WORK in every thing he undertakes. She LONGS TO see your father, and tell him how well you have behaved all the time of his absence. 1 HAD LIKE to have been killed in coming here. If he lose, he WILL LAY THE BLAME UPON yOU. Why do }'OU LAY THE BLAME UPON her? she was not even in the room when that happened. Should not your sister succeed, whom WOULD SHE LAY THE FAULT UPON ? -I LONG TO tell you something ; yet I do not know how to communicate it to you, for fear of disobliging you. When you have a mind to tell me something disagreeable, you should GO QUITE A DIFFERENT WAY TO WORK 1 beg of yOU not TO TAKE AMISS what I tell you. Do not begin a thing, ynless you are sure TO BRING IT ABOUT. ON DIFFERENT VERBS. Se passer de t to do without, or to be easy without. Savoir bon gre, to take kindly of as a favour. Trouver mauvais que, to take ill if.* Trouver d redire a, to find fault with. Tenir*maison, to be a housekeeper. Tenir boutique, to be a shopkeeper. Tenir parole, to keep our word. * With the following verb in the subjunctive. IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 443 X7 . . , x c to be in a person's power, Nelemrgua, F ' F to lie in a person ' g power Ex . 11 ne tient qu'a tnoi, a vous, It is in my, your, his, her, a lui, d elle, 8$c. power, &c. // ne tient pas a moi, d vous, It is not my, your, fault, %c., que, &c., if.* S'eii tenir a, to stand to. Vonloir du lien a, to wish one well. En vouloir a, to have a spite against. Je souhaiterois pouvoir, I wish I could. // y va, il y alloit, de votre vie, your life is, was, at stake. II y va, il y alloit, de mon honneur, my honour is, was, con cerned in it. Je ne laisse pas de, I nevertheless, or for all that. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. When I have wine, I drink some; but when I have none, I AM EASY WITHOUT. - If you will BE so KIND AS TO write to my father, to let him know my situation, I SHALL TAKE IT AS A FAVOUR, and I promise you never to FIND FAULT WITH what you may command me.- I WISH I COULD do you that service, I would do it with all my heart. - 1 hope you WILL NOT TAKE IT ILL IF I to write to your uncle (at the) same time.-- I SHALL STAND en TO what you say. HE HAS BEEN A HOUSEKEEPER these five-and-twenty years. - He might have succeeded much better than he has done, had he followed his uncle's ad- vice and mine ; but he never was satisfied, and was con- tinually FINDING FAULT WITH what we were telling him. * With the following verb in the subjunctive, and ne before it. 444 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. However little you send him at present, he will TAKE IT Quelgue pen que KINDLY OF you. - IT is IN HER POWER to live in the a Country, and be very happy there. IT WILL SOON LIE IN YOUR POWER to make us happy. I assure you it SHALL de BE MY FAULT IF YOU do not succeed ; for I WISH you WELL. - Since it LIES IN YOUR POWER to recoro- Puisque de mend Mr. P. to your friend, why do you not do it ? When you see him, you may assure him, that, since it is JN MY POWER to do it, I will not forget him. - You HAVE A SPITE AGAINST my brother; because IT WAS pret. ind. "JN His POWER two or three times to oblige you, and he pever would. - 1 WISH I COULD persuade you how sorry tie I'ajamaisjait he was for it ; but his honour WAS CONCERNED in not pret. ind. doing it : and, though you are very angry with him, he , NEVERTHELESS, (or, FOR ALL THAT,) do yOU a service if IT WERE IN HIS POWER - Had I thought he would have refused me that favour, I never would have asked it of him ; I might very well HAVE DONE WITHOUT 'It. You ought to have thanked him for that attention, ^__ de instead of being angry with him ; but when your sisters heard that you could not obtain his leave, THEY TOOK IT AMISS, and have (ever since) HAD A SPITE AGAINST HIM. depuit lors EXERCISES ON DIFFERENT SUBJECTS. 445 .When they told me of it, I would most willingly *" bien have represented to them how much they WERE IN THE WRONG; but (I could by NO MEANS) do it; for I know je me gardai bien de IT is IN THEIR POWER to do me a great deal of harm, and I do not wish to GET ENEMIES.* Every body ad VCUX mires her humanity ; for, though he has behaved in T so* se comporter cP ungrateful* a* manners towards her, she would, NEVER*. THELESS, have done him a service, if he had lived. GENERAL AND PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON DIFFERENT SUBJECTS. Of the UNDERSTANDING of LANGUAGES. The understanding of languages serves (for an) intro- intelligence, f. de duction to all the sciences. By it we come with very parvenir, v. little trouble at the knowledge of a great many fine things, which have cost those who invented them a great deal of pains. By it all times and countries lie open to siecle, m. etre, v. us. By it we become, in some measure, contem- sorte porary to all ages, and inhabitants of all kingdoms. It de (enables) us to converse with 1 the 3 most 4 learned* mettre en ttat men* of all antiquity, who seemed to have lived and laboured for us. We find in them masters, whom (we are en il nous allowed) to consult at leisure ; friends who are alwaya est permis que nous avons * See at page 439 for the translation of to get friends, to gel enemiet* X 446 EXERCISES ON DIFFERENT SUBJECTS. at hand, and whose useful and agreeable conversation d nos ordres improves the mind. It informs us of a thousand curious enrichir, v. subjects, and teaches us equally (how to profit) by the d profiler t v. des virtues and vices of mankind. Without the assistance of languages, all these oracles are dumb to us, and al> pour, p. these treasures (locked up) ; and, (for want of having) nous sontfcnms au dtfaut de the key which alone can open us the door (to them), we en, p. remain poor in the midst of so much riches, and ignorant in the midst of all the sciences. , OF STUDY. We (come into the world) surrounded with a cloud of naitre, v. d'un ignorance, which is increased by the false prejudices of a bad education. By study, (the former) is dispersed, and celui-la dissiper (the latter) corrected. It gives proportion and exactness celle-ci juslesse, f. to our thoughts and reasonings; instructs us how to range in due order whatever we have to speak or write ; donner de I* order memesapre- dance 1 at court, though for the time of advancement, is sence a la v=s eo, son too great a restraint upon him. His life should be passed pour on a bed of down. If he is employed, moments (are as) duvet. sembler, v. hours to him ; if he is amused, hours are as moments. & s'amuser,